NS-Series Programmable Terminals SETUP MANUAL

NS-Series Programmable Terminals SETUP MANUAL
Cat. No. V083-E1-26
NS-Series
NS15-TX01@-V2
NS12-TS00@-V1/-V2, NS12-TS01@-V1/-V2
NS10-TV00@-V1/-V2, NS10-TV01@-V1/-V2
NS8-TV00@-V1/-V2, NS8-TV01@-V1/-V2
NS8-TV10@-V1, NS8-TV11@-V1
NS5-SQ00@-V1/-V2, NS5-SQ01@-V1/-V2
NS5-TQ00@-V2, NS5-TQ01@-V2
NS5-MQ00@-V2, NS5-MQ01@-V2
NS5-SQ10@-V2, NS5-SQ11@-V2
NS5-TQ10@-V2, NS5-TQ11@-V2
NS5-MQ10@-V2, NS5-MQ11@-V2
Programmable Terminals
SETUP MANUAL
OMRON, 2003
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in
any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is
subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless,
OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting
from the use of the information contained in this publication.
Trademarks
• Microsoft, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
USA and other countries.
• ODVA, CIP, CompoNet, DeviceNet, and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA.
• This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Other company names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
Notice
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a
qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
! DANGER
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual.
Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can
result in injury to people or damage to property.
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
! WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
! Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word "Unit" is also capitalized when
it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of
the product.
The abbreviation "Ch," which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products,
often means "word" and is abbreviated "Wd" in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation "PLC" means Programmable Controller.
The abbreviation "host" means a controller, such as an IBM PC/AT or compatible computer,
that controls a PT (Programmable Terminal).
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different
types of information.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Indicates precautions on handling the product to ensure that the product is used
safely.
Precautions
for Correct Use
Indicates precautions to ensure that product functions and performances are
realized, to ensure that the reliability of the product is maintained, and to ensure
that the product is otherwise used correctly.
Note
Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
Reference
Indicates supplementary information on procedures, descriptions, and settings.
1, 2, 3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
CS1G-CPU@ @ -V1
Boxes in model numbers indicate variable characters. For example,
"CS1G-CPU@ @ -EV1" indicates the following models: CS1G-CPU42-EV1,
CS1G-CPU43-EV1, CS1G-CPU44-EV1, and CS1G-CPU45-EV1.
1
Contents
Notice .............................................................................................................................................1
About this Manual ...............................................................................................................................7
Related Manuals ..................................................................................................................................8
Terminology ........................................................................................................................................9
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................10
Section 1
Overview ................................................................................................. 1-1
1-1 NS-series PT Functions and Operation............................................................................................ 1-2
1-1-1 PT Functions for FA Manufacturing Sites ........................................................................... 1-2
1-1-2 NS-series PT Operating System........................................................................................... 1-3
1-2 Communications with the Host ....................................................................................................... 1-5
1-2-1 What is an NT Link?............................................................................................................ 1-6
1-2-2 Ethernet................................................................................................................................ 1-6
1-2-3 Controller Link..................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2-4 Host Link ............................................................................................................................. 1-6
1-2-5 Connecting to a Temperature Controller.............................................................................. 1-6
1-2-6 Memory Link Connections .................................................................................................. 1-7
1-2-7 Communicating with Other Devices .................................................................................... 1-7
1-2-8 EtherNet/IP .......................................................................................................................... 1-7
1-3 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 1-8
1-3-1 Supported Peripheral Devices .............................................................................................. 1-8
1-4 Procedure for Running NS-series PTs ........................................................................................... 1-10
Section 2
Before Connecting ................................................................................... 2-1
2-1 Connecting the Host ........................................................................................................................ 2-2
2-1-1 Communications Types and Connection Methods............................................................... 2-2
2-2 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................................................... 2-8
Section 3
Installing the PT and Connecting Peripheral Devices......................... 3-1
3-1 Installing the PT .............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3-1-1 Installation Environment...................................................................................................... 3-3
3-1-2 Installing RS-232C/RS-422A Converters ............................................................................ 3-3
3-1-3 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel ................................................................................. 3-4
3-1-4 Connecting the Power Supply.............................................................................................. 3-7
3-1-5 Wiring the Ground Wire ...................................................................................................... 3-8
3-1-6 Peripheral Device Connection Limitations .......................................................................... 3-8
3-2 Starting the PT............................................................................................................................... 3-10
3-2-1 Operation at Startup ........................................................................................................... 3-10
3-2-2 Starting the PT for the First Time ...................................................................................... 3-12
3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer......................................................................................................... 3-14
3-3-1 Connecting via RS-232C or Ethernet................................................................................. 3-14
3-3-2 Connecting via USB........................................................................................................... 3-14
3-3-3 Connecting via a Modem ................................................................................................... 3-16
3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers................................................................................................... 3-17
3-4-1 Connection Methods .......................................................................................................... 3-17
3-4-2 Setting Bar Code Readers .................................................................................................. 3-18
2
3-4-3 Data Format ....................................................................................................................... 3-19
3-4-4 Bar Code Input................................................................................................................... 3-19
3-5 Connecting to Printers ................................................................................................................... 3-20
3-5-1 Connecting to a Printer Compatible with ESC/P Raster and BJ Raster ............................. 3-20
3-5-2 Connecting a PictBridge-compatible Printer...................................................................... 3-21
3-6 Using Memory Cards..................................................................................................................... 3-23
3-6-1 Installation.......................................................................................................................... 3-24
3-6-2 Replacing the System Program .......................................................................................... 3-25
3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards .............................................................................. 3-26
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit ...................................................................................................... 3-32
3-7-1 Video Input Unit Components ........................................................................................... 3-32
3-7-2 Nomenclature and Functions.............................................................................................. 3-33
3-7-3 Installation Method for Video Input Unit .......................................................................... 3-34
3-7-4 Connecting to Video Input Connectors.............................................................................. 3-39
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit ................................................................................. 3-44
3-8-1 Controller Link Interface Unit Components ...................................................................... 3-44
3-8-2 Nomenclature and Functions.............................................................................................. 3-45
3-8-3 Installation Method for Controller Link Interface Unit...................................................... 3-48
3-8-4 Wiring ................................................................................................................................ 3-55
3-9 Connecting a Monitor.................................................................................................................... 3-61
3-10 External Brightness Adjustment .................................................................................................... 3-62
3-11 RS-232C/RS-422A Selector DIP Switch....................................................................................... 3-63
Section 4
Connecting the Host to Serial Port........................................................ 4-1
4-1 1:1 Host Connection ........................................................................................................................ 4-2
4-1-1 Connection Methods ............................................................................................................ 4-2
4-1-2 Unit Setting Methods ........................................................................................................... 4-4
4-2 1:N Host Connection ....................................................................................................................... 4-7
4-2-1 Connection Methods ............................................................................................................ 4-7
4-2-2 Unit Setting Methods ........................................................................................................... 4-7
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link............................................................................................................... 4-18
4-3-1 Unit Setting Methods ......................................................................................................... 4-19
4-4 Recommended Connector Cables.................................................................................................. 4-27
Section 5 Connecting to Host via Ethernet or Controller Link ............................... 5-1
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet..................................................................................................... 5-2
5-1-1 Host Types and Settings....................................................................................................... 5-3
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link .............................................................................. 5-16
5-2-1 What Is a Controller Link Network?.................................................................................. 5-16
5-2-2 Data Links.......................................................................................................................... 5-17
5-2-3 Troubleshooting Using Indicators...................................................................................... 5-22
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP .............................................................................................. 5-25
5-3-1 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................................................... 5-25
5-3-2 Selecting Network Configuration Devices......................................................................... 5-26
5-3-3 Network Installation........................................................................................................... 5-29
5-3-4 Host Types and Settings..................................................................................................... 5-31
3
Section 6
System Menu Operations ....................................................................... 6-1
6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu................................................................................................ 6-4
6-1-1 Mode Configuration............................................................................................................. 6-4
6-1-2 System Menu Configuration ................................................................................................ 6-4
6-1-3 Overview of Menu Items ..................................................................................................... 6-5
6-1-4 Using the System Menu ....................................................................................................... 6-8
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card..................................................... 6-11
6-2-1 Screen Data Area Format................................................................................................... 6-12
6-2-2 Initializing or Saving the Alarm/Event History ................................................................. 6-13
6-2-3 Initializing and Saving Data Log ....................................................................................... 6-15
6-2-4 Initializing and Saving the Operation Log ......................................................................... 6-16
6-2-5 Initializing and Saving the Error Log................................................................................. 6-18
6-2-6 Language Selection ............................................................................................................ 6-19
6-2-7 Removing the Memory Card.............................................................................................. 6-20
6-2-8 Initializing Internal Holding Memories ($HB/$HW)......................................................... 6-21
6-3 PT Settings .................................................................................................................................... 6-22
6-3-1 Start-up Wait Time............................................................................................................. 6-26
6-3-2 Screen Saver....................................................................................................................... 6-27
6-3-3 Key Press Sound ................................................................................................................ 6-28
6-3-4 Buzzer Sound ..................................................................................................................... 6-28
6-3-5 Backlight Brightness .......................................................................................................... 6-29
6-3-6 Calendar Check.................................................................................................................. 6-32
6-3-7 Printer Type ....................................................................................................................... 6-33
6-3-8 Printing Mode .................................................................................................................... 6-33
6-3-9 Orientation ......................................................................................................................... 6-34
6-3-10 Changing Values in Device Monitor Setting ..................................................................... 6-34
6-3-11 Contrast (NS5-SQ@@/NS5-MQ@@ Only) ....................................................................... 6-34
6-3-12 CJK Han Unification Priority............................................................................................. 6-35
6-3-13 Alarm Monitor Registration Procedure.............................................................................. 6-35
6-3-14 Starting the Ladder Monitor from Alarm/Event Summary and History
(NS15/12/10/8 Only).......................................................................................................... 6-36
6-3-15 Setting the Tag Update Notification Message.................................................................... 6-36
6-3-16 Time to Switch to System Menu (NS12, NS10, NS8, or NS5).......................................... 6-36
6-3-17 Double-touch Interval (NS15 Only)................................................................................... 6-37
6-3-18 Analog RGB Output (NS15 only)...................................................................................... 6-37
6-4 Project Settings.............................................................................................................................. 6-38
6-4-1 Project Title........................................................................................................................ 6-38
6-4-2 Number of Labels............................................................................................................... 6-39
6-4-3 Initial Screen ...................................................................................................................... 6-39
6-4-4 Initial Label........................................................................................................................ 6-39
6-4-5 Barcode Input When Using Keypad................................................................................... 6-39
6-4-6 Alarm/Event History Recording Method ........................................................................... 6-39
6-4-7 Data Log Recording Method.............................................................................................. 6-40
6-4-8 Operation Log Recording Method ..................................................................................... 6-40
6-4-9 Error Log Recording Method............................................................................................. 6-40
6-4-10 System Memory ................................................................................................................. 6-40
4
6-5 Setting Passwords.......................................................................................................................... 6-41
6-5-1 Changing the Password...................................................................................................... 6-41
6-5-2 Setting the Password Function ........................................................................................... 6-42
6-6 Communications Settings .............................................................................................................. 6-44
6-6-1 Communications Conditions.............................................................................................. 6-44
6-6-2 Setting 1:1 NT Link ........................................................................................................... 6-46
6-6-3 Setting High-speed 1:N NT Links (Standard, High-speed)................................................ 6-47
6-6-4 Ethernet and EtherNet/IP Settings ..................................................................................... 6-47
6-6-5 Setting the Controller Link Network.................................................................................. 6-50
6-6-6 Setting Bar Code Readers .................................................................................................. 6-51
6-6-7 Modem Settings ................................................................................................................. 6-52
6-7 Screen Data Check ........................................................................................................................ 6-53
6-8 Special Screens.............................................................................................................................. 6-54
6-8-1 Alarm History .................................................................................................................... 6-55
6-8-2 Operation Log .................................................................................................................... 6-56
6-8-3 Error Log............................................................................................................................ 6-57
6-8-4 Device Monitor .................................................................................................................. 6-58
6-8-5 Communication Test .......................................................................................................... 6-60
6-8-6 Video Configuration .......................................................................................................... 6-62
6-8-7 USB Device List ................................................................................................................ 6-64
6-8-8 Display Capture Data ......................................................................................................... 6-65
6-8-9 Memory Card Transfers ..................................................................................................... 6-66
6-8-10 External Application Startup.............................................................................................. 6-68
6-8-11 Version Display ................................................................................................................. 6-69
6-8-12 PLC Data Trace (NS15, NS12, NS10, and NS8 Only) ...................................................... 6-69
6-8-13 NJ-series Troubleshooter ................................................................................................... 6-71
6-9 Hardware Check ............................................................................................................................ 6-72
6-9-1 LCD Check ........................................................................................................................ 6-72
6-9-2 Touch Switch Check .......................................................................................................... 6-73
6-9-3 Touch Panel Calibration (NS15 Only) ............................................................................... 6-73
6-10 Starting Operations........................................................................................................................ 6-74
6-11 Verifying Tags............................................................................................................................... 6-76
Section 7
Maintenance and Troubleshooting........................................................ 7-1
7-1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7-1-1 Replacing the Battery........................................................................................................... 7-2
7-2 Inspection and Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 7-4
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance .................................................................................................. 7-6
7-4 Requesting a Replacement PT ....................................................................................................... 7-14
A
Appendices ....................................................................................................... A-1
Appendix 1 Specifications...................................................................................................................... A-3
A-1-1 General Specifications ........................................................................................................ A-3
A-1-2 Characteristics..................................................................................................................... A-5
A-1-3 Communications Specifications.......................................................................................... A-8
Appendix 2 Dimensions ....................................................................................................................... A-12
Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters............................................................................................ A-21
A-3-1 Dimensions ....................................................................................................................... A-21
5
A-3-2 Mounting and Removing .................................................................................................. A-22
A-3-3 Specifications.................................................................................................................... A-22
A-3-4 DIP Switch Settings .......................................................................................................... A-23
A-3-5 Pin Arrangement ............................................................................................................... A-24
A-3-6 Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables................................................................... A-25
A-3-7 Connection Example ......................................................................................................... A-28
Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters............................................................................................ A-29
A-4-1 Dimensions ....................................................................................................................... A-29
A-4-2 Methods for Mounting and Removal ................................................................................ A-29
A-4-3 Specifications.................................................................................................................... A-31
A-4-4 DIP Switch Settings .......................................................................................................... A-32
A-4-5 Pin Arrangement ............................................................................................................... A-33
A-4-6 Block Diagram .................................................................................................................. A-34
Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables............................................................................................ A-35
A-5-1 Cable Preparation.............................................................................................................. A-35
A-5-2 Soldering ........................................................................................................................... A-36
A-5-3 Hood Assembly................................................................................................................. A-36
A-5-4 Preparing Connecting Cables for Host Connection .......................................................... A-37
Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection ..................................................................... A-41
A-6-1 Connecting Cable Assembly ............................................................................................. A-41
Appendix 7 Preparing Connecting Cables for Bar Code Readers ........................................................ A-43
Appendix 8 Standard Models ............................................................................................................... A-44
Appendix 9 List of Optional Products .................................................................................................. A-60
A-9-1 Anti-reflection Sheets: NS15-KBA04, NS12-KBA04, NS7-KBA04, NT30-KBA04 ...... A-60
A-9-2 Protective Covers: NS15-KBA05N, NS12-KBA05(N), NS7-KBA05(N),
NT31C-KBA05(N) ........................................................................................................... A-61
A-9-3 NT30-KBA01 Chemical-resistant Cover .......................................................................... A-62
A-9-4 Replacement Battery: CJ1W-BAT01................................................................................ A-62
A-9-5 Recommended Memory Cards.......................................................................................... A-63
A-9-6 NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface Unit ....................................................................... A-63
A-9-7 NS-CA001/CA002 Video Input Unit................................................................................ A-63
A-9-8 Attachments: NS12-ATT01(B)/NS12-ATT02/NS8-ATT01/ NS8-ATT02 ...................... A-63
A-9-9 NS-USBEXT-1M USB Relay Cable................................................................................. A-64
Appendix 10 System Memory List ..................................................................................................... A-65
Appendix 11 Differences between "-V1"/"-V2" Models and Other Models ...................................... A-68
Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu......................................................................................................... A-70
6
About this Manual
Section 1 Overview
This section provides an overview of the NS-series PTs, including functions, features, connection types, and
communications methods.
Section 2 Before Connecting
This section provides information on methods for connecting NS-series PTs that must be understood before connecting
the host and peripheral devices.
Section 3 Installing the PT and Connecting Peripheral Devices
This section describes the methods used to install the PT and connect peripheral devices.
Section 4 Connecting Host to Serial Port
This section describes the methods for connecting the host to the serial port of the PT.
Section 5 Connecting to Host via Ethernet or Controller Link
This section describes the methods for connecting the PT to the host using the PT’s Ethernet interface and the Controller
Link Interface Unit.
Section 6 System Menu Operations
This section describes the methods for operating the System Menu. It also provides details on functions that are useful
for NS-series PT applications and for system maintenance.
Section 7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This section describes the maintenance and inspection methods for preventing errors occurring, and troubleshooting
measures when errors occur in the PT.
Appendices
Describe hardware specifications and methods for preparing connections cables, and provide lists of standard products.
WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
7
Related Manuals
The following manuals are used for NS-series PTs. (The boxes at the end of the catalog
numbers indicate the revision code.)
This
manual
NS Series -V1/-V2 Setup Manual ...............................................V083-E1-@
Provides information on NS Series V1 and V2 PTs (i.e., NS15-V2, NS12-V@, NS10-V@,
NS8-V@, and NS5-V@).
Describes how to connect the PT to the host and peripheral devices, methods to setup
communications and operation, and procedures for maintenance.
Refer to the NS Series Programming Manual (V073-E1-@) for information on PT
functions and specific operating procedures.
NS Series Setup Manual.............................................................V072-E1-@
Provides information on NS Series PTs prior to V1 (i.e., NS12, NS10, and NS7).
Describes how to connect the PT to the host and peripheral devices, methods to setup
communications and operation, and procedures for maintenance.
Refer to the NS Series Programming Manual (V073-E1-@) for information on PT
functions and specific operating procedures.
NS Series Programming Manual ................................................V073-E1-@
Describes the screen configurations, object functions, and host communications for the
PT.
CX-Designer User’s Manual .......................................................V099-E1-@
The screens displayed on the PT can be created in the CX-Designer and transferred
between the CX-Designer and PT. This manual describes the installation and features
of the CX-Designer. For details on CX-Designer operations, refer to the CX-Designer’s
Online Help.
8
Terminology
The following terminology is used in this manual.
PT
In this manual, indicates an NS-series Programmable Terminal.
NS Series
Indicates products in the OMRON NS@ @ Series of Programmable Terminals.
PLC
Indicates a Programmable Controller in the OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ, C, or
CVM1/CV Series of Programmable Controllers.
NJ/NX Series
Indicates a Controller in the OMRON SYSMAC NJ Series of Controllers: NJ101,
NJ301, NJ501, NX701.
CS/CJ Series
Indicates Programmable Controllers in the OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ Series of
Programmable Controllers: CS1G, CS1H, CS1G-H, CS1H-H, CJ1G, CJ1G-H,
CJ1H-H, CJ1M, CP1H, CP1L, CJ2H, CJ2M.
In this manual, “CJ1H-H” indicates the CJ1H-CPU@@H-R and CJ1H-CPU@@H
CPU Units. “CJ1H-H-R” is used to indicate only the CJ1H-CPU @@H-R CPU Units.
The “CP Series” is used to indicate only the CP1H and CP1L.
C Series
Indicates products in the OMRON SYSMAC C Series of Programmable Controllers:
C200HS, C200HX(-Z), C200HG(-Z), C200HE(-Z), CQM1, CQM1H, CPM1A,
CPM2A, CPM2C.
CVM1/CV Series
Indicates products in the OMRON SYSMAC CVM1/ CV Series of Programmable
Controllers: CV500, CV1000, CV2000, CVM1
Serial Communications Unit
Indicates a Serial Communications Unit for an OMRON CS/CJ-series PLC.
Serial Communications Board Indicates a Serial Communications Board for an OMRON CS-series or CQM1H
PLC.
Communications Board
Indicates a Communications Board for an OMRON C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) PLC.
CPU Unit
Indicates a CPU Unit in the OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ, NJ/NX, C, or CVM1/CV
Series of Programmable Controllers.
CX-Designer
Indicates the OMRON CX-Designer.
Host
Indicates the PLC, IBM PC/AT or compatible computer, or personal computer
functioning as the control device and interfaced with the NS-series PT.
Programming Manual
Indicates the NS Series Programming Manual (V073-E1-@).
9
Introduction
• Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of
electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
• General Precautions
• The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
• Do not use the PT touch switch input functions for applications where danger to human
life or serious property damage is possible, or for emergency switch applications.
• Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or
applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems,
vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety
equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that may have a serious
influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
• Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient
for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems,
machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
• This manual provides information for connecting and setting up an NS-series PT. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the PT and keep this manual close at
hand for reference during installation and operation.
10
Safety Precautions
Notation Used for Safety Information
The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe
usage of the product.
The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety.
Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions.
The following notation is used.
! WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in minor or moderate injury, or may result in serious
injury or death. Additionally there may be significant property
damage.
Symbols
Prohibition
Indicates a general prohibition
Caution
Indicates general cautionary, warning, or danger
level information
Always ensure that the personnel in charge confirm
that installation, inspection, and maintenance were
properly performed for the PT. “Personnel in charge”
refers to individuals qualified and responsible for
ensuring safety during machine design, installation,
operation, maintenance, and disposal.
Ensure that installation and post-installation checks are
performed by personnel in charge who possess a
thorough understanding of the machinery to be
installed.
Do not use the input functions of the PT, such as the
function switches or switches on the touch panel, in
applications that involve human life, in applications that
may result in serious injury, or for emergency stop
switches.
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the PT.
Doing so may impair the safety functions.
Do not attempt to take the Unit apart and do not touch
any internal parts while the power is being supplied.
Doing either of these may result in electrical shock.
Never press more than two points on the touch panel of
the NS15-TX01@-V2 at the same time. An analog
touch panel is used. If two points are pressed at the
same time, it may activate a switch somewhere midway
between the two points.
11
Precautions for Safe Use
1. When unpacking the Units, check carefully for any external scratches or other damage.
Also, shake the Units gently and check for any abnormal sound.
2. The PT must be installed in a control panel.
3. The mounting panel must be between 1.6 and 4.8 mm thick. Tighten the Mounting
Brackets evenly to a torque of between 0.5 and 0.6 N⋅m to maintain water and dust
resistance. Make sure the panel is not dirty or warped and that it is strong enough to hold
the Units.
4. Do not let metal particles enter the Units when preparing the panel.
5. Do not connect an AC power supply to the DC power input terminals.
6. Use a DC power supply with minimal voltage fluctuation that provides a stable output even
if the power supply input is interrupted for 10 ms. The DC power supply must also have
reinforced or double insulation.
Rated power supply voltage: 24 VDC (Allowable range: 20.4 to 27.6 VDC)
Capacity:
NS15: 45 W min.
NS12, NS10, or NS8: 25 W min.
NS5: 15 W min.
7. Do not perform a dielectric voltage test.
8. Use a twisted-pair cable with a cross-sectional area of at least 2 mm2 to connect to the
power terminals and always use M3.5 crimp terminals. Tighten the terminal screws to a
torque of 0.8 N⋅m. Make sure the screws are properly tightened.
9. Ground the Unit correctly to prevent operational errors caused by noise.
10. Do not touch the surface of the circuit board or the components mounted on it with your
bare hands. Discharge any static electricity from your body before handling the board.
11. Confirm that the current capacity of the connected device is 250 mA or less before using
the 5-V power supply from pin 6 of the RS-232C connector. The 5-V output from the PT is
250 mA max. at 5 V ±5%.
12. Turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting cables.
13. Always tighten the connector screws after connecting communications cables.
14. The maximum tensile load for cables is 30 N. Do not apply loads greater than this.
15. Confirm the safety of the system before turning ON or OFF the power supply or before
pressing the reset button.
16. The whole system may stop depending on how the power supply is turned ON or OFF.
Turn ON or OFF the power supply according to the specified procedure.
17. After changing the settings of the DIP switch, always turn the power supply OFF and ON
or reset the PT.
18. Do not perform the following operations while the Memory Card is being accessed:
• Turning OFF the power supply to the PT
• Pressing the PT’s reset switch
• Removing the Memory Card
19. To ensure system safety, incorporate a program that periodically calls PT operation bits
from the host side to check that the PT is properly operating.
20. Start actual system application only after sufficiently checking screen data, macros, and
the operation of the program in the host.
21. Do not press a touch switch with a force greater than 30 N.
22. Do not operate a touch switch using a screwdriver or other tool.
23. Confirm the safety of the system before pressing a touch switch.
24. Do not press touch switches consecutively without pausing in between. If touch switches
are pressed consecutively at high speed, the PT may not be able to detect the inputs.
Confirm that the PT has detected the input of a touch switch before pressing any other
touch switch.
25. Do not accidentally press touch switches when the backlight is not lit or when the display
does not appear. Confirm the safety of the system before pressing touch switches.
12
26. To ensure safety when using numeral input functions, set the upper and lower limits for the
input value.
27. Before initializing screen data, confirm that existing data is backed up at the CX-Designer.
28. When changing the password with the system menu, do not reset or turn OFF the power
supply until writing is finished. If the password is not saved successfully, the screen may
not operate.
29. When using the device monitor, confirm the safety of the system before performing the
following operations.
• Changing monitor data
• Changing operation modes
• Forced setting or resetting
• Changing present values or set values
30. Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subjected to
excessive shock.
31. Do not connect an USB connector to any device that is not applicable.
32. Before connecting an USB connector to a device, make sure that the device is free of
damage.
33. Commercially available USB hubs and the recommended USB hub do not necessarily
have the same general specifications as the PT, and may not function properly if used in
environments subject to static electricity or other forms of noise. When using a USB hub,
take sufficient measures to prevent static electricity and other forms of noise, or do not
install the PT in an environment subject to such noise.
34. Do not perform the following operations while downloading or uploading screen data or
system program. Doing so may corrupt the screen data or system program.
• Turning OFF the power supply to the PT
• Pressing the PT’s reset switch
35. When mounting the Battery, be sure to use the correct Battery and mount it correctly.
36. Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery.
37. Dispose of the Units and batteries according to local ordinances as they apply.
38. Never use volatile solvents, such as benzene or thinners, or chemical dusters to clean the
PT.
39. Mercury is used in the backlights of all PTs except for the following PTs: NS5-SQ1/-TQ1
PTs with lot number 15Z0 or later, NS8 PTs with lot number 28X1 or later, NS10 PTs with
lot number 11Y1 or later, NS12 PTs with lot number 14Z1 or later, and NS15 PTs with lot
number 31114 or later. Do not dispose of the PT together with waste to be processed at
disposal plants. Dispose of the PT according to all local laws, regulations, and ordinances.
40. The backlight in the PT cannot be replaced by the user. Contact your OMRON
representative for backlight replacement.
41. Periodically check the installation conditions in applications where the PT is subject to
contact with oil or water.
42. The NS15-TX01@-V2 uses an analog touch panel. Deterioration over time can cause the
touch points to move. If the touch points move too far, calibrate the touch panel.
43. Never connect more than two crimp terminals to one terminal.
44. Water and oil resistance will be lost if the front sheet is torn or is peeling off. Do not use
the PT if the front sheet is torn or is peeling off.
45. The Rubber Packing will deteriorate, shrink, expand, or harden depending on the
operating environment. Inspect and replace the Rubber Packing periodically.
13
Precautions for Correct Use
1. Do not install the Unit in the following places:
• Locations subject to severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the
specifications
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of high humidity
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
• Locations subject to shock or vibration
• Outdoor locations directly subject to wind or rain
• Locations subject to strong ultraviolet light
• Locations subject to excessive dust
• Locations subject to direct sunlight
2. Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following
locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields
• Locations close to power supplies
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity
14
Conformance to EC Directives
This product is EMC compliant.
• Concepts
OMRON products are electronic devices that are incorporated in machines and manufacturing
installations. OMRON PTs conform to the related EMC Directives (see note) so that the
devices and machines into which they are built can more easily conform to EMC directives.
However, customers may use a wide variety of equipment and manufacturing installations.
Therefore the customer must check whether the Directives are satisfied for the actual system.
EMC-related performance will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other
conditions of the equipment or control panel in which the PT is installed. The customer must,
therefore, perform final checks to confirm that the overall machine or device conforms to EMC
standards.
Note: Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN 61131-2
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference): EN 61131-2
(EN 61131-2 radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
• Conformance to EC Directives
NS-series PTs conform to EC Directives. To ensure that the machine or device in which the
NS-series PT is used complies with EC Directives, the PT must be installed as follows:
• The NS-series PT must be installed in a control panel.
• You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply and the
DC power supply must have minimal voltage fluctuations and provide a stable output
even if the power supply input is interrupted for 10 ms.
• NS-series PTs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common Emission
Standard (EN 61131-2). Radiated emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary
depending on the configuration of the control panel used, other devices connected to
the control panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the
overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives.
• This is a class A product. It may cause radio interference in residential areas, in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures to reduce interference.
15
Conformance to Shipbuilding Standards
This product complies with shipping standards. Application conditions are set for compliance
for individual shipping standards, and it may not be possible to use the product in some
installation locations. Contact an OMRON sales representative before using the product.
• International Shipping Standards
Shipping Standards of Various Countries
Abbreviation
Country
Name
NK
Japanese
Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
LR
Great Britain
Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
DNV
Norway
Det Norske Veritas
RINA
Italy
Registro Italiano Navale
BV
France
Bureau Veritas
GL
Germany
Germanischer Lloyd
ABS
USA
American Bureau of Shipping
KR
South Korea
Korean Register of Shipping
CR
Taiwan
China Corporation Register of Shipping
• Certification Status for NS-series Programmable Terminals
The following table shows the compliance status with shipping standards for NS-series
Programmable Terminals as of April 2009.
Abbreviation
NS5
NS8
NS10
NS12
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LR
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DNV
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
RINA
No
No
No
No
No
BV
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
GL (See note.)
Conditional
Conditional
Conditional
Conditional
No
ABS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
KR
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
CR
No
No
No
No
No
Note: GL certification has been received only for the NS**-V1.
• Certification Zones for Shipping Standards
3. Deck
2. Bridge
Air conditioning
No air conditioning
Devices on deck or bridge
Devices not on deck or bridge
Sea
16
NS15
NK
1. Boiler room
Air conditioning
No air
conditioning
4. Engine room
5. Depends on ship type
Emergency power supply devices on
bulk carrier ships carrying liquefied gas
or hazardous chemicals
1.
2.
3.
4.
Zones with and without air conditioning not on the bridge or deck (e.g., boiler room)
Zones with and without air conditioning on the bridge (e.g., helm room)
Deck zone
Engine room zone (devices mounted on machinery that has strict vibration conditions,
such as diesel engines or air compressors)
5. Depends on the ship type. Emergency power supply devices on bulk carrier ships
carrying liquefied gas or hazardous chemicals.
• Certification Zones for Shipping Standards
NK
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
5. Ship type
(e.g., bulk ship
with liquefied
gas)
No
LR
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
DNV
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
RINA
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
BV
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
GL
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
ABS
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
KR
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
CR
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Standard
1. Not on deck or bridge
No air
Air
conditioning conditioning
2. Bridge
No air
Air
conditioning conditioning
3.
Deck
4.
Engine
(e.g.)
• Precautions for Compliance with Shipping Standards
1. Always install the NS-series PT in a control panel.
2. Install the NS-series PT in a control panel that has air conditioning.
3. Cover the entire surface of the NS-series PT with electromagnetic shielding material and
ground the control panel or operation panel with copper tape or other conductive tape.
4. Completely shield the gap at openings in the control panel or operation panel with a
gasket.
5. Completely shield the gap between the NS-series PT and the panel cutout with copper
tape or other conductive tape before securing the NS-series PT with the mounting
bracket.
6. Connect a noise filter to the power supply line connected between the 24-VDC and
0-VDC terminals.
Electromagnetic Shielding
Manufacturer
Model
Seiwa Electric Mfg. Co. Ltd.
E09F-100, E09R13502P
Note: The transmission rate of the liquid crystal display will decrease by approximately
50% when the electromagnetic shielding is mounted.
Noise Filter
Manufacturer
Model
Cosel Co. Ltd.
TAH-06-683
17
Terms and Conditions Agreement
Warranty, Limitations of Liability
Warranties
● Exclusive Warranty
Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in
materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of
sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in writing by Omron).
Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
● Limitations
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. BUYER
ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE
PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE.
Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for
claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or otherwise of
any intellectual property right.
● Buyer Remedy
Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election, to (i)
replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor
charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-complying Product, (ii)
repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount
equal to the purchase price of the non-complying Product; provided that in
no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any
other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron’s analysis
confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and
maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or
inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by Buyer must be
approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall not
be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of
Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components,
circuits, system assemblies or any other materials or substances or
environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or
in writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the
above warranty.
See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for
published information.
Limitation on Liability; Etc
OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR
PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED
WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual
price of the Product on which liability is asserted.
18
Application Considerations
Suitability of Use
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any
standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the
Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At Buyer’s request,
Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by
itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the
Product in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other
application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining
appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application,
product or system. Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING
SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT
THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE
RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT(S) IS PROPERLY RATED
AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL
EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
Programmable Products
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a
programmable Product, or any consequence thereof.
Disclaimers
Performance Data
Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials
is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not
constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron’s test conditions,
and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual
performance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
Change in Specifications
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based
on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change part
numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of
the Product may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part
numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your
application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time to
confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.
Errors and Omissions
Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is
believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical,
typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.
19
20
Section 1
Overview
This section provides an overview of the NS-series PTs, including functions, features, connection
types, and communications methods.
NS-series PT Functions and Operation............................................................................ 1-2
1-1-1 PT Functions for FA Manufacturing Sites................................................................. 1-2
1-1-2 NS-series PT Operating System ................................................................................ 1-3
1-2 Communications with the Host........................................................................................ 1-5
1-2-1 What is an NT Link? ................................................................................................. 1-6
1-2-2 Ethernet ..................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2-3 Controller Link .......................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2-4 Host Link................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2-5 Connecting to a Temperature Controller ................................................................... 1-6
1-2-6 Memory Link Connections........................................................................................ 1-7
1-2-7 Communicating with Other Devices ......................................................................... 1-7
1-2-8 EtherNet/IP................................................................................................................ 1-7
1-3 System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 1-8
1-3-1 Supported Peripheral Devices ................................................................................... 1-8
1-4 Procedure for Running NS-series PTs ........................................................................... 1-10
1-1
1-1 NS-series PT Functions and Operation
1-1 NS-series PT Functions and Operation
The NS Series offers advanced operator interfaces called Programmable Terminals that can
be used to display required information and provide operating capabilities for FA
manufacturing sites. This section describes the role and functions of the NS-series PTs for
first-time users of Programmable Terminals.
1-1-1
PT Functions for FA Manufacturing Sites
z Line Operating Status Monitor Display
NS-series PTs can be used to display information such as the operating status of the system
and the devices. Graphs and other indicators can be used to better represent the information
and make it easy to understand.
z Directions for FA Site Operators
The PTs can be used to inform the operators of system and device errors and assist them in
taking appropriate measures.
1-2
1-1 NS-series PT Functions and Operation
z Control Panel Switches
The NS-series PTs allow the user to create various on-screen switches. By using touch
switch inputs, operating results can be sent to the host.
1-1-2
NS-series PT Operating System
z Transferring Screen Data
The screen data displayed on NS-series PTs is created using the CX-Designer on a
computer and transferred to the PT through RS-232C, Ethernet, or USB communications.
Create screen data.
RS-232C, Ethernet,
Computer
USB
(CX-Designer)
Screen data
Connect the computer to the PT only
when transferring screen data to or from
the CX-Designer.
Note 1: Some models do not support Ethernet.
Note 2: USB data transfer is not supported for some PT lots and system program versions.
Note 3: If the serial port protocol is set to Allen-Bradley DF1, you cannot connect to the CX-Designer
through that port.
Screen data can also be transferred at high speed using a Memory Card.
Memory
Card
Computer
(CX-Designer)
1-3
1-1 NS-series PT Functions and Operation
z Displaying Screens
The information displayed on the screens is created using the CX-Designer on a computer
and transferred to the PT. The required screens can be displayed by using commands from
the host or touch switch operations.
Host
The required screens can
be displayed by using
commands from the host
or touch switch operations.
z Reading Data from the Host
A communications method such as NT Link Ethernet or Controller Link is used to connect the
host, and the required data is automatically read from the host.
Note: Some models do not support Ethernet or Controller Link.
NT Link or Ethernet,
Controller Link
Host
z Sending Data to the Host
Data input using touch switches (button ON/OFF status, numerals, and character strings) is
sent to the host.
Host
Touch panel
ON/OFF status,
numeric data, etc.
1-4
1-2 Communications with the Host
1-2 Communications with the Host
NS-series PTs allow the user to allocate words and bits in any PLC area for use in accessing
the required display contents and storing input data.
Operations that can be performed include reading and writing allocated word contents and bit
status directly, changing the display status of functional objects on the PT screen, and
controlling and notifying PT status.
The NS-series PTs also enable communications with more than one PLC. A host name is
registered for each PLC connected, allowing access to any PLC areas by specifying the host
name and address.
NS-Series PT
PLC
DM Area
I/O Area
Auxiliary Area
Timers/counters
When using NS-series PTs, the host can be connected using any of the following methods.
• 1:1 NT Link
• 1:N NT Link (normal or high-speed)
• Ethernet
• Controller Link
• Host Link
• Other methods, such as temperature controller protocols
• EtherNet/IP
1-5
1-2 Communications with the Host
1-2-1
What is an NT Link?
An NT Link is a method for high-speed communications between an OMRON PLC and an
OMRON Programmable Terminal (PT) using a special protocol. In addition to a 1:1 NT Link,
where a single PT is connected to a single PLC, NS-series PTs also support 1:N NT Links,
allowing up to eight PTs to be connected to a single PLC port.
CS- and CJ-series PLCs can also be connected using high-speed 1:N NT Link
communications. For details on the PLCs that support high-speed 1:N NT Link
communications, refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models.
In the rest of this manual, "NT Link" refers to NT Link communications in general, "1:1 NT
Link" refers to an NT Link in a 1:1 configuration only, and "1:N NT Links" refers to NT Links in
a 1:N configuration only. Where necessary, "normal 1:N NT Links" and "high-speed 1:N NT
Links" are used. When "1:N NT Links" is used alone, it refers to both normal and high-speed
communications.
1-2-2
Ethernet
Ethernet Units in PLCs that are supported by the NS-series PTs can be used to read and
write data, word, and bit information simply. The use of FINS (Factory Interface Network
Service) message communications, one of OMRON’s standard communications services,
enables high-speed communications without the need to be aware of the protocol.
For details on connection methods, refer to Section 5 Connecting to Host via Ethernet or
Controller Link. For details on the PLCs that can be connected to the Ethernet, refer to
Appendix 8 Standard Models.
1-2-3
Controller Link
Controller Link is an FA network that can send and receive large data packets among
OMRON PLCs and FA computers. Controller Link Units for PLCs that are supported by the
NS-series PTs connected to NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface Units can be used to read
and write data, word, and bit information simply.
The Controller Link supports data links that enable data sharing and a message service that
enables sending and receiving data when required.
For details on connection methods, refer to Section 5 Connecting to Host via Ethernet or
Controller Link. For details on the PLCs that can be connected using Controller Link, refer to
Appendix 8 Standard Models.
Note: Controller Link Interface Units are compatible only with the NS15, NS12, and NS10.
1-2-4
Host Link
Host Link is a serial communications protocol for connecting an OMRON PT 1:1 to a host (a
PLC) to read and write bits and words from the host. Host Link communications connect a PT
to many different PLCs. Refer to the Host Connection Manual (Host Links) for connection
methods and the PLCs for which Host Links can be used.
1-2-5
Connecting to a Temperature Controller
OMRON Temperature Controllers can be connected with an RS-485 connection.
Attach a CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter to serial port A or B to convert the communications
protocol to RS-485. For details, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Temp. Control,
MemLink).
1-6
1-2 Communications with the Host
1-2-6
Memory Link Connections
When the host is a computer instead of a PLC, the Memory Link protocol can be used to
connect with the computer. Use serial port A or B to connect to the host. For details, refer to
the Host Connection Manual (Tem.Control, MemLink).
1-2-7
Communicating with Other Devices
The NS-series PTs can communicate with the following devices.
•
OMRON Trajexia Motion Controllers
•
Mitsubishi FX-series, A-series, and Q-series PLCs
•
Siemens S7-300-series PLCs
•
Yaskawa MP-series Machine Controllers
•
Yaskawa F7-series Varispeed and VS Mini V7-series Inverters
•
Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) SLC500, MicroLogix, PLC-5, CompactLogix,
CompactLogix, and ControlLogix Controllers
•
Devices that support Modbus RTU
• Yokogawa Electric FA-M3/FA-M3R-series PLCs
For details on connection methods, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Multivendor
Connection).
1-2-8
EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP is a multi-vendor industrial network protocol that uses Ethernet. The
specification is an open standard managed by the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor
Association), as is DeviceNet, and it is used for a variety of industrial devices.
NS-series PTs can communicate with CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, CJ2M-CPU3@, NJ@01-@@@@, NX@01-@@@@ CPU Units. (The
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, CJ2M-CPU3@ and NJ501-1@00 have built-in EtherNet/IP ports.)
Also, it is possible to perform tag message communications when using a CPU Unit with a
built-in EtherNet/IP port. These CPU Units contain a tag name server, so if tag names and an
address table are stored in advance in the CPU Unit, it is possible to perform access from the
NS-series PT using only the tag names.
1-7
1-3 System Configuration
1-3 System Configuration
The following information describes the system configuration using NS-series PTs. Refer to
Appendix 8 Standard Models for details on available models.
1-3-1
Supported Peripheral Devices
Host
Twisted-pair cable
Bar Code Reader
Read bar codes as
text string data.
Video Input Unit
(See note 3.)
RS-232C cable (15 m max.)
RS-422A cable (500 m max.)
RS-232C/422A Adapter
Ethernet cable (See note 1.)
Controller Link
Interface Unit
Enables
Controller Link
communications
with a host.
(See note 2.)
Video camera or
Vision Sensor
NTSC/PAL cable
Personal computer
Computer running Windows
Memory Card
Save screen data or
the system program or
automatically read data
at startup.
RS-232C cable
Ethernet cable
(See note 1.)
USB cable
(See note 5.)
NS-series PT
Printer (See note 4.)
Connecting a general-purpose color
printer to the USB port on an
NS-series PT makes it possible to
print out the current PT display.
CX-Designer
VGA cable
Monitor (See note 6.)
Note 1: Only the following models support Ethernet: NS15-TX01@-V2, NS12-TS01(B)-V@,
NS10-TV01(B)-V@, NS8-TV@1(B)-V@, NS5-SQ@1(B)-V@, NS5-TQ@1(B)-V@, and
VS5-MQ@1(B)-V@.
Note 2: Only the following models support the Controller Link Interface Unit: NS15-TX01@-V2,
NS12-TS0@, NS10-TV0@. (The NS8 and NS5 do not support the Controller Link Interface
Unit.)
Note 3: The following models support Video Input Units: NS15-TX01@-V2, NS12-TS0@, NS10-TV0@,
and NS8-TV@@. (The NS15-TX01-V2 does not support the NS-CA001 and it does not support
video input from the NS-CA002. It does support analog RGB input from the NS-CA002.) (The
NS5 does not support Video Input Units.)
Note 4: The NS5-SQ0@(B)-V@, NS5-TQ0@(B)-V@, and NS5-MQ0@(B)-V@ cannot be connected
directly to general-purpose printers.
Note 5: Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via USB for information on connecting the PT and computer with a
USB cable.
A USB Relay Cable can be used to place a USB slave connector on the front of the control
panel. Refer to 3-1-3 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel.
Note 6: Only the following monitor is supported: NS15-TX01@-V2.
• PTs (Refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models.)
• NS-series PT Accessories: Mounting Brackets
Model
NS15
NS12/NS10
NS8
NS5
1-8
Quantity
16
14
4
6
1-3 System Configuration
• Recommended Bar Code Reader (Refer to page 3-15.)
OMRON V520-RH21-6
OMRON V400-H111
OMRON V400-H211
• RS-232C/422A Converters
OMRON NS-AL002 (non-insulated) (Refer to Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters.)
OMRON NT-AL001 (insulated) (Refer to Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters.)
OMRON CJ1W-CIF11
• Recommended Memory Cards (Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards.)
Model
HMC-EF183
HMC-EF283
HMC-EF583
Memory capacity
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
Memory type
Flash memory
Flash memory
Flash memory
• CX-Designer (Refer to the CX-Designer Online Help.)
NS-CXDC1-V@ (CD-ROM version)
• Video Input Unit (Refer to 3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit.)
NS-CA001
NS-CA002: Refer to the NS Series RGB and Video Input Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No.
V086).
• Controller Link Interface Unit (Refer to 3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface
Unit.)
NS-CLK21
• USB-compatible Printers (Refer to 3-5 Connecting to Printers.)
• Attachments (Refer to A-9-8 Attachments: NS12-ATT01(B)/
NS12-ATT02/NS8-ATT01/NS8-ATT02.)
Use an Attachment when replacing NT-series PTs.
NS12-ATT01(B)
NS12-ATT02
NS8-ATT01
NS8-ATT02
• USB Relay Cable (Refer to 3-1-3 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel.)
NS-USBEXT-1M
Reference The following optional products are available. (Refer to Appendix 9 List of Optional
Products.)
Anti-reflection Sheets
(5 sheets)
Protective Covers
(anti-reflection coating)
(5 covers)
Transparent Protective Covers
(5 covers)
Chemical-resistant Cover
(1 cover)
Replacement Battery
NS15-KBA04
NS12-KBA04
NS7-KBA04
NT30-KBA04
(For NS15)
(For NS12 and NS10)
(For NS8)
(For NS5)
NS12-KBA05
NS7-KBA05
NT31C-KBA05
NS12-KBA05N
NS7-KBA05N
NT31C-KBA05N
NT30-KBA01
(For NS12 and NS10)
(For NS8)
(For NS5)
(For NS12 and NS10)
(For NS8)
(For NS5)
(For NS5)
CJ1W-BAT01
(For NS15, NS12, NS10, NS8
and NS5)
1-9
1-4 Procedure for Running NS-series PTs
1-4 Procedure for Running NS-series PTs
Use the following procedure to start up the NS-series system.
Host
CX-Designer
PT
Panel installation
Host settings
Refer to following pages.
1:1 NT Link: 4-2 and A-8
1:N NT Link: 4-7 and A-9
High-speed 1:N NT Link:
4-15 and A-9
Ethernet: Section 5
EtherNet/IP: Section 5
Controller Link: Section 5
Host Link:
Refer to the Host Connection
Manual (Host Links).
Temperature Controllers:
Refer to the Host
Connection Manual
(Temp. Control, MemLink).
Memory Links:
Refer to the Host
Connection Manual:
(Temp. Control, MemLink).
Other Devices:
Refer to the Host
Connection Manual
(Multivendor Connection).
Installation on the
computer
Refer to Page 3-4.
Refer to the CX-Designer
User’s Manual.
Peripheral connections
Power connections
Refer to Page 3-6.
Power ON
See
note
1.
System program
installation
See
note
2.
Data initialization
See
note
3.
Refer to 6-2-1 Screen
Data Area Format.
Screen transfer
Screen creation
Refer to NS-series PT
Programming Manual
and the CX-Designer
User’s Manual.
Refer to 3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards.
System menu settings
See note 4.
Refer to Section 6-1 Operating
Modes and System Menu.
Host connections
PT connections
RS-232C: Section 4
Ethernet: Section 5
Controller Link: Section 5
EtherNet/IP: Section 5
Programming
Settings/com check
Operation
System maintenance
See note 5.
Connecting to Other Devices
Note 1. RUN mode is entered automatically if screen data already exists.
An error message is displayed if screen data does not exist. Transfer screen data from either
the CX-Designer or a Memory Card.
2. The system program is installed in special situations only, such as when the system program
is being changed or recovered.
3. The system menu can be operated as required to initialize data saved in the PT.
4. For the NS15, the System Menu can be displayed by pressing one of the four corners of the
touch panel twice in a row. For the NS5, NS8, NS10, and NS12, the system menu can be
displayed by simultaneously pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel.
5. When errors occur during operation, check I/O and setting statuses as required.
1-10
1-4 Procedure for Running NS-series PTs
The following table lists the device and software manuals used for reference.
Device/Software
NS-series PTs
Manual name
Setup Manual
(Provides information on existing NS-series models, i.e.,
NS12, NS10, and NS7.)
Programming Manual
Macro Reference
CX-Designer
CX-Designer User’s Manual
CX-Designer Online Help
NS-series Ladder
Monitor
NS-series Ladder Monitor Operation Manual
PLC
SYSMAC C200HS Installation Guide
SYSMAC C200HS Operation Manual
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Installation Guide
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Operation Manual
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) Operation Manual
SYSMAC CQM1 Operation Manual
SYSMAC CQM1H Operation Manual
SYSMAC CV Series CV500/CV1000/CV2000/CVM1
Programming Manual: Ladder Diagrams
SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual
SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual
SYSMAC CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2)
Programming Manual
SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual
CP-series CP1H/CP1L CPU Unit Programming Manual
CP-series CP1L CPU Unit Operation Manual
CP-series CP1H CPU Unit Operation Manual
SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Serial Communications Unit and
Board Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Instruction Reference Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming Console Operation
Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Communications Command
Reference Manual
SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual
SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2 CPU Unit Software User’s Manual
SYSMAC CP Series CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual
SYSMAC CP Series CP1E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual
NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual
NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User’s Manual
NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s
Manual
NJ/NX-series Troubleshooting Manual
NX-series CPU Unit Hardware User's Manual
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: C-series PLCs
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CVM1 PLCs
SYSMAC CPT Operation Manual
CX-Programmer User Manual
Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual
Programming
Devices/Software
Catalog No.
V072
V073
Provided with
CX-Designer
V099
Provided with the
CX-Designer.
Provided with
NS-series Ladder
Monitor
W236
W235
W302
W303
W322
W226
W363
W202
W317
W352
W353
W356
W451
W462
W450
W393
W336
W339
W394
W340
W341
W342
W472
W473
W479
W480
W500
W501
W506
W503
W535
W248
W249
W333
W437
W504
1-11
1-4 Procedure for Running NS-series PTs
Device/Software
Ethernet Unit
Manual name
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual
SYSMAC CVM1/CV Series Ethernet Unit System Manual
FINS Command Reference Manual
SYSMAC CS and CJ Series Ethernet Units Operation Manual
Construction of Networks
SYSMAC CS and CJ Series Ethernet Units Operation Manual
Construction of Applications
Controller Link
Controller Link Support Board Operation Manual
Support Board
Controller Link Support Board for PCI Bus Operation Manual
Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit Operation Manual
EtherNet/IP
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series EtherNet/IP Units Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NE1S Series EtherNet/IP Unit Operation
Manual
1-12
Catalog No.
W343
W242
W227
W420
W421
W307
W383
W309
W465
Z909
Section 2
Before Connecting
This section provides information on methods for connecting NS-series PTs that must be
understood before connecting the host and peripheral devices.
For details on connecting through host link communications, refer to the Host Connection
Manual (Host Link). For details on Temperature Controller connections and Memory Link
communications, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Temp. Control, MemLink). For details
on connecting to other devices, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Multivendor Connection).
Connecting the Host ........................................................................................................ 2-2
2-1-1 Communications Types and Connection Methods ................................................... 2-2
2-2 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................................... 2-8
2-1
2-1 Connecting the Host
2-1 Connecting the Host
This section provides details on the networks for hosts that can be used with NS-series PTs.
2-1-1
Communications Types and Connection Methods
•
Communications Ports and Methods
All NS-series PTs have two serial ports each. The NS15-TX01@-V2, NS12-TS01(B)-V1/-V2,
NS10-TV01(B)-V1/-V2, NS8-TV@1(B)-V1/-V2, NS5-SQ01(B)-V1, NS5-SQ@1(B)-V2, NS5TQ@1(B), and NS5-MQ@1(B)-V2 each have one Ethernet interface.
A Controller Link Interface Unit can also be mounted to the NS12-TS0@(B)-V1 or NS10TV0@(B)-V1 to enable Controller Link communications. These communications ports and
interfaces can be used for the communications methods shown in the following table.
Communications ports
Supported communications methods
1:1 NT Link
1:N NT Links (See note 1.)
For connecting the CX-Designer and for Bar Code Reader input.
1:1 NT Link
Serial port B (See notes 2
1:N NT Links (See note 1.)
and 4.)
For connecting the CX-Designer and for Bar Code Reader input.
FINS communications
Ethernet interface
EtherNet/IP
For connecting the CX-Designer.
Controller Link Interface
FINS communications
Unit (See note 3.)
Data links
Note 1: A 1:N NT Link can be set for either normal or high-speed communications.
Note 2: With the NS5, EXP. (Expansion) I/F on the Comm Tab Page in the System Menu settings can
be set to use a communications port in the expansion interface connector. The expansion
interface, however, is a future expansion, which cannot yet be used. Always use the serial
port B connector. Communications will not be possible on serial port B if the expansion
interface is selected in the System Menu settings.
Note 3: Controller Link Interface Units are compatible only with the NS15, NS12 and NS10.
Note 4: With the NS15, the type of communications (RS-232C or RS-422A) can be selected by setting
the DIP switch.
Serial port A
The following table shows the possible combinations of communications methods when
serial ports A and B are connected to the host at the same time.
Using serial ports A and B at the same time
1:1 NT Link + 1:1 NT Link
1:1 NT Link + 1:N NT Links
1:N NT Links + 1:N NT Links
Supported/not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
• Converting Communications Type Using RS-232C/RS-422A Converter
OMRON’s NS-AL002, NT-AL001, or CJ1W-CIF11 RS-232C/RS-422A Converter can be used
to convert the communications type between RS-232C and RS-422A.
• Communications Type and Connection Method Combinations
The following table shows the possible connection methods for each communications type.
2-2
2-1 Connecting the Host
1:1 Connection
PT
Host
communi communi
cations cations
type
type
Supported communications
methods
Supported connection methods
PT
Referen
1:1 1:N
Ether- Data ce page
NT
NT FINS Net/IP Links
Link Links
Host
RS-232C
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
P. 4-2
P. 4-11
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
P. 4-2
P. 4-11
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
P. 4-2
P. 4-11
No
No
Yes
No
No
P. 5-2
No
No
No
Yes
No
P. 5-26
No
No
Yes
No
Yes P. 5-17
RS-232C cable
RS-232C
PT
NS-AL002, NT-AL001, or
CJ1W-CIF11 Converter
RS-422A
Host
RS-422A cable
PT
RS-422A
(See note RS-422A
1.)
Host
RS-422A cable
Ethernet
PT
Host
Ethernet
Ethernet
10Base-T/100Base-T twisted-pair cross
cable
EtherNet/
IP
PT
Controller
Controller
Link (See
Link
note 2.)
Controller Link
Interface Unit
Host
Specified shielded twisted-pair
cable
Yes: Connection is possible.
No: Connection is not possible.
Note 1: Possible only with the NS15-TX01@-V2.
Note 2: Only when a Controller Link Interface Unit (NS-CLK21) is mounted.
• RS-422A and RS-232C are isolated in the NT-AL001, but they are not isolated in the NS-AL002 and
CJ1W-CIF11.
• The total transmission distance with the NT-AL001 or NS-AL002 is 500 m. The total transmission
distance with the CJ1W-CIF11, however, is 50 m. If the transmission path contains both the NTAL001/NS-AL002 and the CJ1W-CIF11, then the total transmission distance is 50 m.
2-3
2-1 Connecting the Host
1:N Connection (Connecting Multiple PTs to a Single Host)
Supported communications
methods
PT
Host
communi communi
cations cations
type
type
Supported connection methods
PTs
1:1 1:N
Ether- Data
NT
NT FINS Net/IP Links
Link Links
Refere
nce
page
Host
NS-AL002, NT-AL001, or
CJ1W-CIF11 Adapter
RS-422A cable
RS-232C RS-422A
PTs
No
Yes
No
No
No
P. 4-11
No
Yes
No
No
No
P. 4-11
No
No
Yes
No
No
P. 5-2
No
No
No
Yes
No
P. 5-26
No
No
Yes
No
Yes P. 5-17
Host
NS-AL002, NT-AL001, or
CJ1W-CIF11 Adapter
RS-422A cable
RS-422A
(See note RS-422A
1.)
PTs
Ethernet
Ethernet
10Base-T/100Base-T
twisted-pair straight cable
Ethernet
Host
HUB
EtherNet/
IP
PTs
Controller
Controller
Link (See
Link
note 2.)
Host
Controller Link
Interface Unit
Specified shielded
twisted-pair cable
Yes: Connection is possible.
No: Connection is not possible.
Note 1: Possible only with the NS15-TX01@-V2.
Note 2: Only when a Controller Link Interface Unit (NS-CLK21) is mounted.
• RS-422A and RS-232C are isolated in the NT-AL001, but they are not isolated in the NS-AL002 and
CJ1W-CIF11.
• The total transmission distance with the NT-AL001 or NS-AL002 is 500 m. The total transmission
distance of the CJ1W-CIF11, however, is only 50 m. If the transmission path contains both the NTAL001/NS-AL002 and the CJ1W-CIF11, then the total transmission distance is 50 m.
2-4
2-1 Connecting the Host
N:1 Connection (Connecting Multiple Hosts to a Single PT)
NSseries
Host
communi
PT
communi cations
cations
Supported communications
methods
Supported connection methods
1:1 1:N
Ether- Data
NT
NT FINS Net/IP Links
Link Links
Refere
nce
page
PT
Host
Serial port A
RS-232C RS-232C
RS-232C cable
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
P. 4-2
P. 4-11
No
No
Yes
No
No
P. 5-2
No
No
No
Yes
No
P. 5-26
No
No
Yes
No
Yes P. 5-17
Host
Serial port B
RS-232C cable
PT
Host
Ethernet
HUB
Ethernet
10Base-T/100Base-T
twisted-pair straight cable
Ethernet
Host
EtherNet/
IP
PT
Controller Link
Interface Unit
Host
Specified shielded
twisted-pair cable
Controller
Controller
Link (See
Link
note.)
Host
Yes: Connection is possible.
No: Connection is not possible.
Note: Only when a Controller Link Interface Unit (NS-CLK21) is mounted.
2-5
2-1 Connecting the Host
NSseries
Host
communica
PT
tions
communi
cations
Supported connection methods
Supported
communications methods Refere
nce
1:1 NT 1:N NT
Ether- page
FINS
Link Links
Net/IP
PT
Host
Serial port A
RS-232C
RS-232C,
RS-422A
NS-AL002, NT-AL001,
or CJ1W-CIF11
RS-232C/ RS-422A
Converter
RS-232C cable
Host
Yes
Yes
No
No
P. 4-2
P. 4-11
Yes
Yes
No
No
P. 4-2
P. 4-11
Yes
Yes
Yes
P. 4-2
Yes P. 4-11
P. 5-2
Serial port B
RS-422A cable
An RS-422A line can be connected to
serial port A at the same time that an RS232C line is connected to serial port B.
PT
Host
RS-232C,
RS-422A RS-232C,
(See
RS-422A
note.)
Serial port A
RS-232C cable
Host
Serial port B
RS-422A cable
PT
Host
Ethernet
Ethernet,
Ethernet,
EtherNet/IP,
RS-232C
RS-232C
10Base-T/100Base-T
twisted-pair cross cable
Host
RS-232C cable
Yes: Connection is possible.
No: Connection is not possible.
Note: Possible only with the NS15-TX01@-V2.
• The NS-AL002, NT-AL001, or CJ1W-CIF11 is connected directly to the serial port of
the PT and power is supplied from pin 6 of the port.
• When there are multiple serial ports and Ethernet Units for a single host, each port can
be used to communicate with separate PTs. This type of communications method,
however, will reduce the communications performance at the host.
• RS-422A and RS-232C are isolated in the NT-AL001, but they are not isolated in the
NS-AL002 and CJ1W-CIF11.
• The total transmission distance with the NT-AL001 or NS-AL002 is 500 m. The total
transmission distance of the CJ1W-CIF11, however, is only 50 m. If the transmission
path contains both the NT-AL001/NS-AL002 and the CJ1W-CIF11, then the total
transmission distance is 50 m.
2-6
2-1 Connecting the Host
NSseries
Host
communi
PT
communi cations
cations
Supported communications
methods
Supported connection methods
1:1 1:N
NT
NT
Link Links
Refere
nce
Ether- Data
FINS Net/IP Links page
PT
Host
RS-232C, RS-232C,
Controller Controller
Link
Link
Serial port A
Controller Link
Interface Unit
RS-232C cable
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
P. 4-2
Yes P. 4-11
P. 5-26
No
No
Yes
Yes
P. 5-2
Yes P. 5-17
P. 5-26
Host
Controller Link
Specified shielded twisted-pair cable
PT
Ethernet,
Ethernet, EtherController Net/IP,
Link
Controller
Link
Host
Ethernet
10BASE-T/100BASE-T
Twisted-pair cross cable
Controller Link
Interface Unit
Host
Controller Link
Specified shielded twisted-pair cable
Yes: Connection is possible.
No: Connection is not possible.
Note: Only when a Controller Link Interface Unit (NS-CLK21) is mounted.
• When there are multiple serial ports and Ethernet Units for a single host, each port can
be used to communicate with separate PTs. This type of communications method,
however, will reduce the communications performance at the host.
2-7
2-2 Part Names and Functions
2-2 Part Names and Functions
The part names and functions of the PT are described here.
NS15 Front Panel
RUN Indicator
Lights or flashes to indicate
the status of the PT
Function Keys
The Function Keys are an added
safety measure that are used to
require the operator to press an
input object on the touch panel twice
to enable function keys.
Display
NS15: 15-inch Highluminance TFT Color LCD
Indicator
Lit
Green
PT is operating normally.
Flashing
Memory Card transfer ended
normally.
A backlight error occurred
immediately after power was
turned ON.
• Power is not being supplied to the PT.
• The fuse is broken.
• The system program is damaged and the system cannot be booted.
Not lit
2-8
The brightness of the indicator will change
according to the brightness setting of the
backlight. The brightness will not change on
PTs with lot number 30114 or earlier.
Orange
• The file system check that is
performed immediately after the
power is turned ON is in progress.
• The battery power is low, or the
battery is not connected and the PT
is operating normally.
Memory Card transfer in progress.
Red
An error
occurred at
startup.
Memory Card
transfer ended
abnormally.
2-2 Part Names and Functions
NS15 Rear Panel Switches
Serial Port B Connector
(Isolated RS-422A)
Use the RS-422A connector
provided with the PT.
Serial Port B DIP Switch
Selects the type of communications for
serial port B and RS-422A
communications conditions.
Expansion Interface Connector
Used to mount the Video Input Unit or
the Controller Link Interface Unit.
Memory Card Connector
Used to connect the memory
card for storing and transmitting
screen data, log data, and
system programs.
Memory Card Power Indicator
Indicates the status of power to
the Memory Card.
DIP Switch
Used to set the settings for
transmitting data using the
Memory Card.
Reset Switch
Used to initialize the PT. The
status of screen data, other
registered data, and the system
menu, however, will not change.
Battery Cover
The battery is installed
underneath the cover.
Analog RGB Output Connector
Connects to the monitor.
External Brightness Adjustment Connector
Connects to an external variable resistor to
adjust the brightness of the touch panel.
(This applies to lot numbers 30114 and
earlier.)
Main Circuit DC
Input Terminals Used to
connect the power supply.
Serial Port A Connector
Power Input Terminal
Used to connect the host, CX-Designer, and Bar Code Reader.
Block Cover
Uses an RS-232C 9-pin connector.
Covers the power
input terminal block.
Serial Port B Connector (RS-232C)
Connects to a host, CX-Designer, or Bar Code
Reader using an RS-232C 9-pin connector.
Ethernet Connector
Used to connect the Ethernet cable.
Uses a 10Base-T/100Base-T 8-pin modular plug.
FG Terminal
Used to prevent malfunctions
due to noise interference.
USB Host Connector
Used to connect to printers.
It is a USB Type A connector.
Refer to 3-5-1 Connecting to a Printer
Compatible with ESC/P Raster or BJ Raster.
USB Slave Connector
This is a USB Type B connector. It can be used to connect to the CX-Designer.
Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via USB.
A PictBridge-compatible printer can also be connected.
(Refer to 3-5-2 Connecting a PictBridge-compatible Printer.)
*: The NS-CLK21 can be used.
The NS-CA001 cannot be used.
The NS-CA002 can be used for analog RGB input, but not for video input.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Precautions
for Correct Use
Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or restarting.
Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
• There are two connectors that can be used for serial port B, an isolated RS422A connector and an RS-232C connector. They cannot be used at the
same time. Set the DIP switch pins for the serial port B setting to specify the
port that is to be used.
• When using RS-422A communications, use the RS-422A connector
included with the PT for the isolated RS-422A serial port B connector.
2-9
2-2 Part Names and Functions
NS12/NS10 Front Panel
RUN indicator
Lights or flashes to indicate
the status of the PT.
The brightness of the indicator
will change according to the
brightness setting of the
backlight.
(The brightness cannot be
changed on NS10 PTs with lot
number 10Y1 or earlier and on
NS12 PTs with lot number
13Z1 or earlier.)
Display
NS12: 12.1-inch TFT high-luminance LCD
NS10: 10.4-inch TFT high-luminance LCD
The entire display is a touch panel that serves as
an input device.
RUN Indicator Status
Indicator
Lit
Green
PT is operating normally.
Flashing
Memory Card transfer ended
Memory Card
normally.
transfer ended
A backlight error occurred
abnormally.
immediately after power was
turned ON.
• Power is not being supplied to the PT.
• The fuse is broken.
• The system program is damaged and the system cannot be booted.
Not lit
2-10
Orange
• The file system check that is
performed immediately after the
power is turned ON is in progress.
• The battery power is low, or the
battery is not connected and the
PT is operating normally.
Memory Card transfer in progress.
Red
An error
occurred at
startup.
2-2 Part Names and Functions
NS12/NS10 Rear Panel Switches
Expansion Interface Connector
Used to mount the Video Input
Unit or the Controller Link
Interface Unit.
Memory Card Connector
Used to connect the
memory card for storing
and transmitting screen
data, log data, and system
programs.
DIP Switch
Used to set the settings for
transmitting data using the
Memory Card.
Reset Switch
Used to initialize the PT.
The status of screen data,
other registered data, and
the system menu, however,
will not change.
Battery Cover
The battery is installed
underneath the cover.
Main Circuit DC
Input Terminals
Used to connect
the power supply.
Serial Port A Connector
Used to connect the host, CX-Designer, and
Designer, and Bar Code Reader. Bar Code Reader. Uses an RS-232C 9-pin
connector.
Uses an RS-232C 9-pin
connector.
Serial Port B Connector
Power Input Terminal Block Cover
Covers the power input terminal block. Used to connect the host, CX-
FG Terminal
Used to prevent
malfunctions due to
noise interference.
USB Host Connector
Used to connect to printers. It is a
USB Type A connector.
Refer to 3-5-1 Connecting to a
Printer Compatible with ESC/P
Raster or BJ Raster.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Ethernet Connector
Used to connect the Ethernet cable. Uses a
10Base-T/100Base-T 8-pin modular plug.
USB Slave Connector
This is a USB Type B connector. It can be used to connect to the CX-Designer.
Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via USB.
A PictBridge-compatible printer can also be connected to the NS12-V2 or NS10-V2.
(Refer to 3-5-2 Connecting a PictBridge-compatible Printer.)
Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or restarting.
Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
2-11
2-2 Part Names and Functions
NS8 Front Panel
Display
NS8-TV@@-V2: P8.4-inch TFT highluminance color LCD
NS8-TV@@-V1: P8.0-inch TFT highluminance color LCD
The entire display is a touch panel that
serves as an input device.
RUN indicator
Lights or flashes to indicate the
status of the PT.
The brightness of the indicator
will change according to the
brightness setting of the
backlight.
(The brightness will not change
on PTs with lot number 27X1 or
earlier.)
RUN Indicator Status
Indicator
Lit
Green
PT is operating normally.
Flashing
Memory Card
• Memory Card transfer
transfer ended
ended normally.
abnormally.
• A backlight error was
detected when power was
turned ON.
• Power is not being supplied to the PT.
• The fuse is broken.
• The system program is damaged and the system cannot be booted.
Not lit
2-12
Orange
• The file system check that is
performed immediately after the
power is turned ON is in
progress.
• The battery power is low, or the
battery is not connected and the
PT is operating normally.
Memory Card transfer in progress.
Red
An error occurred
at startup.
2-2 Part Names and Functions
NS8 Rear Panel
Expansion Interface Connector
Used to mount the Video Input
Unit or the Controller Link
Interface Unit.
Memory Card Connector
Used to connect the
memory card for storing
and transmitting screen
data, log data, and system
programs.
DIP Switch
Used to set the settings for
transmitting data using the
Memory Card.
Reset Switch
Used to initialize the PT.
The status of screen data,
other registered data, and
the system menu, however,
will not change.
Battery Cover
The battery is installed
underneath the cover.
Power Input Terminal Block Cover
Covers the power input terminal
block.
Main Circuit DC
Input Terminals
Used to connect
the power supply.
FG Terminal
Used to prevent
malfunctions due to
noise interference.
USB Host Connector
Used to connect to printers.
It is a USB Type A connector.
Refer to 3-5-1 Connecting to
a Printer Compatible with
ESC/P Raster or BJ Raster.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Serial Port B Connector
Used to connect the host, CXDesigner, and Bar Code Reader.
Uses an RS-232C 9-pin
connector.
Serial Port A Connector
Used to connect the host, CX-Designer, and
Bar Code Reader. Uses an RS-232C 9-pin
connector.
Ethernet Connector
Used to connect the Ethernet cable. Uses a
10Base-T/100Base-T 8-pin modular plug.
USB Slave Connector
This is a USB Type B connector.
Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via USB. It is used to connect to CX-Designer.
A PictBridge-compatible printer can also be connected to the NS8-V2.
(Refer to 3-5-2 Connecting a PictBridge-compatible Printer.)
Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or restarting.
Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
2-13
2-2 Part Names and Functions
NS5 Front Panel
RUN indicator
Lights or flashes to indicate
the status of the PT.
The brightness of the indicator
will change according to the
brightness setting of the
backlight.
(This applies only to the NS5SQ1/-TQ1.)
(The brightness of the indicator
will not change for lot number
14Z0 or earlier.)
Display
5.7-inch LCD
The entire display is a touch panel that
serves as an input device.
The colors toward the edges may
become lighter on the NS5-MQ. This is
a characteristic of STN LCDs, and
does not indicate a problem.
RUN Indicator Status
Indicator
Lit
Green
PT is operating normally.
Flashing
Memory Card
• Memory Card transfer
transfer ended
ended normally.
abnormally.
• A backlight error was
detected when power was
turned ON.
• Power is not being supplied to the PT.
• The fuse is broken.
• The system program is damaged and the system cannot be booted.
Not lit
2-14
Orange
• The file system check that is
performed immediately after the
power is turned ON is in
progress.
• The battery power is low, or the
battery is not connected and the
PT is operating normally.
Memory Card transfer in progress.
Red
An error occurred
at startup.
2-2 Part Names and Functions
NS5 Rear Panel
Local Bus Interface Connector
Used to connect to an Expansion Interface Unit.
(Applicable with NS Ver. 6 or higher systems.) Current
Expansion Interface Units (NS-CA001, NS-CA002, and
NCCKL21) cannot be connected.
Ethernet Connector
Used to connect the Ethernet cable.
Uses a 10Base-T/100Base-T 8-pin
modular plug.
FG Terminal
Used to prevent malfunctions
due to noise interference.
Main Circuit DC Input Terminals
Used to connect the power supply.
USB Slave Connector
This is a USB Type B connector.
Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via
USB.
DIP Switch
Used to set the settings for
transmitting data using the
Memory Card.
Reset Switch
Used to initialize the PT. The status
of screen data, other registered data,
and the system menu, however, will
not change.
Battery Cover
The battery is installed
underneath the cover.
Serial Port B Connector
Used to connect the host, CXDesigner, and Bar Code Reader.
Uses an RS-232C 9-pin connector.
Precautions
for Safe Use
USB Slave Connector
This is a USB Type B connector.
Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via USB.
The NS5-SQ1@@-V2, NS5-TQ1@@-V2,
and NS5-MQ1@@-V2 can be connected
to a PictBridge-compatible printer.
(Refer to 3-5-2 Connecting a PictBridgecompatible Printer.)
Serial Port A Connector
Used to connect the host, CXDesigner, and Bar Code Reader.
Uses an RS-232C 9-pin connector.
Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or restarting.
Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
2-15
2-2 Part Names and Functions
Touch Panel (NS15)
The touch switches on the front panel of the PT are used to perform input operations. Press
the touch switches to perform operations such as switching screens and sending bit status to
the host.
Resolution
NS15: 1,024 × 1,024
The NS15 has no minimum switch size
because the touch panel is analog.
Functional objects can be created combining
minimum size switches.
Function
performed
When a functional object is pressed, its function is performed.
To ensure correct input operations, create touch switches so that they consist of at least 32 x
32 dots.
The NS15-TX01@-V2 uses an analog touch panel.
Never press more than two points on the panel at a
time. Otherwise, it may activate a switch
somewhere between the two points.
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Press the touch switches with a pressure of 30 N max.
• Do not press the touch switches when the backlight is not lit or when there is
no display.
• Check system safety before pressing the touch switches.
• Inputs may not be recognized if the touch switches are pressed in rapid
succession. Check that one input operation has finished before performing
the next one.
• A touch position detection error of up to 10 pixels may occur due to the
precision of the NS15-TX01@-V2 touch panel. Always take this into account
when positioning functional objects on the panel so adjoining objects will not
be activated by mistake.
Precautions
for Correct Use
• If you touch a point on the panel away from any object and then slide your
finger on the panel until it rests on a functional object on the NS15-TX01@V2, that functional object will not be activated. You must remove your finger
completely from the panel and then touch the functional object directly to
activate that object.
Reference
• Pressing Three Switches Simultaneously
When the positions of multiple touch switches are set as shown in the example and
three switches are pressed simultaneously, the touch switches will malfunction due to
structural characteristics.
Position the touch switches carefully. In the example shown below, switches have been
created in positions A and B, and at points C and D, where the vertical and horizontal
lines through A and B intersect.
A
C
D
B
• If touch switches A, B, and C are turned ON
simultaneously, switch D may also turn ON due
to the structure of the touch panel.
• In the same way, if touch switches A, B, and D
are turned ON simultaneously, switch C may
also turn ON.
Minimum touch switch frame
2-16
2-2 Part Names and Functions
Touch Panel (NS12/10/8/5)
The touch switches on the front panel of the PT are used to perform input operations. Press
the touch switches to perform operations such as switching screens and sending bit status to
the host.
Minimum Switch Size
NS12:
16 dots (4.92 mm) × 16 dots (4.92 mm)
NS10:
16 dots (5.3 mm) × 16 dots (5.3 mm)
NS8-V1: 20 dots (4.78 mm) × 20 dots (4.78 mm)
NS8-V2: 20 dots (4.86 mm) × 20 dots (4.86 mm)
NS5:
16 dots (5.8 mm) × 16 dots (5.8 mm)
Functional objects can be created combining
minimum size switches.
Function
performed
When a functional object is pressed, its function is performed.
To ensure correct input operations, create touch switches so that they consist of at least two
switches horizontally and vertically.
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Press the touch switches with a pressure of 30 N max.
• Do not press the touch switches when the backlight is not lit or when there is
no display.
• Check system safety before pressing the touch switches.
Precautions
for Correct Use
• If you touch a point on the panel away from any object and then slide your
finger on the panel until it rests on a functional object on the NS15-TX01@,
that functional object will not be activated. You must remove your finger
completely from the panel and then touch the functional object directly to
activate that object.
Reference
• Pressing Three Switches Simultaneously
When the positions of multiple touch switches are set as shown in the example and
three switches are pressed simultaneously, the touch switches will malfunction due to
structural characteristics.
Position the touch switches carefully. In the example shown below, switches have been
created in positions A and B, and at points C and D, where the vertical and horizontal
lines through A and B intersect.
A
C
•
•
D
B
Minimum touch switch frame
If touch switches A, B, and C are turned
ON simultaneously, switch D may also
turn ON due to the structure of the touch
panel.
In the same way, if touch switches A, B,
and D are turned ON simultaneously,
switch C may also turn ON.
2-17
2-2 Part Names and Functions
Connector Pin Arrangement of Serial Ports A and B
Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signal name
NC
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
NC
NC
SG
Precautions
for Correct Use
Name
Not connected.
Send data
Receive data
Request to send
Clear to send
5-V output (250 mA max.)
Not connected.
Not connected.
Signal ground
Make sure that the total current capacity of devices being supplied power is
250 mA max. before using the 5-V power supply from pin 6. The capacity of the
PT's 5-V output is 250 mA max. at 5 V ±5%.
Connector Pin Arrangement of Serial Port B (Isolated RS-422A) (NS15
Only)
Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Precautions
for Correct Use
2-18
Signal name
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
Name
Receive data (-)
Receive data (+)
Send data (-)
Send data (+)
Request to send (-)
Request to send (+)
Functional ground
A screwdriver that is thin only at the tip will not fit all the way into the hole. Use
a small flat-blade screwdriver with a consistent thickness. The tightening torque
is 0.4 to 0.5 N⋅m.
2-2 Part Names and Functions
Ethernet Connector Pin Arrangement
Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal name
TD+
TD−
RD+
BI_D+
BI_D−
RD−
BI_D+
BI_D−
Name
Twisted-pair output (differential output)
Twisted-pair output (differential output)
Twisted-pair input (differential input)
Protection circuit
Protection circuit
Twisted-pair input (differential input)
Protection circuit
Protection circuit
When using a cable with a hood (or boot), make sure that the length for connection is at
least 15 mm, as shown in the following diagram.
15 mm min.
Analog GRGB output connector (NS15 Only)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
GND
NC
BLUE
GREEN
RED
GND
NC
B_GND
G_GND
R_GND
NC
VSYNC
HSYNC
NC
NC
Signal name
GND
Not used
Blue video signal
Green video signal
Red video signal
GND
Not used
Blue video signal GND
Green video signal GND
Red video signal GND
Not used
Vertical sync signal
Horizontal sync signal
Not used
Not used
External Brightness Adjustment Connector (NS15 30114 or Earlier Only)
You can connect this connector to an external variable resistor to adjust the brightness of the
backlight of the PT.
2-19
2-2 Part Names and Functions
2-20
Section 3
Installing the PT and Connecting
Peripheral Devices
This section describes the methods used to install the PT and connect peripheral devices.
For details on methods for connecting the host, refer to Section 4 Connecting the Host to Serial
Port or Section 5 Connecting to Host via Ethernet or Controller Link.
Installing the PT.............................................................................................................. 3-3
3-1-1 Installation Environment .......................................................................................... 3-3
3-1-2 Installing RS-232C/RS-422A Converters ................................................................ 3-3
3-1-3 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel...................................................................... 3-4
3-1-4 Connecting the Power Supply .................................................................................. 3-6
3-1-5 Wiring the Ground Wire .......................................................................................... 3-8
3-1-6 Peripheral Device Connection Limitations............................................................... 3-8
3-2 Starting the PT .............................................................................................................. 3-10
3-2-1 Operation at Startup................................................................................................ 3-10
3-2-2 Starting the PT for the First Time........................................................................... 3-12
3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer........................................................................................ 3-14
3-3-1 Connecting via RS-232C or Ethernet ..................................................................... 3-14
3-3-2 Connecting via USB............................................................................................... 3-14
3-3-3 Connecting via a Modem ....................................................................................... 3-16
3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers.................................................................................. 3-17
3-4-1 Connection Methods............................................................................................... 3-17
3-4-2 Setting Bar Code Readers....................................................................................... 3-18
3-4-3 Data Format............................................................................................................ 3-19
3-4-4 Bar Code Input ....................................................................................................... 3-19
3-5 Connecting to Printers .................................................................................................. 3-20
3-5-1 Connecting to a Printer Compatible with ESC/P Raster and BJ Raster ................. 3-20
3-5-2 Connecting a PictBridge-compatible Printer.......................................................... 3-21
3-6 Using Memory Cards.................................................................................................... 3-23
3-6-1 Installation .............................................................................................................. 3-24
3-6-2 Replacing the System Program .............................................................................. 3-25
3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards .................................................................. 3-26
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit ..................................................................................... 3-32
3-7-1 Video Input Unit Components ............................................................................... 3-32
3-7-2 Nomenclature and Functions.................................................................................. 3-33
3-7-3 Installation Method for Video Input Unit............................................................... 3-34
3-1
3-1 Installing the PT
3-7-4 Connecting to Video Input Connectors .................................................................. 3-39
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit ................................................................ 3-44
3-8-1 Controller Link Interface Unit Components........................................................... 3-44
3-8-2 Nomenclature and Functions.................................................................................. 3-45
3-8-3 Installation Method for Controller Link Interface Unit.......................................... 3-48
3-8-4 Wiring .................................................................................................................... 3-55
3-9 Connecting a Monitor ................................................................................................... 3-61
3-10 External Brightness Adjustment ................................................................................... 3-62
3-11 RS-232C/RS-422A Selector DIP Switch...................................................................... 3-63
3-2
3-1 Installing the PT
3-1 Installing the PT
The methods used to mount the PT to the control panel and connect the power supply are
described here.
3-1-1
Installation Environment
Always mount the PT to the control panel and perform other installation procedures
according to the following precautions.
Precautions
for Correct Use
Do not install the PT in any of the following locations:
• Locations subject to extreme temperature changes.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the ranges in the
specifications.
• Locations subject to high humidity that may result in condensation.
• Locations that would subject the PT to chemicals.
• Locations that would subject the PT to oil.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations that would subject the PT to direct shock or vibration.
• Locations that would directly expose the PT to wind or rain.
• Locations subject to strong ultraviolet light.
Provide proper shielding measures when installing in the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations near to power supply lines.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation.
Precautions
for Safe Use
3-1-2
When unpacking the PT and peripheral devices, check for any external damage.
Shake the product gently and check for any abnormal sounds.
Installing RS-232C/RS-422A Converters
When using RS-232C/RS-422A Converters, mount the PT to the control panel before
installing these Units.
For details on installing and removing RS-232C/RS-422A Converters, refer to Appendix 3
Using NS-AL002 Converters.
3-3
3-1 Installing the PT
3-1-3
Mounting the PT to the Control Panel
The PT is flush-mounted to the control panel.
The PT is mounted using the panel mounting brackets provided with the PT, and tools, such
as a Phillips screwdriver.
Use the following procedure to mount the PT to the control panel.
1. Make a hole in the panel for flush mounting according to the following dimensions and
insert the PT from the front of the panel.
Height
Width
Recommended panel thickness:
1.6 to 4.8 mm
Model
NS15
NS12
NS10
NS8
NS5
Dimensions
Width 383.5
Width 302
+1
0
Width 302
+1
0
Width 220.5
Width 184
+1
0
+1
0
× Height 228
+1
0
mm
× Height 228
+1
0
mm
+0.5
0
+0.5
0
× Height 282.5
× Height 165.5
× Height 131
+0.5
0
+0.5
0
mm
mm
mm
Reference A NS-USBEXT-1M USB Relay Cable can be used to place a USB slave connector on the
front of the control panel. To use a USB Relay Cable, mount the Cable connector in a
panel cutout with the following dimensions.
20.8±0.1 dia.
19.4±0.1 dia.
Unit: mm
Secure the panel mounting brackets from the back of the panel, as shown in the following
diagram.
Insert the catch on each bracket into the square hole on the PT, and secure the PT to the
panel by tightening the screws with a Phillips screwdriver while gently pulling in the PT.
3-4
3-1 Installing the PT
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Do not allow metal particles to enter the PT while work is being performed
on the panel.
• The allowable thickness of the panel for mounting is between 1.6 and 4.8
mm.
Secure the mounting bracket with a uniform tightening torque of between 0.5
and 0.6 N⋅m to keep the PT waterproof and dustproof.
The front sheet may become distorted if the tightening torque is more than
the specified limit or not uniform. Always use a panel that is clean,
undistorted, and strong enough to adequately withstand mounting the PT.
Precautions
for Safe Use
This product conforms to shipbuilding standards. The shipbuilding standards
have conditions that may make them unusable depending on the location in
which the PT is installed. When using a PT on a ship, be sure to contact your
OMRON sales representative.
Shipping Standards (NK, LR, ABS, BV, DNV, KR, GL)
The conditions for use in locations other than the bridge or deck are as follows:
• The NS-series PT must be installed in a control panel.
• The control panel must be equipped with an air conditioner.
• The entire surface of the NS-series PT must be covered with
electromagnetic shielding (specified below) that is also grounded using
conductive tape (e.g., copper tape).
• Gaps in the door of the control panel must be completely filled or covered
with gaskets or other material.
• Gaps between the PT and the panel cutout must be completely covered with
conductive tape, such as copper tape, and the PT must be secured using
mounting brackets.
The conditions for use on a bridge (Class NK, LR, or DNV certification only) are
as follows:
• The NS-series PT must be installed in a control panel.
• The control panel must be equipped with an air conditioner.
• The entire surface of the NS-series PT must be covered with
electromagnetic shielding that is also grounded using conductive tape (e.g.,
copper tape).
• Gaps in the door of the control panel must be completely filled or covered
with gaskets or other material.
• Gaps between the PT and the panel cutout must be completely covered with
conductive tape, such as copper tape, and the PT must be secured using
mounting brackets.
• The following noise filter must be connected to the 0 to 24 VDC power line.
Electromagnetic Shielding
Manufacturer
Model
SEIWA ELECTRIC MFG, Co., Ltd.
E09F-100, E09R13502P
* Electromagnetic shielding reduces the permeability by approximately 50%.
Noise Filter
Manufacturer
Model
Cosel
TAH-06-683
AC
DC power
supply
24 VDC
Line
Noise Filter
TAH-06-683
Load
PT
(Functional
ground)
3-5
3-1 Installing the PT
Reference
To obtain IP65 oil-proof when mounting an NS-series PT, secure it with the mounting
brackets as shown in the following figures.
•
NS15
Secure the PT using at least the following 8 mounting locations of the total of 16 mounting
locations.
•
NS12/NS10
Secure the PT using at least the following 8 mounting locations of the total of 14 mounting
locations.
•
NS8
Secure the PT using all 4 of the mounting locations.
3-6
3-1 Installing the PT
•
NS5
Secure the PT using all 6 of the mounting locations.
3-1-4
Connecting the Power Supply
Connect a 24-VDC power supply to the power input terminals.
•
•
•
•
Precautions
for Safe Use
Do not connect an AC power supply to the power terminals.
Use a DC power supply with low voltage fluctuation.
Do not perform a dielectric strength test.
To conform to EC Directives, use a DC power supply that will provide a
stable output even if the input is momentarily interrupted for 10 ms, and that
has reinforced or double insulation.
•
Power Supply
The following table shows the specifications for the power supply that can be connected.
Determine power supply specifications that meet the power supply capacity requirements.
Item
Power supply voltage
Allowable voltage range
Power supply capacity
Value
24 VDC
20.4 to 27.6 VDC (24 VDC ±15%)
45 W min. (NS15)
25 W min. (NS12, NS10, NS8)
15 W min. (NS5)
NS15, 12, 10, 8
Functional
ground
NS5
24 VDC
Functional ground
24 VDC
Breaker
Breaker
24 VDC
power
supply
•
24 VDC power supply
Parts Used to Connect the Power Supply
Precautions
for Safe Use
Connect power to the power terminal block using twisted-pair power lines with a
cross-sectional area of at least 2 mm and always using M3.5 crimp terminals.
The correct tightening torque for the terminal block is 0.8 N⋅m. Tighten terminal
block screws properly.
2
3-7
3-1 Installing the PT
Forked type
Round type
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
•
Recommended Products
Manufacturer
J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Fuji Terminal Industry Co., Ltd.
Nichifu Terminal Industries Co., Ltd.
Model number of
round terminals
2-3.5
V2-S3.5
2-3.5
Applicable power
lines (twisted-pair)
2.0 to 2.63 mm2
When surge noise occurs in the DC power supply, connect a Transistor Voltage
Suppressor (TVS) between the 24-V and 0-V DC terminals.
Recommended TVS model: 1.5KE33CA
Manufacturers: Vishay Intertechnology Inc, ST Microelectronics
Precautions
for Safe Use
3-1-5
Model number of
forked terminals
2-YS3A
2-YAS3.5
2Y-3.5
Wiring the Ground Wire
The PT is provided with a functional ground (FG: ) terminal.
Wire the FG terminal according to the following conditions.
1. Ground according to Figure when there is difference in potential between the PT and
host. Do not ground the functional ground of the PT if it is far from the host and one-point
grounding is difficult.
2. Do not ground the functional ground (FG: ) of the PT if it is mounted to the same panel
as devices that generate noise, such as motors and inverters.
PT
Host
One-point
grounding
Precautions
for Correct Use
3-1-6
Ground correctly to prevent malfunctions caused by noise.
Peripheral Device Connection Limitations
Select one of the following combinations when devices requiring power supply are
connected to port A, port B, and an Expansion Interface Unit on the PT. Use a 5-V Bar Code
Reader with a current consumption of 250 mA or the equivalent.
Port A and B connection combinations
When a Bar Code Reader and the NS-AL002 are connected to ports
A and B at the same time
When a Bar Code Reader and the CJ1W-CIF11 are connected to
ports A and B at the same time
When a Bar Code Reader and the NT-AL001 are connected to ports
A and B at the same time
When the CJ1W-CIF11 and CJ1W-CIF11 are connected to ports A
and B at the same time
When the CJ1W-CIF11 and NS-AL002 are connected to ports A and
B at the same time
When the CJ1W-CIF11 and NT-AL001 are connected to ports A and
3-8
Expansion Interface Unit
(NS-CA001, NS-CA002,
NS-CLK21)
Cannot be used
Cannot be used
Cannot be used
Can be used
Can be used
Cannot be used
3-1 Installing the PT
Port A and B connection combinations
B at the same time
When two NT-AL001s are connected to ports A and B at the same
time
When a Bar Code Reader is connected to port A or B
When the CJ1W-CIF11 is connected to port A or B
When the NS-AL002 is connected to port A or B
When the NT-AL001 is connected to port A or B
When Bar Code Readers are connected to ports A and B at the same
time
When the NT-AL001 and NT-AL002 are connected to port A or B at
the same time
Expansion Interface Unit
(NS-CA001, NS-CA002,
NS-CLK21)
Cannot be used
Can be used
Can be used
Can be used
Can be used
Cannot be used
Cannot be used
3-9
3-2 Starting the PT
3-2 Starting the PT
Check that the hardware is connected properly, turn ON the power to the PT, and then start
the PT.
Use the following procedure to start the PT.
3-2-1
Operation at Startup
When the power is ON or the PT is reset, the PT will operate as follows:
Indicator lights orange.
Immediately after the power is turned ON, the indicator will light orange.
The file system will be checked and the system recovered if the power was turned OFF while
a file was being written in previous operation, or if the battery capacity was low and drive
safety information from the system program area screen data area could not be saved.
↓
Indicator lights green.
When the system starts properly, the indicator will light green.
If the indicator does not light green, the system programs may be damaged. Contact your
nearest OMRON representative.
↓
Startup message is displayed.
A message about the startup status will be displayed.
If an error occurs, the PT will stop startup procedures and display a message. (Refer to
Section 5 Troubleshooting in the Programming Manual.)
If an error occurs that allows startup to continue, a warning will be displayed. When a warning
is displayed, the PT will enter standby state and wait for touch input. Check the message and
then touch the screen. The PT will continue with startup procedures.
3-10
3-2 Starting the PT
↓
PT starts operating
The PT goes into RUN mode and starts operating according to the screen data in the PT.
When the PT is connected using communications conditions other than the set conditions, a
message "Connecting…" will be displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and the PT will
be in standby status until normal connection is established.
To change the communications settings, display the System Menu and change the settings.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Confirm the safety of the system before turning the power ON and OFF or
pressing the reset switch.
Reference If tags are used in the screen data in the NS-series PT, tags will be verified before
operation is started. Refer to 6-11 Verifying Tags for details.
3-11
3-2 Starting the PT
3-2-2
Starting the PT for the First Time
Always perform the following operations when turning ON the PT for the first time after
purchase.
1. Language selection.
2. Set the date and time.
Operate according to the following conditions.
a) When the power is turned ON to the PT, the following error message will be displayed. Press the
OK Button.
b) The System Menu will be displayed. Press the Initialize Tab. The dialog boxes and System Menu
are set for English-language displays at the factory. The language can be changed to Japanese at
this point if desired. To change to Japanese, select it and then press the Write Button. The
following message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button. Do not turn OFF the power supply until
the language change process has been completed.
c) Next, select the PT Settings Tab. Set the time and date.
d) Press the date display area under the heading Calendar Check. A dialog box will be displayed.
Input the date in yyyy/mm/dd format.
3-12
3-2 Starting the PT
Example: Input March 15, 2002 as 2002.3.15.
e) Press the time display area under the heading Calendar Check. A dialog box will be displayed.
Input the time using a 24-hour clock in hours/minutes/seconds format.
Example: Input 06:01:01 p.m. as 18.1.1.
The Write Button will be displayed, but the time and date settings will be enabled immediately after
they have been input in the dialog box.
This completes the procedure required to start the PT for the first time. Now transfer the project
data. Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards and Transferring Data to the PT in the CX-Designer’s
Online Help.
3-13
3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer
3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer
Use an RS-232C, Ethernet, or USB cable to connect the PT and computer so that screen
data that has been created with the CX-Designer can be transferred to the PT. A modem can
also be used.
3-3-1
Connecting via RS-232C or Ethernet
Connect the RS-232C cable from the computer to serial port A or B. The cable can be
connected to either serial port A or B, but cables cannot be connected to both ports at the
same time. Use either serial port A or B.
To use Ethernet, connect the Ethernet port on the computer to the Ethernet port on the PT.
Reference In the following cases, you cannot connect to the CX-Designer using RS-232C.
• Connection is made to both serial ports A and B at the same time.
• The serial port protocol is set to Allen-Bradley DF1.
•
Communications Conditions
The communications conditions are set with the CX-Server. For details, refer to Transferring
Data to the PT in the CX-Designer’s Online Help.
•
Recommended Connecting Cables
The following cables are recommended when connecting via RS-232C.
XW2Z-S002 (OMRON, cable length: 2 m)
(D-Sub male 9-pin and D-Sub female 9-pin, for IBM PC/AT or compatible computers
and NX computers in the PC-9800 Series)
For details on preparing connecting cables, refer to Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting
Cables.
3-3-2
Connecting via USB
Connect the USB port on the computer to the USB slave connector on the PT. Some
preparations are required and some restrictions exist, as described below. Be sure to
connect USB correctly.
SW
RESET
24V
DC
PORT @B
HOST
SLAVE
ETHERNET
3-14
PORT @A
3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer
System Program Version
The system program version installed in the PT must be version 6.2 or higher. Update to
version 6.2 or higher if the current version is 6.1 or lower.
USB Driver for PTs
To transfer screens using USB communications, a USB driver for the PT must be installed in
the computer. For details on installing the USB drivers, refer to 2-4 Installing USB Drivers for
NS-series PTs in the CX-Designer User’s Manual.
PT Hardware Restrictions
NS-V1 PTs with lot number 0325 (manufactured February 3, 2005) or later support USB
data transfers. A commercially available USB cable can be used.
The manufacturing date can be checked using the 4-digit or 5-digit lot number given on the
back of the PT.
Refer to NS-series PT Lot Numbers on page A-8 for information on lot numbers.
Use a USB cable that is 2 m or shorter. If a distance of longer than 2 m is required for a USB
connection, use a commercially available USB Hub.
Up to 2 m
2 m max.
NS-V1 Series PT
Personal
computer
Longer than 2 m
USB
Hub
2 m max.
NS-V1 Series PT
5 m max.
Personal
computer
Recommended USB Hubs
Model
USB-HUB203 (USB 2.0-compatible standard 4-port hub)
Manufacturer
Sanwa Supply
Precautions
for Safe Use
Commercially available and recommended USB Hubs do not have the same
specifications as the NS-series PT. Normal operation may not be possible in
environments subject to noise or static electricity. When using USB Hubs, be
sure to provide sufficient measures to prevent noise and static electricity, or
install in a location that is not subject to noise or static electricity.
Precautions
for Correct Use
The USB slave connector on an NS-series PT is used to connect both a
personal computer and a PictBridge-compatible printer. (A personal computer is
connected to transfer screen data from the CX-Designer.) Do not try to print
from the PT when the USB slave connector is connected to a personal
computer (i.e., do not turn ON $SB25, $SB27, or $SB29 in system bit memory).
The PT or computer may malfunction.
All models in the NS-V2 Series support USB communications. Use a commercially available
USB cable to connect the PT to the USB port.
3-15
3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer
3-3-3
Connecting via a Modem
A modem can be used to connect the computer and a serial port on the PT. For details on
connection methods and communications conditions, refer to Transferring Data to the PT in
the CX-Designer’s Online Help.
3-16
3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers
3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers
Connecting a Bar Code Reader to the PT allows bar code data to be read as character
strings in the character string input areas.
For details on methods for inputting character strings from a Bar Code Reader, refer to 3-6
Inputting Numeral and Character Strings in the Programming Manual.
3-4-1
Connection Methods
Connect the Bar Code Reader to either serial port A or B of the PT as shown in the following
diagram.
PT
Bar Code Reader
9-pin connector
Serial port A or B
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
Connecting cable
Precautions
for Safe Use
Bar Code Reader cable
Always turn OFF the power to the Bar Code Reader and the PT before
connecting or disconnecting cables.
Prepare the connecting cables, referring to Appendix 7 Preparing Connecting Cables for Bar
Code Readers.
Reference
Bar Code Readers cannot be connected to both serial ports A and B at the same time.
3-17
3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers
3-4-2
Setting Bar Code Readers
The Bar Code Reader’s communications conditions and other settings can be set from either
the CX-Designer or the PT.
Setting from the CX-Designer
Use the CX-Designer to set PT settings, such as the conditions for communications with the
Bar Code Reader, according to the following table. Set the communications conditions
supported by the Bar Code Reader to suit the application environment.
Item
Data bits
Stop bits
Parity
Communications
Speed
Input method
Settings
7 or 8 bits
1 or 2 bits
None, odd, or even
4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps
7 bits
2 bits
Even
9,600 bps
Default
Manual or Auto
Auto
Setting from the PT
Set the communications conditions from the System Menu.
For details on specific methods for operating the System Menu, refer to 6-6-6 Setting Bar
Code Readers.
Bar Code Reader Settings
Set the settings for the Bar Code Reader according to the following table. Make sure,
however, that the communications conditions settings for the communications speed, parity,
stop bits, and data bits, match those set for the PT. For details on setting methods, refer to
the operation manual of the Bar Code Reader being used.
Item
Communications Speed
Parity
Stop bits
Data bits
Preamble
Postamble
RS/CS control
Communications protocol
Bar code label digit transfer
ID character transfer
Bar code types
Trigger switch setting
3-18
Settings
4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps
Even, odd, or none.
1 or 2 bits
7 or 8 bits
STX
ETX
Invalid
No protocol mode
Transfer prohibited.
Transfer prohibited.
Multi-read (reads everything)
Automatic read mode
3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers
3-4-3
Data Format
Use the following data format for communications using the PT’s bar code input function.
STX
Data
Data
Data
(02H)
ETX
(03H)
The supported data characters are 20H to 7FH hexadecimal and the maximum data length is
254 bytes.
All data that does not follow the specified data format will be discarded as invalid.
3-4-4
Bar Code Input
Use the following procedure to input bar codes using the PT.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch a Numeral Display & Input or String Display & Input object.
The Numeral Display & Input or String Display & Input object will become highlighted.
Read the bar code data from the Bar Code Reader.
Touch the command button set to either RET (Return) or ENT (Enter) to confirm the
input.
For details on the methods for setting Numeral Display & Input, String Display & Input, and
Command Button objects, refer to 2-9 Buttons and 2-12 Display and Input Objects in the
Programming Manual.
Reference To input bar codes for Numeral Display & Input and String Display & Input objects, select
Other Input Method (command buttons, etc.) for the input method. When Other Input
Method (command button, etc.) is selected, the input pad cannot be opened.
3-19
3-5 Connecting to Printers
3-5 Connecting to Printers
Connecting a printer to the PT makes it possible to obtain hard copy of the contents
displayed on the PT screen. Connect printers to the USB connector on the PT. For details on
how to obtain hard copy of the PT display, refer to the Programming Manual (Cat. No. V073).
NS-series PTs support the following printer standards. The USB connector that is used
depends on the printer standard.
Standard
USB connector
USB host connector
ESC/P raster
BJ raster
PictBridge
3-5-1
USB slave connector
Connecting to a Printer Compatible with ESC/P Raster and BJ
Raster
Connect the printer to the USB host connector on a NS15, NS12, NS10, or NS8 PT with a
USB cable as shown in the following figure.
USB host connector
• Connecting or disconnecting the cable with power to the printer or the PT
turned ON may cause the PT to malfunction. Always turn OFF the power to
the printer and the PT before connecting or disconnecting cables.
• Do not connect an USB connector to any device that is not applicable.
• Before connecting an USB connector to a device, make sure that the device
is free of damage.
• Printing devices do not have the same general specifications as the PT.
Printers may not operate normally in locations subject to noise. When using
a printing device, either install it in a location that is not subject to noise or
provide shielding.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Reference
USB slave connector
• Connect the printer directly to the PT with a cable. Connection via a USB hub is not
possible.
• Operation has been verified only for A4-size paper.
Precautions
for Correct Use
•
• Use the following OMRON cables to connect USB devices with an NS-series
PT. Using non-OMRON cables may result in incorrect operation.
Connecting Cables
Use one of the following cables.
NS-US22 (2 m, lock)
NS-US52 (5 m, lock)
3-20
3-5 Connecting to Printers
•
Recommended Printers
Operation checks have been performed for the following printers.
Manufacturer
EPSON
(ESC/P raster)
CANON
(BJ raster)
3-5-2
Model
PM-2200C, PM-930C, PM-870C, PM-740C, PM-A970, PM-T990, PM-D870, PMG720
PX-5500, PX-A720, PX-G5100, PX-G930
BJ-M70
PIXUS 550i, 50i, 80i, iP2000, iP3100, iP4100, iP4100R, iP90, iP3300
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible Printer
The NS-series PTs with system version 8.1 or higher (except for NS12/10/8/5-V1 and NS5@@0@-V2 PTs) support PictBridge-compatible printers. Connect the USB slave connector
on the PT to the printer with a USB cable, as shown in the following figure.
USB slave connector
• Printing devices do not have the same general specifications as the PT.
Printers may not operate normally in locations subject to noise. When using
a printing device, either install it in a location that is not subject to noise or
provide shielding.
• Do not connect an USB connector to any device that is not applicable.
• Before connecting an USB connector to a device, make sure that the device
is free of damage.
• The PT may malfunction if the connecting cable is connected or
disconnected while the power supply to the PT is turned ON. Always turn
OFF the power supply to the printer and PT before connecting or
disconnecting the cable.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Reference
PictBridge connector
(USB host connector)
• Connect the printer directly to the PT with a cable. Connection via a USB hub is not
possible.
• When printing with PictBridge, noise may affect the quality of the printout due to
processing characteristics.
• Operation has been verified only for A4-size paper.
Precautions
for Correct Use
The USB slave connector on an NS-series PT is used to connect both a
personal computer and a PictBridge-compatible printer. (A personal computer
is connected to transfer screen data from the CX-Designer.) Do not try to print
from the PT when the USB slave connector is connected to a personal
computer (i.e., do not turn ON $SB25, $SB27, or $SB29 in system bit memory).
The PT or computer may malfunction.
•
Connecting Cables
Use a commercially available USB cable (2 m max.).
3-21
3-5 Connecting to Printers
•
Recommended Printers
Operation checks have been performed for the following printers.
Manufacturer
EPSON
CANON
HP
KONICA
MINOLTA
Reference
3-22
Model
PM-G4500, PX-G5300, PX-5600, PM-501A, PM-A8405, EP-801A, EP-901A,
EP-901F
PIXUS MX7600
PIXUS MP980, MP630, MP620, MP540, MP480
PIXUS iP4600, iP3600, iP100
PIXUS iP5000
PIXUS Pro9500, Pro9000
Photosmart 8753
magicolor 2530DL
An NS-series PT will switch to PictBridge mode when $B25, $B27, or $B29 is turned
ON in system bit memory. Depending on the printer, an error message saying that an
unsupported digital camera is connected may be displayed. Even if this display
appears, you can still print properly by using the bits in system bit memory ($B25, 27,
and 29).
3-6 Using Memory Cards
3-6 Using Memory Cards
1. Memory Cards can be used with the PT. History files can be stored in Memory Cards as
CSV files. There are four different types of history file, as follows:
Alarm/event history:
Data log:
Operation log:
Error log:
Stores alarm/event history data that has been registered by CX-Designer.
Stores trend data.
Stores screen operation log data.
Stores error history data for when macros are executed.
The history data is normally saved in internal memory that is backed up in the PT, but
can also be saved in CSV file format. When history data is saved as a CSV file, it is
stored in the Memory Card.
The CSV files containing history data are saved in a user-specified folder in the log
folder created in the Memory Card.
2. The following data can be transferred to the Memory Card.
• System programs (the programs required to operate the PT, such as for
communications and fonts)
• Screen data (data used in the PT display)
There are three methods for transferring data, as follows:
• Automatic download (Transfers data from the Memory Card to the PT.)
• Automatic upload (Transfers data from the PT to the Memory Card.)
• Manual transfer (Direction for data transfer is selected manually.)
Precautions
for Correct Use
• Use a Memory Card recommended by OMRON. Incorrect operation may
occur if a non-recommended memory card is used.
Reference Recommended Memory Card
Model
Memory capacity
Memory type
HMC-EF183
128 Mbytes
Flash memory
HMC-EF283
256 Mbytes
Flash memory
HMC-EF583
512 Mbytes
Flash memory
The Memory Card can be overwritten approximately 100,000 times.
When using the PC card socket in devices such as laptop computers, use the HMCAP001 Memory Card Adapter.
For details on transferring data with the computer (CX-Designer), refer to Transferring Data
to the PT in the CX-Designer’s Online Help.
3. The data created in Data Block Tables can be saved as CSV files in DBLK folder on a
Memory Card.
4. The contents of the PT’s internal memory can be saved to Memory Cards using macros.
The contents of Memory Cards can also be written to the PT’s internal memory.
3-23
3-6 Using Memory Cards
3-6-1
Installation
NS15
1. Loosen the Memory Card bracket screw shown in the figure below and push the
Memory Card firmly into the back of the slot.
Eject button
2. Tighten the Memory Card bracket screw.
The tightening torque is 0.6 N⋅m.
NS12/10/8/5
1. The Memory Card is installed in the memory card interface on the side of the PT.
Eject button
Front surface
2. Push the Memory Card firmly into the back of the slot. (The eject button will be pushed
out when the Memory Card is installed properly.)
• Removing
the Memory Card
NS15
Make sure the Memory Card power indicator is OFF. Loosen the Memory Card bracket
screw and then press the eject button.
NS12/10/8/5
Press the eject button.
To stop the Memory Card from springing out and falling, place your middle finger on the eject
button, and hold the Memory Card with your index finger.
3-24
3-6 Using Memory Cards
3-6-2
Replacing the System Program
The system program in the PT can be replaced or upgraded to a higher version. There are
two methods that can be used to replace the system program.
• Using a recovery/upgrade program
• Transferring system program data
Using a Recovery/Upgrade Program
For details on the recovery/update program, select Start - Program - OMRON - CX-One CX-Designer NS Most Recent NS-series PT Update/Recovery Procedure.
Transferring System Program Data
When System Program Ver. @.@ is selected and loaded with the CX-Designer, it is stored
under the CX-Designer’s install folder (default location is C:\Program Files\Omron\CXOne\CX-Designer) in folders that are created for each type and version, as follows:
\SystemBackup\NS15\V@_@\bank1:
Ver. @.@ for NS15
\NS12_V1_V2\V@_@\bank1:
Ver. @.@ for NS12
\NS10_V1_V2\V@_@\bank1:
Ver. @.@ for NS10
\NS8_V1_V2\V@_@\bank1:
Ver. @.@ for NS8
\NS5_V1_V2\V@_@\bank1:
Ver. @.@ for NS5
To replace a system program, use Windows Explorer or another method to copy each of the
folders for the required system program under \bank1 to the route directory of the Memory
Card.
For details on methods for transferring data from the Memory Card to the PT, refer to 3-6-3
Transferring Data with Memory Cards.
The system backup folder can be created only if CX-Designer is installed from the standalone CD-ROM. If the CX-Designer is installed from CX-One, reinstall the system program
by following the procedure for using a recovery/update program described above.
Restrictions on System Program Replacement
Starting the PT may become impossible if the system program replacement procedure is not
performed correctly. Observe the following precautions.
• When upgrading the system program (or replacing it with a previous version), use the
recovery/update program at least the first time.
• System program version 6.2 or higher must be used to replace the system program in the
NS5-SQ0@-V2, NS5-TQ0@-V2, or NS5-MQ0@-V2. If an earlier system program version is
used, screens may not be displayed properly. If an earlier version is installed by mistake,
use the recovery/update program and upgrade to system program version 6.2 or higher.
• System program version 8.0 or higher must be used to replace the system program in the
NS5-SQ1@-V2, NS5-TQ1@-V2, or NS5-MQ1@-V2. Earlier versions cannot be used.
• System program version 8.1 or higher must be used to replace the system program in the
NS15-TX01@-V2. You cannot replace the system program with a system program of a
lower version.
3-25
3-6 Using Memory Cards
3-6-3
Transferring Data with Memory Cards
Using a Memory Card with the PT allows system programs (programs that are required to
operate the PT, such as those for communications and fonts) and screen data to be
transferred to and from the PT.
There are two ways to transfer the data. The data can be transferred using the system menu
or by setting the DIP Switch on the back of the NS-series PT.
When screen data is transferred and modified frequently, it is convenient to transfer the data
from the System Menu. Use the DIP Switch on the back of the PT instead of the screen
operation to save screen data when the display screen is damaged. For details on the
System Menu’s Memory Card Transfer operation, refer to 6-8-9 Memory Card Transfers.
This manual focuses on the PT’s rear-panel DIP switch settings. Three data-transfer
operations can be set on the DIP switch: automatic download (transfers data from the
Memory Card to the PT), automatic upload (transfers data from the PT to the Memory Card),
or manual transfer (user selects whether to download or upload).
• Before transferring data, check that the system programs and screen data
types match those in the PT.
• Always reset the PT or turn ON the power again after changing the DIP
switch setting.
• Do not perform the following operations while accessing the Memory Card.
The data may be damaged and the Memory Card may need to be formatted.
• Turn OFF the power to the PT.
• Press the PT reset switch.
• Remove the Memory Card.
• Do not remove the Memory Card while power is being supplied to it.
Precautions
for Safe Use
If the PT system is damaged due to the power being turned OFF while a file is being written,
or other reason, using normal downloading to replace the system programs may not be
possible. For details on troubleshooting, refer to page 3-27.
Data Transfer Security
With NS-series PTs with system program version 6.6 or higher, verification of a security
password can be required to transfer data. This password can be used to prevent the project
data from being stolen from the PT or overwritten in the PT.
The security password is set from the CX-Designer. Refer to information on transferring the
project to the PT in the online help of the CX-Designer for the setting procedure.
DIP Switch
The Memory Card can be divided into up to four areas, which are called banks. The DIP
switch on the rear panel of the PT has six pins. The ON/OFF combination of these pins
specifies which transfer method is used.
Precautions
for Correct Use
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
3-26
There are two DIP switches on the NS15-TX01@-V2, one for transferring data to
and from the Memory Card and one to set RS-232C or RS-422A for serial port
B. Refer to 3-11 SR-232C/RS-422A Selector DIP Switch for details on setting
the serial port B.
Function
Specifies bank 1 when transferring. (ON: Specifies bank 1.)
Specifies bank 2 when transferring. (ON: Specifies bank 2.)
Specifies bank 3 when transferring. (ON: Specifies bank 3.)
Specifies bank 4 when transferring. (ON: Specifies bank 4.)
Specifies upload or download. (ON: Upload, OFF: Download)
Specifies manual or automatic transfer. (ON: Manual, OFF: Automatic)
3-6 Using Memory Cards
Banks are automatically created under the following conditions.
• When data is transferred to the Memory Card using the CX-Designer.
• When data is transferred (uploaded) from the PT.
Reference
• When transferring data, only one bank can be specified. Set only one of pins 1 to 4 to
ON.
• The PT will operate normally when the DIP switch is set to a combination other than
one specifying automatic upload, download, or manual transfer.
• When data has already been stored in the banks of the Memory Card and uploading is
executed, the previous data in the specified bank will be deleted. Always check the
data stored in the banks before uploading.
• If the \BANK@\DATA and \BANK@\SYSTEM are created manually in the Memory Card,
and used for purposes other than transferring data, when uploading is performed, the
data in the folders will be deleted, and the data in the PT will be copied to the folders.
Therefore, do not use \BANK@\DATA or \BANK@\SYSTEM when creating folders in
the Memory Card.
• Set all pins to OFF when using the PT for normal operations.
Use the following technique when changing DIP-switch settings.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Incorrect technique
Correct technique
Back of the PT’s case
DIP switch
The DIP switch may bend or break if the tool is incorrectly levered against the
PT’s case as shown in the diagram.
Automatic Download
An automatic download transfers system programs and screen data from the Memory Card
to the PT.
Set the DIP switch for automatic download, as shown below.
The Memory Card cannot be used to transfer data when the DIP switch pins are set to
combinations other than those specified here.
DIP switch pin and status
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Operation
Automatically downloads bank 1 system
programs and screen data.
Automatically downloads bank 2 system
programs and screen data.
Automatically downloads bank 3 system
programs and screen data.
Automatically downloads bank 4 system
programs and screen data.
3-27
3-6 Using Memory Cards
Use the following procedure to automatically download data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn OFF the power to the PT.
Set the DIP switch.
Insert the Memory Card with the specified banks stored in it into the PT.
Turn ON the power to the PT.
The system programs and screen data will be written to the PT.
The status of the PT indicators during data transfer is as shown below.
Do not remove the Memory Card during data transfer.
Transferring data:
Indicator flashes orange.
Transferring completed:
Indicator flashes green.
Error occurred:
Indicator flashes red.
Refer to page 3-27 if an error occurs.
Turn OFF the power.
Remove the Memory Card.
Turn OFF all the DIP switch pins.
Turn ON the power.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
A warning message will not be displayed when automatic download is executed even if the
PT model, version, and language for the system programs and screen data that are stored in
the PT are different from those that are stored in the Memory Card.
Always check carefully that the PT model and Memory Card details match before
transferring data automatically.
When data transfer security has been set for the project data stored in the PT to protect the
project data from unauthorized data transfers, an automatic download will not be performed.
To download the data, use the manual transfer procedure described in Manual Transfer,
below.
• Automatic Upload
An automatic upload transfers system programs and screen data from the PT to the Memory
Card.
Set the DIP switch for automatic upload, as shown below.
The Memory Card cannot be used to transfer data when the DIP switch pins are set to
combinations other than those specified here.
DIP switch pin and status
2
3
4
5
1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
6
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Operation
Automatically uploads system programs and
screen data to bank 1.
Automatically uploads system programs and
screen data to bank 2.
Automatically uploads system programs and
screen data to bank 3.
Automatically uploads system programs and
screen data to bank 4.
Use the following procedure to automatically upload data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3-28
Turn OFF the power to the PT.
Set the DIP switch.
Insert the Memory Card into the PT.
Turn ON the power to the PT.
The system programs and screen data will be written to the Memory Card.
3-6 Using Memory Cards
5. The status of the PT indicator during data transfer is as shown below.
Do not remove the Memory Card during data transfer.
Transferring data:
Indicator flashes orange.
Transferring completed:
Indicator flashes green.
Error occurred:
Indicator flashes red.
Refer to page 3-27 if an error occurs.
6. Turn OFF the power.
7. Remove the Memory Card.
8. Turn OFF all the DIP switch pins.
9. Turn ON the power.
A warning message will not be displayed when automatic upload is executed even if the PT
model, version, and language for the system programs and screen data that are stored in the
PT are different from those that are stored in the Memory Card.
Always check carefully that the PT model and Memory Card details match before
transferring data automatically.
When data transfer security has been set for the project data stored in the PT to protect the
project data from unauthorized data transfers, an automatic upload will not be performed. To
upload the data, use the manual transfer procedure described in Manual Transfer, below.
• Manual Transfer
Use screen operations to select the direction (download or upload), contents (Project,
Project & System, or System), and banks.
Use one of the following procedures to manually transfer data.
1. Turn OFF the power to the PT, turn ON pin 6 of the DIP switch, and turn ON the power to
the PT.
DIP switch pin and status
2
3
4
5
1
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Operation
6
Enables manually downloading or uploading
the system program and screen data.
2. Execute Memory Card Transfer from the Special Screen Tab Page of the System Menu.
Refer to 6-8-9 Memory Card Transfers for details.
Use the following procedure to manually transfer data mentioned above in step 1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn OFF the power to the PT.
Turn ON pin 6 of the DIP switch.
Insert the Memory Card into the PT.
Turn ON the power.
The following screen will be displayed on the PT.
6. Specify the direction of the transfer (download or upload), the transfer contents (project,
project and system program, or system program), and bank. The IPP file name and
system version that are stored in both the specified bank of the Memory Card and the
PT will be displayed in the Project File and System Version fields. After confirming the
details, press the Go Button.
3-29
3-6 Using Memory Cards
7. When data transfer security has been set for the project data stored in the PT to protect
the project data from unauthorized data transfers, the following password-entry screen
will be displayed. Input the password and press the ENTER Button.
8. A message confirming the transfer will be displayed. Press the OK Button to execute the
specified data transfer operation. When downloading, the screen data previously stored
in the PT will be deleted. Also, specify whether or not to delete the log data.
Precautions
for Correct Use
Always clear the log data for the following.
• When changing settings related to alarms, events, or the data logs.
• When transferring a different project to the PT.
9. A warning message will be displayed if the PT model, system program/screen data
versions, or language stored in the PT do not match the corresponding data stored in the
Memory Card. Press the Yes Button to continue transferring the data.
10. The uploading/downloading screen will be displayed while data is being transferred. A
screen indicating that the transfer has completed will be displayed when the transfer has
finished. (If an error occurs, a transfer error screen will be displayed. Refer to Errors on
page 3-28 if an error occurs.)
11. The indicator will flash green when transferring has finished.
12. Turn OFF pin 6 of the DIP switch and reset the PT.
A warning message is not displayed at the PT when the PT model, version, and language
are different if the system programs used are version 1.0@.
Therefore, if the wrong data is downloaded, execute the transfer operation again using
automatic download.
The system settings cannot be changed for the upload operation.
• Errors
• During Automatic Transfer
The indicator on the front panel will flash red if an error occurs during data transfer.
Check the following items if an error occurs.
• Is the Memory Card inserted into the PT?
• Do the banks set with the DIP switch exist in the Memory Card?
(During Download)
• Is the size of the transfer data greater than the free space in the PT or Memory
Card?
Check these items before transferring data again.
Reference An error message will not be displayed if an error occurs.
• During Manual Transfer
If an error occurs during data transfer, a transfer error screen will be displayed.
Check the following items for each message displayed.
3-30
3-6 Using Memory Cards
Error Messages Requiring Checking
Error message
Memory Card Error
Could not recognize a Memory Card.
Check the Memory Card and reset the NS
Hardware.
Project Transmission Error
Transmission Failed.
Check the Memory Card and reset the NS
Hardware.
System Transmission Error
Transmission Failed.
Check the Memory Card and reset the NS
Hardware.
Cannot find source data.
Are you sure to continue
Downloading/Uploading?
The password is incorrect. Check the
password. Reset the PT.
Check item
• Is the Memory Card inserted into the PT?
• Is the Memory Card damaged?
• Was the Memory Card removed during data
transfer?
• Is the free space on the Memory Card insufficient?
• Is the Memory Card damaged?
• Does the screen data volume exceed the memory
capacity of the PT?
• Does the transfer source directory or file exist?
(Note: If the Yes Button is pressed and data is
transferred, the previous data at the transfer
destination will be deleted.)
• Check whether the password is correct.
After checking the message, reset the PT, and transfer the data again.
• System Program Recovery/Update
It may not be possible to replace the system program using a normal download if the PT
system has been damaged, e.g., if the power was turned OFF while a file was being written.
Use the following procedure to operate the PT if system program replacement is not possible
or the system program is damaged and the PT does not start.
Select Programs – Omron - CX-One - CX-Designer - Most Recent NS-series PT
Update/Recovery Program from the Windows Start Menu.
3-31
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
A Video Input Unit (NS-CA001 or NS-CA002) can be mounted to an NS-series PT. Mounting
a Video Input Unit allows images from a video camera or vision sensor to be displayed on
the PT screen. This section explains how to connect a Video Input Unit to the PT with a cable
using the NS-CA001 as an example.
A Video Input Unit can be connected to the NS8, NS10, NS12 or NS15 (except that the NSCA001 cannot be connected to the NS15. Also, the NS15 does not support video input from
the NS-CA002, but it does support analog RGB input from the NS-CA002). A Video Input
Unit cannot be connected to the NS5.
Reference
3-7-1
Refer to the NS Series RGB and Video Input Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. V086)
for information on NS-CA002 installation methods.
Video Input Unit Components
The following table shows the Video Input Unit's product configuration.
Model
NS-CA001
Video Input Unit
Name
Video Board (1)
Cover (1)
Cable (1)
Screw (M3) (9)
Instruction sheet
Precautions
for Safe Use
3-32
Components
Contents
Allows video input.
Protects Video Board.
Connects the PT's functional
ground terminal and the cover to
prevent noise.
These screws are used for the
following:
• Securing the Video Board to
the back of the PT.
• Securing the cover to the back
of the PT.
• Attaching the cable to the
cover.
Instruction sheet for NS-CA001.
To comply with EC Directives when mounting the Video Input Unit on the PT,
attach the PT to a control panel that has been cut to fit the size. (Refer to 3-1-3
Mounting the PT to the Control Panel for panel cutout dimensions.)
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
3-7-2
Nomenclature and Functions
Familiarize yourself with the nomenclature and functions of the Video Board before using the
Video Input Unit.
Video Board: Front View
Positions of screws for
attaching Video Board to PT
Contrast Adjuster
Used to adjust the contrast for video
input. All 4 channels are adjusted
together. They cannot be adjusted
individually.
Four Video Input Connectors
Console Port Connector BNC connectors for inputting NTSC/PAL
signals.
Connects to the console connector
of OMRON Vision Sensors and
allows Vision Sensor settings
to be performed from the PT.
Video Board: Rear View
Expansion Interface Connector
Connects to the PT's expansion interface connector
when mounting the Video Board.
Precautions
for Correct Use
The NS-series PTs support video input for standard NTSC and PAL signals.
Display may not be possible, however, if the input signal deviates from the
standard signal. Before operation, be sure to check the output signal of the
camera to be used. If display cannot be made, take measures so that the input
signal is a standard signal.
Video Input Specifications
Item
Input system
Specifications
NTSC (RS-170A compliant) or PAL
Scanning system (See note.)
Interlaced
Input signal
1.0 V p-p 75 Ω
Signal input connector
BNC connector
Note: The NS-series PTs do not support progressive scanning (i.e., non-interlaced scanning).
3-33
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
3-7-3
Installation Method for Video Input Unit
This section describes the method for mounting the Video Input Unit to the PT.
A Video Input Unit can be connected to the NS8, NS10, NS12 or NS15 (except that the NSCA001 cannot be connected to the NS15. Also, the NS15 does not support video input from
the NS-CA002, but it does support analog RGB input from the NS-CA002). A Video Input
Unit cannot be connected to the NS5.
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Do not touch the surface of the substrate or mounted devices with your bare
hands. Also, discharge static electricity from your body in advance.
• After mounting the Video Input Unit to the PT, all fittings must be tightened
with the provided screws. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.6 N·m.
• Always turn OFF the power to PT before mounting or removing the Unit.
Follow the procedures and install the Unit correctly.
• When the Video Input Unit is installed, the depth of the PT will increase by
24 mm.
To install the Video Input Unit, secure sufficient space inside the control
panel beforehand.
Installing the Video Input Unit
1. Mount the Video Board onto the back of the PT so that its expansion interface connector
is inserted into the expansion interface connector on the back of the PT and the
respective screw holes are aligned. Hold the Video Board by the corners keeping it
parallel to back of the PT.
Screw holes for
attaching expansion
boards
Position of screws for
attaching Board to PT
Align the positions of the holes.
Push firmly on the connector end of the board to ensure that it is inserted sufficiently.
Press here to insert the
Video Board.
3-34
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
2. Secure the four corners of the Video Board with screws.
3. Insert screws in the screw holes for attaching the cover and tighten them slightly.
Align the cover’s screw holes with the screws and mount the cover.
3-35
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
Slide the cover downward and tighten the screws.
Connecting the Cable
Connect the functional ground terminal of the PT and the cover with the cable to prevent
malfunction due to noise.
Connect with the cable provided.
3-36
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
Removing the Video Input Unit
1. Remove the cover from the PT as follows:
Loosen the screws.
Lift up on the cover and remove it.
2. Remove the screws from the four corners.
3-37
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
3. Remove the Video Board from the expansion interface connector of PT.
Follow the procedure shown below.
3-38
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
3-7-4
Connecting to Video Input Connectors
Use the following method to connect cameras to the Video Input Unit mounted to the PT.
Precautions
for Safe Use
The tensile load of the cable is 30 N maximum. Do not exceed maximum load
Connecting to Video Input Connectors
1.
Insert the BNC socket on the camera’s video output cable into a video input connector.
2. After inserting the BNC socket, twist it clockwise until it locks into place.
Twist clockwise.
3-39
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
Removing the Video Input Connector
1. Unlock the BNC socket on the camera’s video output cable by twisting it
counterclockwise while pushing it.
Push
Twist counterclockwise
2. After unlocking the BNC socket, pull it out.
Pull out
If the camera’s video output cable uses an RCA plug, connect it to the video input
connector using a BNC-RCA connector in the way shown below.
Video input connector
(BNC type)
BNC-RCA connector (See note.)
RCA plug
Note
3-40
A BNC-RCA connector is provided with the Monitor Cable (F150-VM) for OMRON Vision
Sensors. It is not provided with the Video Input Unit (NS-CA001).
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
Connecting to the Console Port Connector
Use the following method to connect the Video Board’s console port connector to the
console connector of an OMRON Vision Sensor (F150-C10V3, F160-C10, F180-C10, F400C10V2, F250-C10, V530-R150V2).
1. Insert the socket of the Relay Cable (F150-VKP; see note) into the Video Board’s
console port connector.
Note
The Relay Cable (F150-VKP) is the cable used to connect the Video Board’s console
connector to the console connector of an OMRON Vision Sensor.
Removing the Console Port Connector
Use the following method to remove the Relay Cable from the Video Board’s console port
connector.
1. Remove the Relay Cable by pulling on the connector as shown below.
3-41
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
Setting the Contrast
If the picture displayed on the PT screen is too bright or dark, contrast adjustment is required.
Contrast adjustment is usually performed using one of the following procedures.
• Select Video Configuration from the Special Screen Tab Page in the System Menu. (Refer
to Video Configuration under 2-20 Special Functions in the NS-series Programmable
Terminals Programming Manual.)
• Select the Contrast Adjustment function for Command Buttons. (Refer to Command
Buttons under 2-9 Buttons in the NS-series Programmable Terminals Programming
Manual).
If the contrast is not improved using the above methods, change the contrast with the Video
Board’s contrast adjustor using the following method.
Turn the contrast adjustor gradually using a small screwdriver while checking the picture
displayed on the PT screen.
If turning the contrast adjustor too much, the image may be distorted. Turn the contrast
adjustor in the opposite direction to remove the noise.
3-42
3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit
Grounding Precaution
Either ground the Camera, PT, and PLC at only one point, or connect the grounds for each with a
special line. Some computers internally connect the SG terminal to the RS-232C and USB connector
hoods. If such a computer is connected to the PT or PLC and there is a ground potential difference
between the Camera and the PT/PLC, an overcurrent may flow through the electronic components
inside the NS-CA001 or NS-CA002 as shown in the following figure, possibly damaging the NS-CA001
or NS-CA002.
Camera
NS-CA001
NS-CA002
Video Cable
SG
SG
PT
SG
Electronic
component
PLC
RS-232C cable
SG
SG
Computer
RS-232C cable
SG
Case
RS-232C
connector hood
RS-232C
connector hood
LG
GR
Functional
ground
Difference
in potential
*The example in the above figure shows a computer connected to an RS-232C
connector on the PLC.
Recommended Connections
Ground to only one point as shown in the following figure or use equivalent wiring so that there is no
difference in ground potential.
Camera
Video Cable
SG
SG
NS-CA001
NS-CA002
PT
SG
Electronic
component
PLC
RS-232C cable
SG
Computer
RS-232C cable
SG
SG
Case
RS-232C
connector hood
Functional
ground
RS-232C
connector hood
LG
GR
3-43
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
This section describes the method for installing and wiring the Controller Link Interface Unit,
which can be mounted to an NS10, NS12, or NS15 PT. The Controller Link Interface Unit
cannot be mounted to an NS8 or NS5 PT.
3-8-1
Controller Link Interface Unit Components
The following table shows the Controller Link Interface Unit’s product configuration.
Model
NS-CLK21
Controller Link
Interface Unit
Components
Name
NS-CLK001
Connector
Conversion Board
(1)
NS-CLK01
Controller Link
Support Board (1)
Connector (1)
Cover (1)
Cable (1)
Screw (M3) (10)
Instruction sheet
Reference
Precautions
for Safe Use
3-44
Contents
Used for mounting the Controller Link
Support Board to the PT.
Connects the PT to the Controller Link
Network.
Connects the communications cable
and Controller Link Support Board.
Protects the connector and the
Controller Link Support Board.
Connects the cover and the PT’s
functional ground terminal to prevent
noise.
These screws are used for:
• Securing the Connector Conversion
Board to the back of the PT.
• Securing the cover to the back of
the PT.
• Attaching the cable to the cover.
Instruction sheet for NS-CLK21
NS-CLK21 Units with lot number 12Y2 or later (manufactured on November 12, 2002
or later) comply with EC Directives.
To comply with EC Directives when mounting the Controller Link Interface Unit
on the PT, attach the PT to a control panel that has been cut to fit to size. (Refer
to 3-1-3 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel for cutout dimensions.)
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
3-8-2
Nomenclature and Functions
Familiarize yourself with the nomenclature and functions of the Controller Link Support
Board before operation.
Interrupt shorting Pin
Set at the factory. Do not
change the factory setting.
Memory Allocation Switch
Set at the factory. Do not change
the factory setting.
Card Edge Connector
Connects to the connector of
the Connector Conversion
Board.
Communications Connector
Connects to Controller Link Network
communications cable using the cable
connector provided.
Plate
Attaches to the cover.
Terminating Resistance Switch
This is a slide switch. Turn ON the
terminating resistance if the Board is
at the end node in a Controller Link
Network. The switch must be set to
OFF at other nodes.
Reference
Indicators
Display the status of the
Board and Network.
To identify nonconforming Controller Link Boards, check the Model printed on the Plate.
This will tell you whether it conforms with EC Directives.
Model 3G8F5-CLK21: Does not conform with EC Directives
Model NS-CLK01: Conforms with EC Directives
3-45
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
Indicators
Indicator
Name
RUN
Operating
ERC
ERH
INS
SD
RD
LNK
3-46
Color status
Meaning
Green Lit
Normal operation.
Not lit A Board operating error (watchdog timer error) occurred.
Communicatio Red
Lit
One of the following errors occurred.
ns error
• Communications error
• Same node address used twice (i.e., address
duplication error)
• Hardware error
Not lit Normal operation
EEPROM error Red
Lit
One of the following errors occurred.
• EEPROM error
• EEPROM data link table error
• EEPROM routing table error
• EEPROM network parameter error
Not lit No EEPROM error.
Network
Yellow Lit
The Board is participating in the network.
participation
Not lit The Board is not participating in the network.
Send
Yellow Lit
Sending data.
Not lit Not sending data.
Receive
Yellow Lit
Receiving data.
Not lit Not receiving data.
Data link
Yellow Lit
Participating in data link.
Flashin Error in data link table setting.
g
Not lit Not participating in data link or data link inactive.
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
Switch Settings
The following settings are made at the factory. Do not change these settings.
Item
Memory address
Switch
Memory allocation switch
Interrupt level
Interrupt shorting pin
Setting
SW1: ON
SW2: ON
SW3: OFF
SW4: ON
Set to IRQ10.
Setting Terminating Resistance
Turn the built-in terminating resistance ON or OFF using the terminating resistance switch
(slide switch). Terminating resistance is required at the both ends of a wired network to
absorb unnecessary signals and reduce the noise. The Controller Link Support Board has
built-in terminating resistance, which can be connected simply by setting the slide switch to
ON.
Set the switch to ON to connect the terminating resistance at both end nodes in wired
networks and set the switch to OFF at all other nodes.
ON
Setting
Terminating resistance
OFF (factory setting) Not connected
ON
Connected
Precautions
for Safe Use
Reference
This switch can be set after the Controller Link Interface Unit is installed on the
PT.
Turn OFF the power of the PT before changing the setting.
This switch is set to OFF by default (terminating resistance disconnected).
3-47
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
3-8-3
Installation Method for Controller Link Interface Unit
This section explains the method for mounting a Controller Link Interface Unit to the PT.
The Controller Link Interface Unit can be mounted to NS15, NS12 and NS10 PTs only. It
cannot be mounted to an NS8 or NS5 PT.
Precautions
for Safe Use
3-48
• Do not touch the surface of the substrate or mounted devices with your bare
hands. Also, discharge static electricity from your body in advance.
• After mounting the Controller Link Interface Unit to the PT, all fittings must
be tightened with the provided screws. Tighten the screws to a torque of
0.6 N⋅m.
• Always turn OFF the power to PT before mounting or removing the Unit.
Follow the procedures and install the Unit correctly.
• When the Controller Link Interface Unit is installed, the depth of the PT will
increase by 35 mm.
• To install the Controller Link Interface Unit, secure sufficient space inside the
control panel beforehand.
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
Connecting and Disconnecting
1. Mount the Connector Conversion Board onto the back of the PT so that its expansion
interface connector is inserted into the expansion interface connector on the back of the
PT and the respective screw holes are aligned. Hold the Board by the corners keeping it
parallel to back of the PT.
PT’s expansion
interface connector
Align the positions of the holes
Connector Conversion
Board
Connector Conversion Board’s
expansion interface connector
Hold the four corners and insert straight
to the expansion interface connector on
the PT.
2. Secure the four corners of the Connector Conversion Board with screws.
3-49
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
3. Insert the Controller Link Support Board’s card edge connector into the Connector
Conversion Board’s connector.
Reference
3-50
Follow the steps given below if it is hard to insert the card edge connector to the
connector on the connector conversion board.
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
4. Mount the cover to the PT.
Cover
Controller Link
Support Board
(Underside view)
5. Secure the five places shown below with screws.
3-51
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
Connecting the Cable
Connect the functional ground terminal of the PT and the cover with the cable to prevent
malfunction due to noise.
Connect with the cable provided.
Removing Controller Link Interface Unit
1. Remove the cover.
Cover
Remove these screws and
remove the cover.
3-52
Controller Link
Support Board
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
2. Disconnect the Controller Link Support Board from the connector conversion board. Hold
both ends of the Controller Link Support Board and pull out straight.
3. Remove the screws from the Connector Conversion Board.
3-53
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
4. Disconnect the Connector Conversion Board from the PT. To do this, follow the steps
given below.
Hold the four corners of the
Board and detach upper side
first.
Then, pull out the Board
completely.
3-54
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
3-8-4
Wiring
This section describes the method for wiring the network communications cable to the
Controller Link Support Board.
Wiring the Communications Cable
Wire the communications cable to connect identical signals.
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Use the cable specified for the communications cable.
• Keep communications cables separated from power lines or high-tension
lines to prevent influences from electronic noise.
• Ground the shield of the communications cable at one end of the network.
Do not ground the shield at both ends.
• Do not connect the shield cable of the communications cable to a ground
that is also being used for power-system devices, such as inverters.
• Do not run wiring outdoors. If outdoor wiring is necessary, take protective
measures against lightening, such as underground wiring or wiring inside
pipes.
• Always turn OFF the power to PT before connecting the communications
cable or installing/removing the connector.
• Use the connector attached to the Controller Link Support Board.
Connecting the Communications Cable
Connect the communications cable to the Controller Link Support Board after first
connecting it to the cable connector provided.
Use one of the twisted-pair cables listed below as the communications cable.
Model
Manufacturer
Li2Y-FCY2x0.56qmm KROMBERG & SHUBERT,
Department KOMTEC
1x2xAWG-20PE+Tr. DRAKA CABLES INDUSTRIAL
CUSN+PVC
#9207
BELDEN
ESVC0.5x2C
Bando Densen Co.
ESNC0.5×2C-99Nihon Electric Wire & Cable Co.
087B
Precautions
for Safe Use
Reference
Remarks
German company
Spanish company
American company
Japanese company
Japanese company
• Use the cables listed above.
• Normal communications may not be possible if a communications cable
other than those listed above is used.
• Terminals for the same signal on the Controller Link Support Board’s connector are
connected internally.
• The thickness of the ground wire connected to the Controller Link Support Board’s
connector must be less than 2.5 mm2.
• Connect to the network using the special connector provided with the Controller Link
Interface Unit.
3-55
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
• The minimum length of the communications cable between nodes is 1 m.
Prepare the communications cables at a length of 1 m or longer.
• Use the multidrop method for connecting nodes. Normal communications
will not be possible with T branches.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Ground all of the shield lines (including the shield line for the node at only one end of the
network) in the way shown below.
Board at the end of
the network
Board in the middle
of the network
Board at the end of
the network
Terminating
resistance: OFF
Terminating
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
Ground
Reference • Terminals of the same type are connected internally. They can thus be connected to
either the right or left half of the end Boards.
End Board
Connecting Cables to Communications Connectors
When connecting a communications cable to a Controller Link Support Board, connect the
cable to the attached connector first and then attach to the connector to the Board.
Connect the communications cable to the connector using the following procedure.
1. Taking care not to damage the mesh of the shield, strip about 50 mm off the end of the
cable. Do not strip the cable too far because it may cause a short-circuit.
Approx. 50 mm
3-56
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
2. At the end connected to the node, twist the mesh of the shield into a single wire. Leave
sufficient length at the tip of the twisted shield to be connected to a crimp terminal and
cover the remaining section with heat-shrink tubing. Cut all the shield mesh off at the end
not connected to the node.
Wire created by
twisting the shield
mesh.
Cover with heat-shrink tubing
Leave enough exposed wire to
attach to a crimp terminal.
3. Strip the ends of the signal wires far enough to attach to the crimp terminals. Twist the
wire strands together.
4. Cover the end of the cable at the point it was stripped to in step 1 with vinyl tape or heatshrink tubing.
Cover with vinyl tape or
heat- shrink tubing.
5. Attach crimp terminals to the shield wire and signal wires. Cover the connections with
vinyl tape or heat-shrink tubing.
Reference • We recommend the Phoenix AI-series crimp terminals shown in the following diagram.
Phoenix’s ZA3 crimping tool can be used to attach these terminals.
Crimp terminal Wire
Insert the wire and crimp the terminal to the wire.
3-57
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
6. Carefully insert the signal and shield lines into the respective holes of the connector
(identified with the markings). Ensure that the connector is oriented correctly. The
following example is for connection to a Board in the middle of the network.
BD H
Cable connector
BD L
Shield lines
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Loosen the screws in the connector enough to allow the terminal to pass
before inserting the signal line. If the screw is not loosened, the signal line
will go completely into the connector and you will not be able to secure the
line.
• Attach crimp terminals to the wires. Never connect bare power supply wires
directly to the connector.
Reference • Marks are provided on the connector for the signal lines. Connect the signal lines
according to the marks.
Marking
S
Signal name
Line color
BD H (communications data high) Black
BD L (communication data low)
White
SHLD (shield)
−
• Marks indicate signals as listed above.
• The lines can be connected to either the right or left half of the connector at the node
on either end of the network.
• If grounding by node, the connection method for the shield is different.
Refer to Wiring Communications Cable and Connecting the Shield Line to the
Connector under 3-8-4 Wiring, for details on connecting the shield to the connector.
7. Firmly secure each signal line with the signal line screws in the connector. An ordinary
flat-blade screwdriver with a tip that tapers at the end is not suitable because it cannot
be inserted far enough. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver with a uniform width. The
applicable tightening torque is 0.2 N⋅m.
3-58
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
Small flat-blade
screwdriver with a
uniform width
Reference
The following screwdriver is available from OMRON.
Model XW4Z-00C
Side
Front
0.6 mm
3.5 mm
Connecting the Connector to the Board
Connect the connector on the communications cable to the connector on the Board using
the following procedure.
1. Insert the connector on the communications cable into the connector on the Board as
shown below.
Controller Link
Support Board
Cable connector
2. Secure the connector to the Board by tightening the screws on the connector. The
applicable tightening torque is 0.2 N⋅m.
3-59
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit
Precautions
for Safe Use
• If the connector becomes disconnected, not only will the Board be unable to
perform communications with other nodes in the network, the network will be
split into two at the point of disconnection. Take the utmost care to ensure
that the connector does not become disconnected during communications.
Controller Link Support Board
Communications disabled
Connector
Network split
(communications disabled)
• Do not pull on the communications cable.
• When bending the communications cable, allow 60 mm or more for the
bending radius (R).
• Do not place heavy objects on the communications cable.
• Supply power only after checking the wiring thoroughly.
• Always tighten the screws of connector after connecting the communications
cable.
3-60
3-9 Connecting a Monitor
3-9 Connecting a Monitor
To display images from the PT on a monitor, connect a VGA cable from the monitor to the analog RGB
output connector on the NS-series PT. Only the NS15 can output images to an external monitor.
Item
Monitor resolution
Monitor
response
frequency
VGA cable length
Specification
XGA: 1024×768
Horizontal: 48.4 kHz
Vertical: 60 Hz
10 m or shorter
RGB cable
Precautions
for Correct Use
• The monitor does not have the same specifications as the PT. The monitor
may not operate correctly environments where there is noise, depending on
the monitor installation conditions, the length of the VGA cable, and the
wiring conditions. When installing a monitor, take sufficient measures to
shield against noise or install it where noise is not generated.
• The image may be offset or distorted depending on the specific monitor that
you use.
• If the monitor is installed more than 10 m from the PT or if the image is
distorted by the wiring conditions, use an analog RGB booster or an analog
RGB signal extender.
• If the quality of the pictures displayed on the computer monitor is poor,
adjust the picture quality at the monitor, either automatically or manually.
3-61
3-10 External Brightness Adjustment
3-10 External Brightness Adjustment
Connect a variable resistor to the external brightness adjustment connector on an NS15 PT with a lot
number of 30114 or earlier to externally adjust the brightness of the backlight in the touch panel. This allows
the brightness to be set lower than the Low selection in the backlight brightness settings (High, Medium, and
Low) under the operating settings for NS-series PTs. Brightness can be adjusted externally only with the
NS15.
Item
Recommended
resistance range
Recommended resistive
load power
Recommended cable
Specification
0 kΩ to 50 kΩ
0.1 W
AWG (10 to 26): 2 m max.
Variable Resistor for
Brightness Adjustment
Reference
The brightness of models with lot number 1020 (February 10, 2010) or later can be set
to a wider range including lower values than previous lots.
Resistance of
variable resistor
(kΩ)
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Brightness (cd/m2)
Lot No. 1020 or later
Lot No. 1020 or earlier
400
380
330
290
200
110
60
20
15
15
15
400
380
330
290
200
170
130
60
20
5
5
Refer to NS-series PT Lot Numbers on page A-8 for information on lot numbers.
3-62
3-11 RS-232C/RS-422A Selector DIP Switch
3-11 RS-232C/RS-422A Selector DIP Switch
A DIP switch on the NS15 can be used to select RS-232C or RS-422A for serial port B communications. Use
the software program to see which cable is selected and use the System Menu to display the status of the
connection.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
Specification
OFF: Terminating resistance disconnected,
ON: Terminating resistance connected
OFF: RS-422A (Four-wire), ON: RS-485 (Two-wire)
OFF: RS-422A (Four-wire), ON: RS-485 (Two-wire)
OFF: Normal transmission, ON: CS control
Not used.
OFF: RS-232C, ON: RS-422A/RS-485
Note: All pins are set to OFF in the factory settings.
Precautions
for Correct Use
• There are two connectors that can be used for serial port B, an isolated RS422A connector and an RS-232C connector. They cannot be used at the
same time. Set the DIP switch pins for the serial port B setting to specify the
port that is to be used.
• When using RS-422A communications, use the RS-422A connector
included with the PT for the isolated RS-422A serial port B connector.
3-63
3-11 RS-232C/RS-422A Selector DIP Switch
3-64
Section 4
Connecting the Host to Serial Port
This section describes the methods for connecting the host to the serial port of the PT.
For details on connecting through host link communications, refer to the Host Connection
Manual (Host Link). For details on Temperature Controller connections and Memory Link
communications, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Temp. Control, MemLink). For details
on connecting to another company’s PLC, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Multivendor
Connection).
1:1 Host Connection ........................................................................................................ 4-2
4-1-1 Connection Methods................................................................................................. 4-2
4-1-2 Unit Setting Methods................................................................................................ 4-4
4-2 1:N Host Connection ....................................................................................................... 4-7
4-2-1 Connection Methods................................................................................................. 4-7
4-2-2 Unit Setting Methods................................................................................................ 4-7
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link............................................................................................... 4-18
4-3-1 Unit Setting Methods.............................................................................................. 4-19
4-4 Recommended Connector Cables.................................................................................. 4-27
4-1
4-1 1:1 Host Connection
4-1 1:1 Host Connection
4-1-1
Connection Methods
This section describes the methods for connecting the host to serial port A or B of the PT
using RS-232C or RS-422A communications. The connection methods are as follows:
• Direct Connection using RS-232C
This is the easiest connection method. OMRON cables with connectors can be used,
depending on the host being connected.
PT
Host
RS-232C cable
(15 m max.)
• A 1:1 Connection using RS-422A and an NS-AL002 or NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A
Converter
This connection method allows an extended communications distance of up to 500 m. *1
PT
Host
NS-AL002, NT-AL001, or
CJ1W-CIF11 Adapter
RS-422A cable
(500 m max.)
*1: The maximum transmission distance is 50 m when using the CJ1W-CIF11.
The NS-series PTs have two serial ports that can be used simultaneously. Therefore, two
hosts can be connected at the same time. Any combination of devices can be connected to
the PT.
PT
Host 1
Serial port A
(See note.)
Serial port B
(See note.)
RS-232C cable or
RS-232C/RS-422A Converter
+ RS-422A cable
Host 2
Note: Each port allows 1:N connection. With the NS-AL002, NT-AL001, or CJ1W-CIF11, connect
either serial A or serial B, but not both.
• RS-422A Connection (NS15 Only)
If the RS-232C/RS-422A selector is used to select RS-422A, RS-422A
communications can be performed on serial port B.
PT
Host
Serial port B
Precautions
for Safe Use
4-2
• Always tighten the connector screws after connecting communications
cables.
• The connector’s pull load is 30 N.
Do not subject the connectors to a greater load than that specified.
4-1 1:1 Host Connection
• Supported RS-232C Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have a built-in 1:1 NT Link function. Some PLCs
can also be connected in a 1:1 NT Link by adding a Serial Communications Board or
Communications Board.
When connecting the PT to a PLC, check the series and model of the PLC and the model of
the Board mounted to the PLC.
Refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models for details on the Units that can be connected to NSseries PTs as hosts using RS-232C or RS-422A communications in a 1:1 NT Link.
Reference CS/CJ series CPU Units cannot be connected in a 1:1 NT Link. Use a 1:1 connection
through 1:N NT Links (normal or high speed). For details, refer to 1:N NT Links or Highspeed 1:N NT Links in Section 4-2 1:N Host Connection.
• Supported RS-422A Host Units
Units for RS-422A communications with a built-in 1:1 NT Link function vary according to the
type and series of OMRON PLC used.
• C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) PLCs can be connected in a 1:1 NT Link for RS-422A by adding a
Communications Board.
• CQM1H PLCs can be connected in a 1:1 NT Link for RS-422A by adding a Serial
Communications Board.
Check the series and type of the PLC and the model of the Board that is mounted to the PLC
when connecting the PT to the host.
Refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models for details on the Units that can be connected to NSseries PTs as hosts and support a 1:1 NT Link using RS-422A.
Reference
The 1:1 NT Link is not supported for RS-485 (two-wire) communications. Always use RS-422A
(four-wire). NS-series RS-485 (two-wire) communications are used to connect to an OMRON
Temperature Controller. The NS-AL002 cannot be used with the NT-series PTs or PLCs.
• Connecting to CPM2C PLCs
The CPM2C has a single connector that is the same shape as a CS-series peripheral port.
Internally, the connector has signal lines that are for use with the CPU’s built-in RS-232C
port and the peripheral port. Therefore, when using the CPM2C, use the settings for the
CPU’s built-in RS-232C port or for the peripheral port according to the converter cable and
port used. When using a CPM2C1-CIF21 Simplified Communications Unit, connect it to the
RS-232C port. Use CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable to connect the CPM2C to the NSseries PT using the built-in RS-232C port of the CPM2C. The peripheral port cannot be used
to connect the PT.
Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual (Cat. No. W356) for details.
Port for connecting PT
CS1W-CN118 port (D-Sub 9-pin)
CS1W-CN118
PLC Setup
Set for built-in RS-232C.
CPM2C
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin female)
4-3
4-1 1:1 Host Connection
• Connecting to Simplified Communications Units
When using a CPM2C1-CIF21 Simplified Communications Unit, connect it to the RS-232C
port.
RS-232C port
4-1-2
Unit Setting Methods
• Host Settings
The methods for setting each Unit are as follows:
Connecting C Series, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CQM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H
PLCs, or CVM1/CV Series(-V@)
• PLC Setup Area
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (CX-Programmer, etc.) to the PLC
Setup Area (in DM Area) according to the host type and port used.
Using RS-232C
Host type
Address
Built-in RS-232C port of C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), DM 6645
CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, or CQM1H
DM 6555
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.)
Port 1 of CQM1H (See note 2.)
Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.)
DM 6550
Note 1. RS-232C port of Communications Board.
2. RS-232C port of Serial Communications Board.
Write value
4000
Settings
Uses 1:1 NT
Link
Write value
4000
Settings
Uses 1:1 NT
Link
Using RS-422A
Host type
Address
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
DM 6555
(See note 1.)
Port 2 of CQM1H (See note 2.)
DM 6550
Note 1. RS-422A port of Communications Board.
2. RS-422A port of Serial Communications Board.
4000
Refer to the manuals of the PLC being used for details on using the PLC Setup Area.
4-4
4-1 1:1 Host Connection
• Setting the Front Panel DIP Switch
Using RS-232C
When using C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CQM1, or CQM1H PLCs, set the DIP switch on the front
panel to enable the PLC Setup Area (Data Memory) settings, as follows:
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
CQM1
CQM1H
RS-232C Communications Conditions Setting
Set pin 5 of the DIP switch to OFF to enable the
PLC Setup Area settings.
• Setting the CPM2A Front Panel DIP Switch
When using a CPM2A, set the DIP switch on the front panel to enable the PLC Setup Area
(Data Memory) settings, as follows:
Set the communications
conditions setting switch to
OFF (lower position).
• Setting the CPM2C Front Panel DIP Switches
When using a CPM2C, set the switches on the front panel to enable the PLC Setup Area
(Data Memory) settings, as follows:
Set the switches according to whether the peripheral port or
the built-in RS-232C port is used, as follows:
• Connecting the PT to the built-in RS-232C port
(The peripheral port is used to connect devices that require
non-standard communications settings.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON
• Connecting the PT to the built-in RS-232C port
(The peripheral port is used to connect the Programming
Console.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF
4-5
4-1 1:1 Host Connection
• Setting the Communications Board Switches (Using RS-422A)
Set the switches of the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Communications Board as follows:
Switch 1:
4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A)
Switch 2: ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used)
Set the switches of the CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows:
Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE):
4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A)
Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used)
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Terminating resistance switch
Set to ON (right position)
Two-wire/four-wire switch
Set to 4 (right position)
• Connecting to CVM1/CV Series (-V@) PLCs (Using RS-232C/RS-422A)
PLC Setup
When using CVM1/CV-series PLCs, always set the Execute Process (Execute Control 2) in
the PLC Setup to synchronous execution.
Setting the Front Panel DIP Switch
Set the DIP switch on the front panel, as shown in the following diagram.
Switch setting
Switches between RS-232C
and RS-422A
Communications path
switch
(RS-232C-to-RS-422A)
Communications setting (DIP switch pin 3)
Set pin 3 to ON (NT Link communications used).
Terminating resistance setting (DIP switch pin 6,
for RS-422A only)
Set pin 6 to ON (terminating resistance used).
4-6
4-2 1:N Host Connection
4-2 1:N Host Connection
4-2-1
Connection Methods
This section describes the methods used to connect multiple PTs to a single host in a 1:N
connection and provides information on the relationship between the connection methods
and the communications methods.
The Host and PTs are connected in a 1:N configuration using RS-422A with an RS232C/RS-422A Converter.
This connection method can be used for 1:N NT Link connections (normal, high-speed).
The NS15 does not require an adapter if RS-422A is set for serial port B.
The total transmission distance is 500 m when using the NT-AL001, NS-AL002, or the RS422A port on a NS15 PT. The total transmission distance is 50 m when using the CJ1WCIF11, even if other adapters are used on the same transmission path.
PT
Host
NS-AL002, NT-AL001, or CJ1WCIF11 Converter
RS-422A cable
• Supported Host Units
The OMRON PLCs that can be connected in 1:N NT Links are limited to the CS-series, CJseries, and C-series PLCs. CS-series PLCs can also be connected in 1:N NT Links by using
a CS1W-SCU21/31 Serial Communications Unit. CJ-series PLCs can also be connected in
1:N NT Links by using a CJ1W-SCU31/41 Serial Communications Unit.
Check the series and model of the PLC and the model of the Board or Unit that is mounted
to the PLC when connecting the PTs to the host.
For details on the Units used as hosts that can be connected in 1:N NT Links, refer to
Appendix 8 Standard Models.
Reference
• NS-series RS-485 (two-wire) communications are used to connect to an OMRON
Temperature Controller. The NS-AL002 cannot be used with the NT-series PTs or
PLCs. Always use RS-422A (four-wire).
• CS-series PLCs with -V1 suffix support high-speed 1:N NT Links as well as normal
1:N NT Links. CS-series PLCs without the -V1 suffix can also be connected to highspeed 1:N NT Links if the latest Serial Communications Board/Unit is used. Refer to
High-speed 1:N NT Link for details. (page 4-18).
4-2-2
Unit Setting Methods
Host Settings
The methods for setting each Unit are as follows:
Connecting C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), and CQM1H PLCs
4-7
4-2 1:N Host Connection
PLC Setup Area
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (CXProgrammer, etc.) to the PLC Setup Area (Data Memory) according to the host type and port
used.
• Using
RS-232C
Host type
Address
Write value
Built-in RS-232C port of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) DM 6645
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.)
DM 6555 5@00
Port 1 of CQM1H (See note 2.)
Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.)
DM 6550
Note 1. RS-232C port of Communications Board.
2. RS-232C port of Serial Communications Board.
3. The PT unit numbers for the C200HE(-Z) are 1 to 3.
• Using
Settings
Uses 1:N NT Link
@: Largest unit number (1
to 7) of connected
PTs. (See note 3.)
RS-422A
Host type
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
(See note 1.)
Address
DM 6555
Write value
5@00
Port 2 of CQM1H (See note 2.)
DM 6550
5@00
Settings
Uses 1:N NT Link
@: Largest unit number (1
to 7) of the connected
PTs. (See note 3.)
Note 1. RS-422A port of Communications Board.
2. RS-422A port of Serial Communications Board.
3. The PT unit numbers for the C200HE(-Z) are 1 to 3.
Refer to the manuals of the PLC being used for details on using the PLC Setup Area.
Reference
• There is no Communications Board for use with C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) where port B is
an RS-422A port.
• There is no Communications Board for use with CQM1H where Port 1 is an RS-422A
port.
• When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps.
Setting the Front Panel DIP Switch
• Using RS-232C
When using C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), set the DIP switch on the front panel to enable the PLC
Setup Area (Data Memory) settings, as follows:
Sets the RS-232C port communications
conditions. Set DIP switch pin 5 to OFF to
enable the PLC Setup settings.
4-8
4-2 1:N Host Connection
Setting the Communications Board Switches
• Using RS-422A
Set the switches of the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Communications Board, as follows:
Switch 1:
Switch 2:
4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A)
ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used)
Set the switches of the CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows:
Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE):
4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A)
Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used)
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Terminating resistance switch
Set to ON (right position).
Two-wire/four-wire switch
For RS-422A: Set to 4 to
use four-wire (right position).
Connecting a CS-series CPU Unit
When a CS-series CPU Unit is connected, settings are required in the PLC Setup and on the
front-panel switches of the CPU Unit.
PLC Setup
There are two methods that can be used to change the parameters in the PLC Setup.
• CX-Programmer
• Programming Console
Using the CX-Programmer
Precautions
for Safe Use
If one or more parameters in the PLC Setup in the CPU Unit has been
previously changed, always upload the PLC Setup from the CPU Unit and make
any new changes in the uploaded copy so that you do not overwrite the previous
changes.
1. Open the project file in the CX-Programmer and select PLC - PLC Information - PLC
Settings from the menus.
2. The PLC Settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the tab for the port to which the PT
is connected and change the following three parameters. (The following screen capture
is provided as an example. The parameters that are actually displayed will depend on
the model of the CPU Unit and the port.)
4-9
4-2 1:N Host Connection
Item
Description
Baud
Select the Custom Option and set the baud rate to 38,400 bps (Standard 1:N
NT Link Mode). The format does not need to be changed.
Mode
Set the mode to the 1:N NT Link Mode.
NT/PLC
Link Max.
If only one PT is connected to the port and it has a unit number of 0, set this
parameter to 1. Otherwise, set the highest unit number of all the PTs that are
connected.
Using a Programming Console
If the PT is connected to the Host Link port (RS-232C port), connect the Programming
Console to the CPU Unit and set the following values at the specified addresses of the PLC
Setup.
PLC
Setup
address
Setting to write
Description
160
8200 hex
Specifies using the Host Link port in 1:N NT Link Mode.
161
0000 to 0009 hex
Specifies the standard communications speed (38,400
bps). It does not matter what value between 0000 and
0009 is set.
166
000@ hex
If only one PT is connected to the port and it has a unit
number of 0, replace the box at the left with 1. Otherwise,
replace the box with the highest unit number of all the PTs
that are connected.
Reference If the PT is connected to the peripheral port make the above settings in words 144, 145,
and 150 of the PLC Setup instead of 160, 161, 166.
4-10
4-2 1:N Host Connection
Setting the Front Panel Switches
• Using
RS-232C
Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected,
as follows:
Peripheral port
Mainly connected to a
Programming Device.
(Can be connected to
an RS-232C device.)
DIP switch (inside battery compartment)
Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to
the peripheral port (to use the
communications settings in the PLC
Setup).
Turn ON pin 5 when connecting the PT to
the RS-232C port (to use the
communications settings in the PLC
Setup).
RS-232C port
Mainly connected to
an RS-232C device.
(Can be connected to
a computer running
the CX-Programmer.
Connecting a CJ-series CPU Unit
When a CJ-series CPU Unit is connected, settings are required in the PLC Setup and on the
front-panel switches of the CPU Unit.
PLC Setup
There are two methods that can be used to change the parameters in the PLC Setup.
• CX-Programmer
• Programming Console (CJ1 CPU Units only)
Using the CX-Programmer
Precautions
for Safe Use
If one or more parameters in the PLC Setup in the CPU Unit has been
previously changed, always upload the PLC Setup from the CPU Unit and make
any new changes in the uploaded copy so that you do not overwrite the previous
changes.
3. Open the project file in the CX-Programmer and select PLC - PLC Information - PLC
Settings from the menus.
4. The PLC Settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the tab for the port to which the PT
is connected and change the following three parameters. (The following screen capture
is provided as an example. The parameters that are actually displayed will depend on
the model of the CPU Unit and the port.)
4-11
4-2 1:N Host Connection
Item
Description
Baud
Select the Custom Option and set the baud rate to 38,400 bps (Standard 1:N
NT Link Mode). The format does not need to be changed.
Mode
Set the mode to the 1:N NT Link Mode.
NT/PLC
Link Max.
If only one PT is connected to the port and it has a unit number of 0, set this
parameter to 1. Otherwise, set the highest unit number of all the PTs that are
connected.
Using a Programming Console (CJ1 CPU Units Only)
If the PT is connected to the Host Link port (RS-232C port), connect the Programming
Console to the CPU Unit and set the following values at the specified addresses of the PLC
Setup.
PLC
Setup
address
Setting to write
Description
160
8200 hex
Specifies using the Host Link port in 1:N NT Link Mode.
161
0000 to 0009 hex
Specifies the standard communications speed (38,400
bps). It does not matter what value between 0000 and
0009 is set.
166
000@ hex
If only one PT is connected to the port and it has a unit
number of 0, replace the box at the left with 1. Otherwise,
replace the box with the highest unit number of all the PTs
that are connected.
Reference If the PT is connected to the peripheral port of the CPU Unit, make the above settings in
words 144, 145, and 150 of the PLC Setup instead of 160, 161, 166.
4-12
4-2 1:N Host Connection
Setting the Front Panel Switches
• Using
RS-232C
Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected,
as shown below. (The following figure shows a CJ1G CPU Unit. The arrangement depends
on the CPU Unit, but the DIP switch settings are the same.)
DIP switch (inside battery compartment)
Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to the
peripheral port (to use the communications
settings in the PLC Setup).
Turn ON pin 5 when connecting the PT to the
RS-232C port (to use the communications
settings in the PLC Setup).
Peripheral port
Connected to a Programming Console or other
device.
RS-232C port
Connected to a Programming Console or
other device.
4-13
4-2 1:N Host Connection
Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Boards
Serial Communications Boards with RS-232C and RS-422A Ports for Use with CS-series
CPU Units:
CS1W-SCB21 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-232C ports.)
CS1W-SCB41 (Port 1 is an RS-232C port and Port 2 is an RS-422A port.)
Setting DM Area Allocations in CPU Unit
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming
Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing
the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit,
restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP
(STUP) instruction.
The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings.
The allocations and settings are the same for RS-232C and RS-422A (CS1W-SCB41 Port 2).
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM32000
DM32001
Port 2
DM32010
DM32011
DM32006
DM32016
Write value
8200
0000 to 0009
(See note 1.)
000@
Settings
1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (normal)
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the
connected PTs. (See note 2.)
Note 1. Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for
any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.)
2. When using a 1:N connection, set the value for @ to 1 or higher.
For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 3 to 6 to Port 1 in 1:N NT Links, set
DM32000 to 8200 Hex, DM32001 to 0000 Hex, and DM32006 to 0006 Hex.
Reference When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps.
4-14
4-2 1:N Host Connection
Setting the Front Panel Switches
• Using
RS-422A
Port 1
RS-232C
Terminating resistance switch (TERM)
Set to ON:
Terminating resistance used
(right position)
Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE)
For RS-422A:
Set to 4 for four-wire (right position).
Port 2
RS-422A
Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Units
CS-series Rack-mounted Type:
CS1W-SCU21 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-232C ports.)
CS1W-SCU31 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-422A ports.)
CPU Unit DM Area Settings
• Using RS-232C
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming
Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing
the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit,
restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP
(STUP) instruction.
The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings.
m = 30000 + 100 × unit number
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM m
DM m + 1
DM m + 6
Port 2
DM m + 10
DM m + 11
DM m + 16
Write value
Settings
8200
0000 to 0009 (See note 1.)
000@
1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (normal)
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the
connected PTs. (See note 2.)
Note 1. Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for
any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.)
2. When using a 1:N connection, set the value for @ to 1 or higher.
Reference When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps.
4-15
4-2 1:N Host Connection
Setting the Front Panel Switches
• Using RS-232C
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit with the rotary switches on the front
of the Unit. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to set the numerals and symbols in the switches
setting display window, as follows:
Unit number setting
Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same
as that of other Units in the system.
Connecting to CJ-series Serial Communications Units
CJ-series Units:
CJ1W-SCU41 (Port 1 is an RS-422A port and Port 2 is an RS-232C port.)
CJ1W-SCU31 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-422A ports.)
CPU Unit DM Area Settings
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming
Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing
the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit,
restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP
(STUP) instruction.
The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings.
The allocations and settings are the same for RS-232C and RS-422A.
m = 30000 + 100 × unit number
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM m
DM m + 1
DM m + 6
Port 2
DM m + 10
DM m + 11
DM m + 16
Write value
Settings
8200
1:N NT Link Mode
0000 to 0009 (See note 1.) Baud rate (normal)
000@
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the
connected PTs. (See note 2.)
Note 1. Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for
any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.)
2. When using a 1:N connection, set the value for @ to 1 or higher.
Reference When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps.
4-16
4-2 1:N Host Connection
Setting the Front Panel Switches
CJ1W-SCU41
Display indicators
Terminating resistance switch (TERM)
Unit number setting switch
Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same as
these used by other Units in the system.
Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE)
For RS-422A: Set to 4 for four-wire operation (right position).
Port 1
RS-422A/485
Port 2
RS-232C
4-17
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link
• Supported Host Units
The OMRON PLCs that can be connected to high-speed 1:N NT Links using RS-232C are
as follows:
CS-series PLCs: CS1G/H-V1 and CS1G/H-H
CJ-series PLCs: CJ1G, CJ1G/H-H, CJ1M, CJ2H, and CJ2M
CS-series PLCs can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links by using a CS1WSCU21 Serial Communications Unit or CS1W-SCB21/41 Serial Communications Board.
(CS-series PLCs without a -V1 suffix can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links if a
Serial Communications Unit is used.) CJ-series PLCs can also be connected in high-speed
1:N NT Links by using a CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit.
The OMRON PLCs that can be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links using RS-422A are
as follows:
CS-series PLCs: CS1G/H and CS1G/H-H
CJ-series PLCs: CJ1G/H-H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H, and CJ2M
CS-series PLCs can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links by using a CS1WSCB41 Serial Communications Board. (CS-series PLCs without -V1 suffix can also be
connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links if a Serial Communications Board is used.) CJ-series
PLCs can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links by using a CJ1W-SCU31/41 Serial
Communications Unit.
Check the series and model of the PLC and the model of the Board or Unit that are mounted
to the PLC when connecting the PT to the host. For details on the PLCs that can be
connected, refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models.
4-18
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link
4-3-1
Unit Setting Methods
The methods for setting each Unit are as follows:
Connecting a CS-series CPU Unit
When a CS-series CPU Unit is connected, settings are required in the PLC Setup and on the
front-panel switches of the CPU Unit.
PLC Setup
There are two methods that can be used to change the parameters in the PLC Setup.
• CX-Programmer
• Programming Console
Using the CX-Programmer
Precautions
for Safe Use
If one or more parameters in the PLC Setup in the CPU Unit has been
previously changed, always upload the PLC Setup from the CPU Unit and make
any new changes in the uploaded copy so that you do not overwrite the previous
changes.
1. Open the project file in the CX-Programmer and select PLC - PLC Information - PLC
Settings from the menus.
2. The PLC Settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the tab for the port to which the PT
is connected and change the following three parameters. (The following screen capture
is provided as an example. The parameters that are actually displayed will depend on
the model of the CPU Unit and the port.)
Item
Description
Baud
Select the Custom Option and set the baud rate to 115,200 bps (High-speed
1:N NT Link Mode). The format does not need to be changed.
Mode
Set the mode to the 1:N NT Link Mode.
NT/PLC
Link Max.
If only one PT is connected to the port and it has a unit number of 0, set this
parameter to 1. Otherwise, set the highest unit number of all the PTs that are
connected.
4-19
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link
Using a Programming Console
If the PT is connected to the Host Link port (RS-232C port), connect the Programming
Console to the CPU Unit and set the following values at the specified addresses of the PLC
Setup.
PLC
Setup
address
Setting to write
Description
160
8200 hex
Specifies using the Host Link port in 1:N NT Link Mode.
161
000A hex
Baud rate: High-speed (115,200 bps)
166
000@ hex
If only one PT is connected to the port and it has a unit
number of 0, replace the box at the left with 1. Otherwise,
replace the box with the highest unit number of all the PTs
that are connected.
Reference If the PT is connected to the peripheral port make the above settings in words 144, 145,
and 150 of the PLC Setup instead of 160, 161, 166.
Setting the Front Panel Switches
Using RS-232C
Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected,
as follows:
Peripheral port
Mainly connected to a
Programming Device.
RS-232C port
Mainly connected to
an RS-232C device.
(Can be connected to
a computer running
the CX-Programmer.)
4-20
DIP switch (inside battery
compartment)
Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the
PT to the peripheral port (to use the
communications settings in the PLC
Setup).
Turn OFF pin 5 when connecting the
PT to the RS-232C port (to use the
communications settings in the PLC
Setup).
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link
Connecting a CJ-series CPU Unit
When a CJ-series CPU Unit is connected, settings are required in the PLC Setup and on the
front-panel switches of the CPU Unit.
PLC Setup
There are two methods that can be used to change the parameters in the PLC Setup.
• CX-Programmer
• Programming Console (CJ1 CPU Units only)
Using the CX-Programmer
Precautions
for Safe Use
If one or more parameters in the PLC Setup in the CPU Unit has been
previously changed, always upload the PLC Setup from the CPU Unit and make
any new changes in the uploaded copy so that you do not overwrite the previous
changes.
3. Open the project file in the CX-Programmer and select PLC - PLC Information - PLC
Settings from the menus.
4. The PLC Settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the tab for the port to which the PT
is connected and change the following three parameters. (The following screen capture
is provided as an example. The parameters that are actually displayed will depend on
the model of the CPU Unit and the port.)
Item
Description
Baud
Select the Custom Option and set the baud rate to 115,200 bps (High-speed
1:N NT Link Mode). The format does not need to be changed.
Mode
Set the mode to the 1:N NT Link Mode.
NT/PLC
Link Max.
If only one PT is connected to the port and it has a unit number of 0, set this
parameter to 1. Otherwise, set the highest unit number of all the PTs that are
connected.
4-21
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link
Using a Programming Console (CJ1 CPU Units Only)
If the PT is connected to the Host Link port (RS-232C port), connect the Programming
Console to the CPU Unit and set the following values at the specified addresses of the PLC
Setup.
PLC
Setup
address
Setting to write
Description
160
8200 hex
Specifies using the Host Link port in 1:N NT Link Mode.
161
000A hex
Baud rate: High-speed (115,200 bps)
166
000@ hex
If only one PT is connected to the port and it has a unit
number of 0, replace the box at the left with 1. Otherwise,
replace the box with the highest unit number of all the PTs
that are connected.
Reference If the PT is connected to the peripheral port of the CPU Unit, make the above settings in
words 144, 145, and 150 of the PLC Setup instead of 160, 161, 166.
Setting the Front Panel Switches
• Using RS-232C
Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected,
as shown below. (The following figure shows a CJ1G CPU Unit. The arrangement depends
on the CPU Unit, but the DIP switch settings are the same.)
DIP switch (inside battery compartment)
Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to
the peripheral port (to use the communications
settings in the PLC Setup).
Turn OFF pin 5 when connecting the PT to
the RS-232C port (to use the communications
settings in the PLC Setup).
Peripheral port
Connected to a Programming
Console or other device.
RS-232C port
Connected to a Programming Console or other
device.
4-22
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link
Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Boards
Serial Communications Boards with RS-232C Port for Use with CS-series CPU Units:
CS1W-SCB21 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-232C ports.)
CS1W-SCB41 (Port 1 is an RS-232C port and Port 2 is an RS-422A port.)
Reference High-speed 1:N NT Links can be used with Serial Communications Boards and Serial
Communications Units from lot numbers 991220 (December 20, 1999) or later. Boards
and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used, so confirm that the lot number is
supported.
CPU Unit DM Area Settings
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or Support
Software (CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing
the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit,
restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP
(STUP) instruction.
The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings. The settings are the
same for RS-232C and RS-422A (CS1W-SCB41 Port 2).
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM32000
DM32001
DM32006
Port 2
DM32010
DM32011
DM32016
Write
value
Settings
8200
000A
000@
1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (high-speed)
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the connected PTs. (See
note.)
Note: When connecting a single Unit in a 1:N connection, set the value of @ to 1 or higher.
For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 3 to 6 to Port 1 in 1:N NT Links, set
DM32000 to 8200 Hex, DM32001 to 000A Hex, and DM32006 to 0006 Hex.
Serial Communications Boards with RS-422A Port for Use with CS-series CPU Units:
CS1W-SCB41 (Port 2 is an RS-422A port.)
Reference To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud
rate to 115,200 bps.
4-23
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link
Setting the Front Panel Switches
• Using RS-422A
Port 1
RS-232C
Terminating resistance switch (TERM)
Set to ON:
Terminating resistance used
(right position)
Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE)
For RS-422A:
Set to 4 for four-wire (right position).
Port 2
RS-422A
Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Units
CS-series Rack-mounted Type:
CS1W-SCU21
CS1W-SCU31
Reference High-speed 1:N NT Links can be used with Serial Communications Boards and Serial
Communications Units from lot numbers 991220 (December 20, 1999) or later. Boards
and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used, so confirm that the lot number is
supported.
CPU Unit DM Area Settings
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or Support
Software (CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing
the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit,
restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP
(STUP) instruction.
The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings.
Using RS-232C
m = 30000 + 100 × unit number
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM m
DM m + 1
DM m + 6
Port 2
DM m + 10
DM m + 11
DM m + 16
Write value
Settings
8200
000A
000@
1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (high-speed)
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the connected
PTs. (See note.)
Note: When connecting a single Unit in a 1:N connection, set the value of @ to 1 or higher.
Reference To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud
rate to 115,200 bps.
4-24
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link
Setting the Front Panel Switches
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit with the rotary switches on the front
of the Unit. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to set the numerals and symbols of the switch's
setting display window, as follows:
Unit number setting
Set a value between 0 and F that is different from
that of any other Units in the system.
Connecting to CJ-series Serial Communications Units
CJ-series Units:
CJ1W-SCU41 (Port 1 is an RS-422A port and Port 2 is an RS-232C port.)
CJ1W-SCU31 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-422A ports.)
CPU Unit DM Area Settings
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console or CXProgrammer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing the settings,
enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting the
communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction.
The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings.
The allocations and settings are the same for RS-232C and RS-422A.
m = 30000 + 100 × unit number
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM m
DM m + 1
DM m + 6
Port 2
DM m + 10
DM m + 11
DM m + 16
Write value
Settings
8200
000A
000@
1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (high-speed)
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the connected PTs. (See
note.)
Note: When connecting a single Unit in a 1:N connection, set the value of @ to 1 or higher.
Reference To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud
rate to 115,200 bps.
4-25
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link
Setting the Front Panel Switches
CJ1W-SCU41
Display indicators
Terminating resistance switch (TERM)
Unit number setting switch
Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same as
these used by other Units in the system.
Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE)
For RS-422A: Set to 4 for four-wire operation (right position).
Port 1
RS-422A/485
Port 2
RS-232C
4-26
4-4 Recommended Connector Cables
4-4 Recommended Connector Cables
Always use recommended connectors, connector hoods, and cables, where possible, when
making connector cables. Depending on the Unit, a connector and connector hood may be
included with the Unit.
Check the required components before preparing them.
Name
Connector
Connector
Hood
Model
XM3A-0921 or
equivalent
9-pin type
made by OMRON.
XM3A-2521 or
equivalent
25-pin type
made by OMRON.
XM2S-0911 or
equivalent
9-pin type
made by OMRON.
(mm screws)
XM2S-0911-E
or equivalent
XM2S-0913 or
equivalent
Cable
XM2S-2511 or
equivalent
AWG28 × 5P
IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P × 28AWG
Units with the connectors and
connector hoods included.
CS/CJ Series
C-series CQM1 and C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
CVM1/CV-series CPU Units
CV500-LK201
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-V1
C-series CQM1 and C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
CVM1/CV-series CPU Units
CV500-LK201
Details
9-pin type
CS/CJ Series
made by OMRON.
9-pin type
made by OMRON.
(inch screws)
25-pin type
CV500-LK201
made by OMRON.
C200H-LK201-V1
Multiconductor shielded cable
made by Fujikura Densen, Ltd.
Multiconductor shielded cable
made by Hitachi Densen, Ltd.
The connector’s tensile load is 30 N max. Do not subject the connectors to a
load greater than that specified.
Precautions
for Safe Use
• OMRON Cables with Connectors
The following OMRON Cables with Connectors can be used.
Model
XW2Z-200T
XW2Z-500T
XW2Z-200T-2
XW2Z-500T-2
Cable length
2m
5m
2m
5m
Connector specifications
9-pin-to-9-pin
9-pin-to-CPM2C peripheral port
• OMRON RS-232C/RS-422A Converter
Model
NS-AL002
CJ1W-CIF11
Connection method
Connects directly to
RS-232C port.
Connects directly to
RS-232C port.
Terminal block specifications
8-pole terminal block (1:N NT Link)
5-pole terminal block (1:N NT Link)
The connectors for the connecting cables are not included with the PT and must be
purchased separately.
4-27
4-4 Recommended Connector Cables
4-28
Section 5
Connecting to Host via Ethernet or
Controller Link
This section describes the methods for connecting the PT to the host using the PT’s Ethernet
interface and the Controller Link Interface Unit.
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet....................................................................................... 5-2
5-1-1 Host Types and Settings ........................................................................................... 5-3
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link................................................................ 5-16
5-2-1 What Is a Controller Link Network? ...................................................................... 5-16
5-2-2 Data Links .............................................................................................................. 5-17
5-2-3 Troubleshooting Using Indicators .......................................................................... 5-22
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP ................................................................................ 5-25
5-3-1 What is EtherNet/IP?.............................................................................................. 5-25
5-3-2 Selecting Network Configuration Devices ............................................................. 5-26
5-3-3 Network Installation ............................................................................................... 5-29
5-3-4 Host Types and Settings ......................................................................................... 5-31
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
To connect to the network using Ethernet, the network number, node number, and IP
address must be set. Use the CX-Designer to set the settings. For details, refer to System
Settings and Project Properties in the CX-Designer’s Online Help.
The following connection methods are possible when connecting via the Ethernet only.
• Connecting PT Directly to the Host
Connect the PT to the host using twisted-pair cross cable.
PT
Host
Twisted-pair cross cable
10Base-T/100Base-T
• Connecting PT to Host with a Hub
Multiple PTs and hosts can be connected using twisted-pair straight cable and a hub.
Hub
Twisted-pair
straight cable
10Base-T/100Base-T
PT 1
PT 2
Host 1
Host 2
• Connecting PT and Host Using Transceivers
PTs can be connected in a 10Base-5 network configuration by using a hub and transceiver
that support 10Base-5.
Transceiver
Transceiver
Coaxial cable
Transceiver
cable
Terminator
10Base-5
Terminator
Hub
Twisted-pair
straight cable
Host 2
10Base-T/100Base-T
PT 1
PT 2
• Devices Required for Network Configuration
The following additional devices are required to configure the network using the Ethernet and
must be purchased separately.
Always use products that conform to IEEE802.3 standards for all network configuration
devices.
5-2
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
Network configuration
device
Ethernet Unit
Hub
Twisted-pair cable
Coaxial cable
Transceiver
Transceiver cable
24-VDC power supply
Coaxial cable terminator
(terminating resistance)
Details
A Communications Unit for connecting the PLC to the Ethernet
network.
A network device that serves as a central wiring point for multiple
terminals.
Cable consisting of four pairs of thin, copper wires twisted into a cross
cable or a straight cable. Twisted-pair cables are used for
10/100Base-T networks.
Cable consisting of a central conductor surrounded (in concentric
circles) by insulation and an external conductor of braided wire. This
cable is used for 10Base-5 networks.
A device that serves as an interface between the coaxial cable and
nodes.
Cable used to connect the transceiver to the nodes.
A 24-VDC external power supply for supplying power to the
transceiver through the transceiver cable.
Connected to both ends of the coaxial cable.
Recommended Network Configuration Devices
The following products are recommended for configuring the network when an Ethernet Unit
is used.
Configuration
devices
Hub
Twistedpair
cable
Phoenix
Contact
100BaseTX
Fujikura
10Base-T
Fujikura
Connectors (Modular
plug)
5-1-1
Maker
Panduit Corp.
Model
FL SWITCH 5TX
(5-port switching hub)
Note: For FA
environment
CTP45-LAN5
0.5 mm x 4P
Specifications: UTP
cable (unshielded
twisted-pair cable)
Category 5, 5e
CTP45-LAN5
0.5 mm x 4P
Specifications: UTP
cable (unshielded
twisted-pair cable)
Category 5, 5e
MP588-C
URL
http://www.phoenixcontact.com/jp
http://www.fujikura.co.jp/ie_e.html
http://www.panduit.com
Host Types and Settings
Units that are used for Ethernet communications vary according to the type and series of
OMRON PLC used.
When connecting an Ethernet Unit, check the series and type of the PLC that it will be
connected to and the model of the Unit that is mounted to the PLC.
For details on the hosts that can be connected to NS-series PTs via the Ethernet, refer to
Appendix 8 Standard Models.
The types of hosts that can be connected to NS-series PTs with the Ethernet and the host
settings are as follows:
5-3
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
•
Host Settings
The following settings must be set at the host.
Item
Network number
Conversion table
Host Settings
1 to 127
Node number: 1 to 254
IP address: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
1 to 65535, default is 9600.
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
“”(blank), 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
1 to 254
Define communications paths for FINS messages. Routing tables are
set from the CX-Programmer.
UDP port number
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
IP proxy address
Node number
Routing tables
IP Address Configuration
The IP address is comprised of 32 bits of binary data, consisting of the net ID and host ID.
The net ID is the address that identifies the network, and the host ID is the ID that identifies
the host (node).
The IP address is divided into class A, B, and C. Select the address system from among the
classes according to the network configuration.
Class A
0
0 bits
23
31
Host ID (24 bits)
Net ID (7 bits)
15
31
Class B
1 0
Net ID (14 bits)
31
Class C
0 bits
Host ID (16 bits)
0 bits
7
1 1 0
Net ID (21 bits)
Host ID (8 bits)
The number of networks and hosts that can be identified depends on the class used.
Class
Class A
Class B
Class C
Number of networks
Small
Medium
Large
Number of hosts
224 − 2 max. (16,777,214 max.)
216 − 2 max. (65,534 max.)
28 − 2 max. (254 max.)
The IP address is a 32-bit value divided into four 8-bit fields. Each octet is expressed as a
decimal and is separated by a period.
Example: 10000010 00111010 00010001 00100000 → 130.58.17.32
Reference
• Set the same net ID for all nodes in the same network.
• The net ID of the IP address is the value that identifies the Ethernet network (IP
network segment). The net ID is not the same as the network address used for FINS
communications.
• The IP network segment is the logical network unit that is configured by the nodes that
have the same net ID.
5-4
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
IP Address Allocation
The IP addresses are allocated so that they are unique for each node in the network (or
between two or more networks). If two or more nodes are allocated the same IP address, the
remote nodes with the same IP address will also malfunction.
IP (Internet Protocol) is a communications protocol that conforms to international standards.
Therefore, to connect to the Internet, always obtain IP addresses that have been allocated by
a public organization (i.e., the NIC in the country of use, such as the JPNIC in Japan). Using
IP addresses that are not recognized by the NIC (JPNIC) to connect to the Internet could
have unforeseen social consequences, such as causing the networks of another
organizations to malfunction unexpectedly.
Local IP Address
The local IP address indicates the IP address of the Ethernet Unit that is used to set the
settings.
The following IP address settings are not possible.
Net ID with all bits set to 0 or 1.
Host ID with all bits set to 0 or 1.
Subnet ID with all bits set to 1.
IP addresses that begin with 127 (7F Hex) (e.g., 127.35.21.16).
Subnet Mask
When more than one node is connected to the network, network operation and management
can be difficult. Therefore, for convenience, configure the system by dividing a single network
into multiple sub-networks. The system operates internally as multiple networks, but
externally appears as a single network.
To operate a system in this way, divide the host ID field of the IP address into a subnet ID
field and a host ID field.
The subnet ID field is identified by the information in the subnet mask. The subnet mask is a
bit mask in which the net ID and subnet ID fields are 1 and the host ID field is 0.
Example: 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 → FFFFFF00
The subnet mask must have a value that is common to all nodes on the same sub-network.
Setting the subnet mask is not required if sub-networks are not used. The system recognizes
subnet masks without a subnet ID field (i.e., subnet masks with net ID and host ID fields
only).
5-5
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
Address Conversion (when Using FINS Communications Service Only)
When using the FINS communications service, nodes must be specified following the FINS
addressing system. Data that is transmitted on the Ethernet network using FINS
communications, however, must follow the IP address format. Address conversion changes
the FINS address to an IP address.
Ethernet Unit
Ethernet Unit
IP address:
153.211.32.114
Node number: 23
CS1-series
CPU Unit
User program
Network address: 5
Node number: 23
Data
Data
Number
converted
153.211.32.114
To 153.211.32.114
There are three methods for converting addresses, as follows:
• Automatic generation method (default address conversion)
• IP address table method
• IP table + automatic generation method
All of these address conversion methods are performed from the system settings using the
Support Software (CX-Programmer, SYSMAC-CPT, SYSMAC Support Software, or CV Port
Software Ver.2 or later). The details for each method are explained below. Refer to the
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W343) and the SYSMAC
CVM1/CV Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W242) for details on setting
methods.
Automatic Generation Method
The automatic generation method uses the FINS node number without modification as the
host ID of the IP address. The net ID of the local IP address is used as the net ID.
Automatic generation uses the following type of remote IP address configured from the local
IP address, subnet mask, and remote node number (FINS node number).
Remote IP address = (Local IP Address AND subnet mask)
OR remote node number
• Automatic Generation Characteristics
Automatic generation has the advantage of easily understandable handling of FINS
addresses and IP addresses. This method, however, does have the following limitations.
1. This method is applicable for addresses with the same net ID only.
2. The remote host ID is restricted to the range of FINS node numbers (1 to 126) (See
note.).
3. The Ethernet Unit’s host ID and node number must be set to the same value.
Automatic generation is set as the default address conversion method, so it does not
need to be set from the CX-Programmer.
Note: Up to 46 hosts can be set on the CX-Designer.
5-6
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
IP Address Table Method
Whereas the automatic generation method obtains the IP address from the FINS node
number, the IP address table method converts the FINS node number to the IP address
based on a preset conversion table (IP address table).
The IP address table is configured from the system settings using Support Software (CXProgrammer, SYSMAC-CPT, SYSMAC Support Software, or CV Support Software Ver.2 or
later). Refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W343)
and SYSMAC CVM1/CV Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W242) for details
on setting methods.
Nodes that have different net IDs for different segments can also be registered.
IP address table
FINS node number
20
FINS node
number
18
20
23
IP address
153.214.0.62
153.214.0.129
153.218.51.8
IP address
153.214.0.129
• IP Address Table Method Characteristics
The IP address table method simply prepares a conversion table, offering the advantage of
allowing the correspondence between FINS node numbers and IP addresses to be created
freely.
This method is, however, subject to restrictions. The IP address table allows registration of up
to 32 corresponding addresses only, so no more than 32 nodes, including the local node,
can be registered. If there is no correspondence, the remote FINS node number is not
recognized.
IP Table + Automatic Generation Method
This method combines automatic generation and the IP address table method.
First refer to the IP address table, and if the required FINS address is included in the table,
read the corresponding IP address. If the required FINS address is not included, calculate
the IP address using the automatic generation method.
FINS node address
IP address table
When included in
IP address table
When not
included in IP
address table
FINS node
number
18
20
23
Net ID:
IP address
153.214.0.62
153.214.0.129
153.218.51.8
IP address
XX.XX.00.00
+
FINS node number:
IP address
XX
Setting Routing Tables
Routing tables define the communications path between the local node and the network
containing the destination node. Routing tables are required to perform network
communications. Routing tables consist of local network tables and remote network tables.
Local Network Tables
A local network tables contains the unit number and network address for every
Communications Unit mounted at a node. If there is more than one Communications Unit at
a node, each Unit will contain a local network table.
5-7
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
Unit number 04
Unit number 02 Local network table
Local network
address
Network 2
Unit number
2
02
3
04
Network 3
Remote Network Table
The remote network table provides the node and network address corresponding to the
initial relay point (first point the data must pass) en route to a target network (end network)
not directly connected to the local PLC. The table specifies the route from the relay point to
the end network.
Node 1
Node 2
PT at local
node
Node 3
Network 1
Relay Network Table for Local PT
Destination
network
address
3
Relay
network
address
Node 2
Relay PLC
Node 1 Relay PLC
(a)
(b)
Network 2
Relay Network Table for PLC (a)
Gateway
node
address
Destination
network
address
Relay
network
address
3
3
2
1
Meaning: To go to network 3,
first go to node 3 of network 1.
Desti- Node 2
nation
Network 3
Relay Network Table for Destination
Relay Network Table for PLC (b)
Gateway
node
address
Meaning: To go to network 3,
first go to node 2 of network 2.
Node 1
2
Destination
network
address
Relay
network
address
1
2
Gateway
node
address
Meaning: To go to network 1,
first go to node 1 of network 2.
1
Destination
network
address
1
Relay
network
address
Gateway
node
address
3
1
Meaning: To go to network 1,
first go to node 1 of network 3.
Routing tables are created using the CX-Programmer and then transferred to the host. Refer
to the CX-Programmer User Manual for actual procedures.
The methods for setting each Unit are described next.
• CS-series PLCs
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Always turn OFF the power to the PLC before setting the rotary switches.
• Create I/O tables for the CPU Unit when setting the unit number for the first
time or changing settings.
CS1G/CS1H and CS1G/CS1H-H Ethernet Units:
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
CS1W-ETN21
5-8
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
Setting the Front Panel Switches
Setting Unit Numbers
Always set the unit numbers so that the unit numbers of other CPU Bus Units mounted to the
CPU Unit are all unique.
Use a small screwdriver to set the rotary switches, being careful not to damage them.
The factory setting is 0.
Setting range
0 to F
Setting Node Numbers
Setting range
01 to 7E (1 to 126 decimal)
Set the upper digit using the left rotary switch and the lower digit using the right rotary switch.
The factory setting is 01.
When converting addresses using the automatic generation method, set the node number to
the same value as that set for SW7 and SW8 of the local IP address setting switches, which
are described on the following pages. If the same values cannot be set, the IP address table
method or IP table + automatic generation method must be used to convert the addresses.
Setting the Rear Panel Switches
Setting Local IP Addresses
Set the local IP address for the Ethernet Unit using the eight hexadecimal rotary switches
(local IP address setting switches), expressing each 4-bit value as a single hexadecimal digit.
Set the IP address as a hexadecimal using the eight switches combining SW1 and SW2,
SW3 and SW4, SW5 and SW6, and SW7 and SW8, as shown in the following diagram.
Setting range for each switch
0 to F
Local IP address
5-9
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
Example: Setting 130.58.17.32 (Decimal)
This address will be 82.3A.11.20 in hexadecimal, so the switch would be set as shown in the
following table.
SW1
8
Switch Setting
SW2
2
SW3
3
SW4
A
SW5
1
SW6
1
SW7
2
SW8
0
Local IP address in
hexadecimal
82
3A
11
20
Local IP address in
decimal
130
58
17
32
Reference • When using automatic generation (default method) for converting addresses, set the
same value for the node number as that set for SW7 and SW8, and set the other host
ID fields to 0. The ERC indicator will flash if the value of the IP address host ID does
not correspond to the node number value.
• Set the subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area using the CX-Programmer.
Ethernet Connectors
CS1W-ETN01
This is the connector used to connect the transceiver cable to the Ethernet.
• Electrical characteristics: Conforms to IEEE802.3 standards.
• Lock structure:
Conforms to IEEE802.3 standards for Slide latches.
Connector Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Hood
5-10
Signal name
Signal ground
Collision detection signal +
Send data +
Signal ground
Receive data +
Voltage common
Power ground (common
with signal ground)
Not used.
Signal ground
Collision detection signal −
Send data −
Signal ground
Receive data −
Transceiver power
Signal ground
Not used.
Frame ground
Abbreviation
Signal direction
GND
COL+
TX+
GND
RX+
VC
−
Input
Output
−
Input
−
−
GND
COL−
TX−
GND
RX−
VP
GND
−
FG
−
Input
Output
−
Input
−
−
−
−
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
CS1W-ETN11
CS1W-ETN21
This is the connector used to connect the twisted-pair cable to the Ethernet.
• Electrical characteristics: Conforms to IEEE802.3 standards.
• Connector structure: RJ45 8-pin modular connector (conforms to ISO8877).
1
8
Connect
or Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal name
Send data +
Send data −
Receive data +
Not used.
Not used.
Receive data −
Not used.
Not used.
Abbreviation
Signal direction
TD+
TD−
RD+
−
−
RD−
−
Output
Output
Input
−
−
Input
−
−
• CJ-series PLCs
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Always turn OFF the power to the PLC before setting the rotary switches.
• Create I/O tables for the CPU Unit when setting the unit number for the first
time or changing settings.
CJ-series Ethernet Units:
CJ1W-ETN11
CS1W-ETN21
Setting the Front Panel Switches
Setting Unit Numbers
Always set the unit numbers so that the unit numbers of other CPU Bus Units mounted to the
same CPU Unit are all unique.
Use a small screwdriver to set the rotary switches, being careful not to damage them.
The factory setting is 0.
Setting range
0 to F
Setting Node Numbers
Set the node numbers as hexadecimal values with the node number setting switch. Always
set the node numbers so that other Ethernet Units connected to the same Ethernet network
all have unique addresses. As long as the addresses are unique, they can be set between 01
and 7E (1 to 126 decimal).
Setting range
01 to 7E (1 to 126 decimal)
5-11
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
Set the upper digit using the top rotary switch and the lower digit using the bottom rotary
switch.
The factory setting is 01.
When using automatic generation to convert addresses, set the node number to the same
value as that of the rightmost byte of the local IP address. If the same values cannot be set,
the IP address table method or combination method must be used to convert the addresses.
Setting Local IP Addresses
For CJ-series Ethernet Units, set the local IP address from the CX-Programmer or other
Support Software for the CPU Unit. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Ethernet Unit
Operation Manual (Cat. No. W343) for details on setting methods.
Ethernet Connectors
CJ1W-ETN11
CS1W-ETN21
This is the connector used to connect the twisted-pair cable to the Ethernet.
• Electrical Characteristics: Conforms to IEEE802.3 standards.
• Connector Layout: RJ45 8-pin modular connector (conforms to ISO8877).
1
8
Connecto
r Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal name
Send data
Send data −
Receive data +
Not used.
Not used.
Receive data −
Not used.
Not used.
Abbreviation
TD+
TD−
RD+
−
−
RD−
−
−
Signal direction
Output
Output
Input
−
−
Input
−
−
• CP-series PLCs (Except for the CP1E)
CP-series Ethernet Option Board
CP1W-CIF41
Setting Node Numbers
Set the node number to a unique value. Do not set it to the same value as any other Ethernet
node on the same Ethernet network. Refer to the following manuals for the setting
procedures.
CP1H: SYSMAC CP Series CP1H CPU Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W450)
CP1L: SYSMAC CP Series CP1L CPU Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W462)
Setting Local IP Addresses
Use a Web browser to set the local IP address of the CP-series Ethernet Option Board.
Refer to the following manuals for the setting procedures.
CP1H: SYSMAC CP Series CP1H CPU Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W450)
CP1L: SYSMAC CP Series CP1L CPU Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W462)
5-12
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
Ethernet Connector
CP1W-CIF41
This is the connector used to connect the twisted-pair cable to the Ethernet.
• Electrical Characteristics: Conform to the IEEE 802.3 standard.
• Connector Layout: RJ45 8-pin modular connector (conforms to ISO8877.)
1
8
Connecto
r Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal name
Send data
Send data −
Receive data +
Not used.
Not used.
Receive data −
Not used.
Not used.
Abbreviation
TD+
TD−
RD+
−
−
RD−
−
−
Signal direction
Output
Output
Input
−
−
Input
−
−
Reference • The CP1W-CIF41 cannot be used to connect an NS-series PT to a CP1E PLC.
• To use the CP1W-CIF41, the Use CP1W-CIF41 Option must be selected in the
Ethernet host settings of the communications settings in the CX-Designer.
(System version 8.2 or higher and CX-Designer version 3.1 or higher are required.)
• CV/CVM1-series (-V@) PLCs
Unit for CV500-CPU01-V1, CV1000-CPU01-V1, CV2000-CPU01-V1, CVM1-CPU01-V2,
CVM1-CPU11-V2, and CVM1-CPU21-V2 CPU Units:
CV500-ETN01
Setting Rotary Switches
Set the unit number and node number with the two rotary switches on the front of the Unit.
5-13
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
Switch Layout
The layout of the two switches is shown in the following diagram.
• Set the unit number using SW1 and SW2. Set the unit number so that it is different from
other CPU Bus Units in the system.
• Set the node number using SW3 and SW4.
Setting Range
Each switch can be set within the following range.
Settings
Unit number (SW1, SW2)
Node number (SW3, SW4)
Setting range
00 to 15 (decimal)
01 to 7E hexadecimal (1 to 126 decimal)
Setting Unit Numbers
The unit number is used to identify each Unit when multiple CPU Bus Units are mounted to
the CPU Unit.
Use the left switch (SW1) to set the ten’s digit, and the right switch (SW2) to set the one’s
digit. Set between 00 and 15 decimal.
Setting Example
This example is for unit number 12.
Reference
• The unit number cannot be set to a value more than 15. If the unit number is set to a
value higher than 15, the ERC indicator in the display will light.
• When more than one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to a single PLC, set each Unit with a
unique unit number.
5-14
5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet
Setting Node Numbers
The node number is used to identify PLCs when more than one PLC is connected to the
Ethernet. This setting is the node number used for FINS communications.
Use the left switch (SW3) to set the left digit as a hexadecimal, and the right switch (SW4) to
set the right digit. The setting range is 01 to 7E hexadecimal (1 to 126 decimal).
Setting Example:
This example is for node number 29 (decimal).
29 = 1 × 16 + 13 = 1D (hexadecimal)
Reference
• The node number cannot be set to a value higher than 7E (126 decimal). If the node
number is set to a higher value, an error will occur and the ERC indicator in the display
will light.
• Set the node numbers so that all the nodes in the same network are unique.
Setting IP Addresses for Ethernet Units
The IP address must also be set for Ethernet Units. Ethernet communications are not
possible if the IP address of the Ethernet Unit is not set.
Set the IP address for the Ethernet Unit from the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area using
Programming Devices (SYSMAC-CPT, SYSMAC Support Software, CV Support Software
Ver. 2 or later, FIT20-MF501-V2, FIT10-MF501-V2, FIT20-MC601, or FIT20-MC701). Refer
to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W242) for details
on setting methods.
Ethernet Unit System
Set the system settings for the Ethernet Unit to operate on the Ethernet network as a node.
Set the system settings using a Programming Device (SYSMAC-CPT, SYSMAC Support
Software, CV Support Software Ver.2 or later, FIT20-MF501-V2, FIT10-MF501-V2, FIT20MC601, or FIT20-MC701).
Reference
• For details on operating the Support Software, refer to the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in
the SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: Networks (Cat. No. W201) and
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CV Series (Cat. No. W249).
• Turn ON the power to the CPU Unit again after setting the system settings. The system
settings are not enabled after setting them until the power has been turned ON again.
5-15
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link
This section explains the method for connecting to the host using a Controller Link Interface
Unit.
5-2-1
What Is a Controller Link Network?
A Controller Link Network is an FA Network that can send and receive large data packets
flexibly and easily among the OMRON C200HX/HG/HE PLC Programmable Terminal (PTs),
SYSMAC CS-series PLCs, CJ-series PLCs, CQM1H-series PLCs, C200HX/HG/HE PLCs,
CVM1/CV-series PLCs, IBM PC/AT or compatible computers, and NS-series PTs. The
Controller Link supports data links that enable data sharing and a message service that
enables sending data and receiving data when required. Data link areas can be freely set to
create a flexible data link system and effectively use data areas.
The network is connected using shielded twisted-pair cable or optical fiber cable. In addition,
the Controller Link Network can transfer large quantities of data at high speed, so that it is
possible to construct a wide-area network easily that supports from low-level systems to high.
For details on data links and message service, refer to the Controller Link Support Board
Operation Manual (W307), Controller Link Support Board for PCI Bus Operation Manual (Cat.
No. W383), and the Controller Link Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W309).
Note: An optical fiber cable is not available for NS-series PTs.
CJ1W-CLK21
Controller Link Unit
PLC, SYSMAC
CJ Series
NS-CLK21
Controller Link
IBM PC/AT or
CVM1-CLK21
CS1W-CLK21
C200HW-CLK21
Interface Unit
compatible
Controller
NS Series
Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit
Link Unit
NS12-TS@
PLC, SYSMAC
PLC, SYSMAC
PLC, SYSMAC
NT10-TV@
CVM1/CV Series
CS Series
C200HX/HG/HE
CQ1H-CLK21
Controller Link Unit
PLC, SYSMAC
CQM1H Series
3G8F5-CLK21
Controller Link
Support Board
FC98 personal
Personal computer
computer
3G8F6-CLK21
Controller Link
Support Board
3G8F7-CLK21
Controller Link
Support Board
To connect the PT to the Controller Link, it is necessary to install a Controller Link Interface
Unit on the PT. A Controller Link Interface Unit can be used only for the NS15, NS12 and
NS10 NS-series PTs. Refer to 3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit for the
procedure for installing and wire the Controller Link Interface Unit.
When communicating by Controller Link, the network number, node number, routing tables,
and data link tables must be set. Use the CX-Designer to set the settings. For details, refer to
System Settings and Project Properties in the CX-Designer’s Online Help.
Required Devices
To construct a Controller Link Network, the devices described in the following table are
required.
5-16
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link
Device
Controller Link Unit
(See note.)
Controller Link
Support Board (ISA
Bus/PC98)
Controller Link
Support Board (PCI
Bus)
Twisted-pair Cable
Model
CVM1-CLK21
C200HW-CLK21
CS1W-CLK21
CQM1H-CLK21
CJ1W-CLK21
3G8F5-CLK21
3G8F6-CLK21
3G8F7-CLK21
Remarks
Required to connect PLC with
Controller Link Network.
Required to connect IBM
PC/AT or compatible
computers with Controller Link
Network.
Required to connect the PT,
PLC, and IBM PC/AT or
compatible computers. Use
shielded twisted-pair cable.
Controller Link Wired
CJ1W-TB101
Used as a relay terminal block
Relay Terminal Block
for wires and can be used as
required to facilitate
replacement and maintenance
of Controller Link Units and
Boards after the
communications system has
been started.
Note: For details on the CPU Units that support connection to Controller Link Units, refer to Appendix 8
Standard Models.
5-2-2
ESVC0.5×2C
Data Links
This section outlines data links and the method of setting data link tables when using data
links. For details, refer to the Controller Link Support Board Operation Manual (W307),
Controller Link Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W309), and the Controller Link Support
Board for PCI Bus Operation Manual (Cat. No. W383).
What Are Data Links?
Data links automatically exchange preset data between nodes (i.e., between PLCs, between
a PLC and an IBM PC/AT or compatible computer, or between a PLC and an NS-series PT).
Data links can be freely created for CS-series PLCs, C200HX/HG/HE PLCs, CVM1, CVseries PLCs, CJ-series PLCs, CQM1H-series PLCs, and NS-series PTs.
Two data link areas, area 1 and area 2, can be set for each node. Data links can be set in
either of the following ways.
• Data link areas can be set by inputting data link tables through the Controller Link Support
Software. Data link tables are created to define the data links. These tables enable free
allocation of data link areas.
• Data links can be set automatically from a Programming Device. With automatically set
data links, all link areas are the same size.
Automatic setting and manual setting cannot be used together in the same network.
The following rules apply to these methods of setting data links.
1. Data links are enables concurrently for area 1 and area 2.
2. Separate settings (data link start words and send area size) are made in area 1 and area
2. The sequences of send and receive words are the same in area 1 and area 2.
3. Not all nodes must participate in the data links.
5-17
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link
Example 1: The order of send
and receive nodes is free.
Example 2: Some nodes can
send data without receiving data.
Area 1
Area 1
Sending only
Area 2
Area 2
Example 3: Some nodes can
receive data without sending
data.
Area 1
Example 4: A node can receive a
specified number of words from
the beginning of an area.
Area 1
Several words
from the
beginning
Receiving only
Area 2
Area 2
Receiving only
5-18
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link
Setting Data Link Tables
To perform data links, data link tables are required. Set data link tables by following the steps
below.
1. Set data link tables using the CX-Net (Network Configurations Tool).
Data link tables are created to define data links. These tables must be set for each node
participating in data links. Refer to the manual for CX-Programmer for the method of
setting.
The following table shows the items and setting range for data link tables in the
Controller Link Support Board mounted on the PT.
Setting item
PLC
Node
Setting range
Set as a "NSB."
1 to 32
Set the address of the refresh nodes.
First data link status If a number is set, it will be invalid because the first word to store data link
word
status is fixed.
Set ”-“.
Area 1 Data link
$B0 to $B32767
start word $W0 to $W24575
(See note.) Use CIO for $B and D for $W in the CX-Net.
The same area cannot be set for both area 1 and area 2. Set different areas.
Number of • Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received
• Local nodes:
0 to 1000
Set the number of words to be transmitted
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node must not exceed
1,000.
The number of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node must not be set
to 0.
Offset
• Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set offset for data to be received
• Local nodes:
Cannot be set.
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.
Area 2 Data link
$B0 to $B32767
start word $W0 to $W24575
(See note.) Use CIO for $B and D for $W in the CX-Net.
The same area cannot be set for both area 1 and area 2. Set different areas.
Number of • Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received
• Local nodes:
0 to 1000
Set the number of words to be transmitted
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node must not exceed
1,000.
The number of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node must not be set
to 0.
Offset
• Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set offset for data to be received
• Local nodes:
Cannot be set.
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.
5-19
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link
Precautions
for Safe Use
The following examples show how to change CIO and D addresses to $B
and $W addresses.
1. Changing to $B addresses:
$B address = Word in CIO address (0 to 2047) × 16 + Bit in CIO address
(00 to 15)
Example: If the CIO address is 00100.04, $B address = 100 × 16 + 4 =
$B1604.
Word Bit
2. Changing to $W addresses:
$W address = D address (0 to 24575)
Example: If the D address is D00100, $W address = $W100.
• The total number of words set in area 1 and area 2 must not exceed 32,000.
• Always delete the data link tables if the node does not participate in data
links.
Save the data link tables after setting the above items.
2. Set data link tables for the PT side on the CX-Designer
The two setting methods below can be used. Use the appropriate method for the
application.
1) Specifying data link tables with CX-Designer:
If the data link tables are set from the CX-Designer, then they cannot be changed via
a network. Even if they are temporarily changed from the CX-Server or Controller
Link Support Software, they will return to the tables set from the CX-Designer the
next time the PT is started. To change the data link tables when they have been set
from the CX-Designer, it is necessary to retransfer the project or setting file to the PT.
Select PT – Communication Setting – Controller Link in the CX-Designer and
specify the data link tables created in step 1. For details on specifying the data link
table’s settings file, refer to System Settings and Project Properties in the CXDesigner’s Online Help.
2) Setting data link tables across a network:
To do so, transfer the data link tables in the Controller Link Interface Unit from the CXServer or Controller Link Support Software, and do not specify data link tables from
the CX-Designer. If data link tables are set via a network, then they can later be
changed via a network as required. For details on the transfer method, refer to the
CX-Net Operation Manual (Cat. No. W361) and the Controller Link Support Software
Operation Manual (Cat. No. W369).
3. Transfer the project created on CX-Designer to the PT.
Starting and Stopping Data Links
The PT starts and stops data links according to the status of the data links when
participating in the network. If the data links are started when entering the network, the PT
will start its data links. If network has stopped data links, the PT will not start data links. The
PT cannot control starting/stopping data links independently. Control starting/stopping data
links on the Controller Link network using the startup node or CX-Server.
Precautions
for Safe Use
5-20
• The data link mode (manual setting or automatic setting) and data link
method are determined according to the data link setting in the startup node.
In the startup node, set the data link tables if manual settings are being used
and data link automatic setting parameters if automatic settings are being
used. If the settings are incorrect, the data links will not start.
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link
Caution
• Check the following items before starting data links.
1. Manually Set Data Links
Check the data link tables in each node participating in
the data link to see that they are correct. Be sure that
data link tables are deleted from nodes that are not
participating in the data links.
2. Automatically Set data Links
Be sure that the correct DM parameters have been set in
the data link startup node.
If incorrect data link tables or parameters are set, injury may
result due to unexpected operation of the system.
• Even if the correct data link tables or parameters have been
set, do not start or stop data links before verifying that there
will be no adverse influence on the system.
Setting Routing Tables
Routine tables that define the communications path from the local node to the network
connected to the destination. Routine tables must be set for the following items.
• Local node
• All relay nodes that are included for the communication path from local node to the
destination.
Make settings for routing tables on the CX-Designer. For details on setting routing tables,
refer to System Settings and Project Properties in the CX-Designer’s Online Help.
For details on setting routing tables for the PLC, refer to Section 7 System Settings in the
CX-Designer Operation Manual.
5-21
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link
5-2-3
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
The errors indicated by indicators on the Controller Interface Unit and remedies are
explained in this section.
Indicators
RUN: Operating
ERC: Communications error
ERH: EEPROM Error
INS: Network participation
LNK: Data link
Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC, ERH, and INS Indicators
The RUN, ERC, ERH, and INS indicators can be used to check whether the Controller Link
Interface Unit and network participation are operating normally.
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Always turn OFF the power to the PT before performing any of the following
operations.
• Connecting/Disconnecting a Board or a connector.
• Securing a Board or a connector.
• Setting hardware switches.
Indicators
Probable cause
RUN ERC ERH INS
Lit
Not lit Not lit Lit
The Unit operating normally.
Network participation normal.
Not lit Lit
Controller Link Interface Unit is
−
−
faulty.
Remedy

If ERC indicator lights even after
mounting on another PT, replace the
Controller Link Interface Unit
Not lit Not lit Not lit Not lit Power is not being supplied to Check the power supply voltage and
PT normally.
supply at the recommended voltage.
The Controller Link Interface
Secure the Controller Link Interface
Unit has become loose.
Unit firmly.
Controller Link Interface Unit is Refer to 3-8 Installing the Controller
mounted in the wrong slot.
Link Interface Unit, and mount the
Board correctly.
Controller Link Interface Unit is If indicators do not light when the
faulty.
Board is mounted on another PT,
replace the Controller Link Interface
Unit
Lit
Lit
Not lit The same node address is
Reset so that each node address is
−
being used in the same network. used only once within the same
network.
5-22
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link
Indicators
Probable cause
Remedy
RUN ERC ERH INS
Lit
Lit
Routing table setting error.
−
−
Lit
−
−
Remake and set the routing tables
correctly, referring to System Settings
and Project Properties in the CXDesigner’s Online Help.
When the routing tables are not being
used, delete the routing tables.
EEPROM error.
Send a FINS command to the
Controller Link Interface Unit to read
status, correct the data where the error
has occurred, and reset the Board. If
the error occurs again, replace the
Controller Link Interface Unit.
Not lit Terminating resistance is not set Turn ON the terminating resistance at
correctly.
the nodes at both ends of the network
and turn it OFF at all other nodes.
Cables are not connected
Check the cable connections and
correctly.
reconnect correctly.
The node address is larger than Either reset the maximum node
the maximum node address set address using Controller Link Support
for the network parameters.
Software or reset the node address to
below the maximum.
No other nodes exist.
Ensure that 2 or more nodes exist
within the Network.
No nodes have been set as
Set the polling node using the CXpolling node.
Server.
The set baud rate is different
Reset the baud rate for the Controller
from other nodes.
Link in the CX-Designer’s
Communication Setting. For details on
setting the baud rate, refer to System
Settings and Project Properties in the
CX-Designer’s Online Help.
5-23
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link
Troubleshooting with LNK Indicator
- Data Links Cannot Be Started
The following table describes the LNK indicator and remedies when a data link cannot be
started.
Starting a data link depends on the Controller Link Interface Unit operating normally and
participating in the network. Refer to Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC, ERH, and INS
Indicators earlier in this section and check operation before using the following table.
Indicator
LNK
Lit
Flashing
Not lit
Probable cause
Data link operating normally.
There is an error in the data link tables.
Remedy

If ERH or ERR indicator is lit, reset the
data link tables.
Create the data link tables for the startup
node using the CX-Server.
When manual setting is used, either data
link tables have not been created for the
startup node or there is an error in the data
link tables.
Manually set data links are already
Set data link tables for the local node.
operating on the same Network.
Automatically set data links are already
Stop the data links, review and set the
operating on the same Network.
parameters in the startup node's DM area,
and then restart.
The PT cannot be the startup node for
automatic settings. Settings must be
performed at Controller Link Unit on the
PLC.
- Node Cannot Participate in Data Links
The following table describes the LNK indicator and remedies when a Node cannot
participate in the data links.
Data link participation in the network depends on the Controller Link Interface Unit operating
normally and participating in the network. Refer to Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC, ERH,
and INS Indicators earlier in this section and check operation before using the following table.
Indicator
LNK
Lit
Flashing
Not lit
5-24
Probable cause
Data Link operating normally.
When manual setting is used, there is an
error in the data link table.
When manual setting is used, there are no
Data Link Tables set for the local node.
When automatic setting is used, the setup
node is not set to participate in the data
links.
Remedy

Reset data link tables using the CXServer.
Set the data link tables for the local node.
Stop the data links, remake and set the
parameters in the Startup node’s DM Area,
and then restart the data links.
Setting must be performed at PLC on the
Controller Unit side, because the
Controller Link Interface Unit cannot be the
startup node for automatic settings. For
details, refer to the Controller Link Units
Operation Manual.
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
5-3-1
What is EtherNet/IP?
EtherNet/IP is a multi-vendor industrial network protocol that uses Ethernet. The specification
is an open standard managed by the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association), as is
DeviceNet, and it is used for a variety of industrial devices.
NS-series PTs can communicate with CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and CJ2H-CPU@@EIP, CJ2M-CPU3@ and NJ@01-@@00 CPU Units. (The CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, CJ2M-CPU3@,
NJ@01-@@@@, and NX@01-@@@@ have built-in EtherNet/IP ports.)
Also, it is possible to perform tag message communications when using a CPU Unit with a
built-in EtherNet/IP port. These CPU Units contain a tag name server, so if tag names and an
address table are stored in advance in the CPU Unit, it is possible to perform access from
the NS-series PT using only the tag names.
The following NS-series PTs and systems versions support EtherNet/IP.
Model
System version
NS15-TX01@-V2, NS12-V2, NS10-V2, NS8-V2, NS5-SQ1@-V2,
NS5-TQ1@-V2, NS5-MQ1@V2
CS/CJ Series: Version 8.0 or higher
NJ101 Series: Version 8.6 or higher
NJ301 Series: Version 8.6 or higher
NJ501 Series: Version 8.5 or higher
NX701 Series: Version 8.9 or higher
The following NS-series PTs and Controllers can be connected using EtherNet/IP.
Series name
CS Series
Using the built-in board
CJ Series
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
CJ2M-CPU3@
NJ Series
NJ101-@@@@
NJ301-@@@@
NJ501-@@@@
NX701-@@@@
Using an EtherNet/IP Unit
CS1G-CPU@@(-V1)
CS1G-CPU@@H
CS1H-CPU@@(-V1)
CS1H-CPU@@H
CS1D-CPU@@H
CJ1H-CPU@@H
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CJ1G-CPU@@H
CJ1M-CPU@@
CJ2H-CPU@@(-EIP)
CJ2M-CPU@@
NJ101-@@@@
NJ301-@@@@
NJ501-@@@@
-
EtherNet/IP Unit
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
(See note 1.)
NX Series
(See note 2.)
Note 1: The NJ-series Troubleshooter cannot be used. The following unit versions are required.
NJ-series CPU Unit: Unit version 1.01 or later
EtherNet/IP Unit: Unit version 2.1 or later
Note 2: Please select the SYSMAC-NJ for Host type to be set to the CX-Designer when connecting to
the NX Series
5-25
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
5-3-2
Selecting Network Configuration Devices
Devices Required to Construct a Network
The basic configuration for an EtherNet/IP system includes one Ethernet switch to which
nodes are attached in star configuration using twisted-pair cable.
Configuration Example
(3) Switching hub
NS-series PT
(2) Twisted-pair cable
100 m
max.
(1) CS1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP
Unit for CS-series
Ethernet (LAN) port
(1) CS1W-EIP21
EtherNet/IP Unit
CS-series
PLC
CJ-series
PLC
(1) Built-in EtherNet/IP port
on CJ2 CPU Unit
(CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP/CJ2
M-CPU3@)
CJ-series
PLC
The following devices are required to configure a network using an EtherNet/IP Unit and
must be purchased separately. Prepare the devices in advance.
Network device
(1) Per Node
NX701-@@@@ NX Series CPU Unit
(built-in EtherNet/IP port)
NJ501-@@@@/NJ301-@@@@/NJ101-@@@@ NJseries CPU Unit (built-in EtherNet/IP port)
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP or CJ2M-CPU3@ CJ2 CPU
Unit (built-in EtherNet/IP port)
CJ-series CJ1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Unit
CS-series CS1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Unit
(2) Twisted-pair cable
(3) Ethernet switch
Function
These Units are used to connect to an
EtherNet/IP network.
The twisted-pair cable has a RJ45 Modular
Connector at each end. This cable is used
to connect the built-in EtherNet/IP port or
EtherNet/IP Unit to a Ethernet switch. Use
an STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable of
category 5, 5e, or higher.
This is a relay device that connects multiple
nodes in a star LAN.
Recommended Network Devices
The following table shows the devices recommended for use with the EtherNet/IP.
Ethernet Switches
Ethernet Switches from OMRON
Name
Model
Specifications
Description
Ethernet
Switch
5-26
W4S1-03B
W4S1-05B
Packet priority control (QoS):
EtherNet/IP control data priority
OK: Supported, ---: Not
supported.
Number Failure detection
of ports
output
3
--5
---
Inquire
OMRON
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
W4S1-05C
Failure detection: Broadcast
storm, LSI error detection,
10/100Base-TX, Auto
negotiation
5
OK
Ethernet Switches from Other Companies
Manufacturer
Cisco Systems, Inc.
CONTEC USA Inc.
Phoenix Contact USA
Model
Consult the manufacturer.
Consult the manufacturer.
Consult the manufacturer.
Inquire
Cisco Systems, Inc.
Contec USA, Inc.
Phoenix Contact
Twitsted-pair Cables (100Base-TX) and Connectors (Modular Plugs and STP Plugs)
Product
Sizes and
Cables
conductor
pairs: AWG 24
× 4 pairs
Manufacturer
Tonichi Kyosan
Cable, Ltd.
Kuramo Electric
Co., Ltd.
SWCC Showa
Cable Systems
Co. Ltd.
Model
NETSTAR-C5E
SAB 0.5 ⋅ 4P
KETH-SB
Inquire
Kanetsu Planning
Department
Kuramo Electric Co., Ltd.
FAE-5004
SWCC Showa Cable
Systems Co. Ltd.
RJ45
Connectors
Panduit Corporation
MPS588
Panduit Corporation,
Japan Branch, Osaka
Sales Office
Sizes and
conductor
pairs: AWG 22
× 2 pairs
Cables
Kuramo Electric
Co., Ltd.
Kuramo Electric Co., Ltd.
RJ45
Assembly
Connectors
OMRON
KETH-PSBOMR*
XS6G-T421-1*
Sizes and
conductor
pairs: 0.5 mm
× 4 pairs
Cables
Fujikura Ltd.
RJ45
Connectors
Panduit Corporation
F-LINK-E
0.5mm ⋅ 4P
MPS588
OMRON Corporation,
Customer Support
Center
Kanetsu Planning
Department
Panduit Corporation,
Japan Branch, Osaka
Sales Office
* We recommend using combinations of the above cables and connectors.
Boots
Manufacturer
TSUKO
Model
MK Boots (IV) LB
Inquires
TSUKO
Ethernet Switch Types
Unmanaged Layer 2 (L2) Ethernet Switches
These Ethernet switches use the Ethernet MAC address to switch ports. Ordinary Ethernet
switches have this function. Ethernet switch functions and settings cannot be changed.
Managed Layer 2 (L2) Ethernet Switches
These Ethernet switches use the Ethernet MAC address to switch ports. Ethernet switch
functions and settings can be changed with special software tools for Ethernet switches
running on a network node. You can also collect analytical data. These Ethernet switches
provide more-advanced functions than unmanaged layer 2 Ethernet switches.
5-27
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
Ethernet Switch Functions
This section describes the Ethernet switch functions that are important for an EtherNet/IP
network. For a built-in EtherNet/IP port, consider whether the Ethernet switch supports these
functions when you select the Ethernet switch.
• Multicast filtering
• QoS (Quality of Service) for TCP/UDP port numbers (L4)
Multicast Filtering
Multicast filtering transfers multicast packets to the specific nodes only. This function is
implemented in the Ethernet switch as IGMP snooping or GMRP. “Specific nodes” are nodes
equipped with an IGMP client that have made transfer requests to the Ethernet switch.
(OMRON built-in EtherNet/IP ports are equipped with an IGMP client.) When the Ethernet
switch does not use multicast filtering, multicast packets are sent to all nodes, just like
broadcast packets, which increases the traffic in the network. Settings must be made in the
Ethernet switch to enable this function. There must be enough multicast filters for the network.
QoS (Quality of Service) Function for TCP/UDP Port Numbers (L4)
This function controls the priority of packet transmissions so that packets can be sent with
higher priority to a particular IP address or TCP (UDP) port. The TCP and UDP protocols are
called transport layer protocols, leading to the name L4 (layer 4) QoS function.
Support for the above two functions is as follows for the different types of Ethernet switches.
Ethernet switch type
Unmanaged L2 Ethernet
switches
Managed L2 Ethernet
switches
OMRON W4S1-series
Ethernet Switches
5-28
Multicast filtering
None
L4 QoS
None
Provided.
Provided.
None
Provided.
Remarks
--Both functions must be set with
a special software tool.
L4 QoS is set with a switch. No
software tool is necessary.
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
5-3-3
Network Installation
Basic Installation Precautions
• Take the greatest care when you install the Ethernet system. Be sure to follow ISO 8802-3
specifications. Be sure you understand them before attempting to install an Ethernet
System.
• Unless you are already experienced in installation of communications systems, we strongly
recommend that you employ a professional to install your system.
• Do not install Ethernet equipment near sources of noise. If a noisy environment is
unavoidable, take adequate measures against noise interference, such as installation of
network components in metal cases or the use of optical cable in the system.
Precautions on Laying Twisted-pair Cable
• Noise immunity may be reduced by ground loops, which can occur due to improper shield
connections and grounding. Ground the shield at one location, as shown in the following
diagram.
• Do not connect the shield to the PT’s connector.
• If a cable connects two Ethernet switches, connect the shield at only one end.
• Press the cable connector in firmly until it locks into place at both the Ethernet switch and
the EtherNet/IP port.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable together with high-voltage lines.
• Do not install the network or network devices near devices that generate noise.
• Do not install the network or network devices in locations subject to high temperatures or
high humidity.
• Do not install the network or network devices in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust
or to oil mist or other contaminants.
5-29
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
Ethernet Switch Installation Environment Precautions
• Do not ground the Ethernet switch in the same location as a drive-system component,
such as an inverter.
• Always use a dedicated power supply for the Ethernet switch’s power supply. Do not use
the same power supply for other equipment, such as an I/O power supply, motor power
supply, or control power supply.
• Before installation, check the Ethernet switch’s environmental resistance specifications,
and use a Ethernet switch that is appropriate for the ambient conditions. Contact the
Ethernet switch manufacturer for details on Ethernet switch’s environmental resistance
specifications.
Ethernet Switch Connection Methods
• Connect two Ethernet switches to each other as follows:
Connect an MDI port to an MDI-X port with a straight cable.
Connect two MDI ports or two MDI-X ports with a cross cable.
• Some Ethernet switches can automatically distinguish between MDI and MDI-X. When this
kind of Ethernet switch is used, straight cable can be used between Ethernet switches.
5-30
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
5-3-4
Host Types and Settings
Units that are used for EtherNet/IP communications vary according to the type and series of
OMRON PLC used.
When connecting an EtherNet/IP Unit, check the series and type of the PLC that it will be
connected to and the model of the Unit that is mounted to the PLC.
For details on the hosts that can be connected to NS-series PTs via the EtherNet/IP, refer to
Appendix 8 Standard Models.
Refer to the following manual for host parameter settings: SYSMAC CS/CJ-series
EtherNet/IP Units Operation Manual (Cat. No. W465), SYSMAC CJ-series CJ2 CPU Units
Operation Manual (Cat. No. W472), NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W506), or CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units Operation Manual for NJ-series CPU
Unit (Cat. No. W495).
Connecting to a CJ-series CPU Unit
• Always turn OFF the power to the PLC before setting the rotary switches.
• Create I/O tables for the CPU Unit when setting the unit number for the first
time or changing settings.
Precautions
for Safe Use
CJ-series CPU Unit (Built-in EtherNet/IP Port):
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
CJ2M-CPU3@
Setting Local IP Addresses
Set the local IP address with the CX-Programmer or other Support Software.
Refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series EtherNet/IP Units Operation Manual (Cat. No. W465) for
details on setting methods.
Setting the Front Panel Switches
Setting the Unit Number
Set a unique unit number for the CJ2 CPU Unit built-in EtherNet/IP port. The same unit
number cannot be used by any other CPU Bus Unit connected to the CJ2 CPU Unit.
Use a small screwdriver to make the setting, and be sure not to damage the rotary switch.
The unit number is factory-set to 0.
Setting range
0 to F
Node Address Setting Switches
Set a FINS address for the built-in EtherNet/IP port. With the FINS communications service,
multiple EtherNet/IP Units (including the CJ2 Unit built-in EtherNet/IP port) connected by
Ethernet are identified by their node addresses. Using the node address switches, set a
unique node address in hexadecimal. The same node address cannot be used by any other
EtherNet/IP Unit or Ethernet Unit connected on the same Ethernet network.
As long as it does not duplicate any other address, the node address can be set from 01 to
FE (1 to 254 in decimal).
Setting range
01 to FE hex (1 to 254 decimal)
Note: The node address is factory-set to 01. With the default setting, the values set on these switches
5-31
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
become the last two digits of the built-in EtherNet/IP port’s IP address.
The default IP address is 192.168.250.node_address. With the factory-set node address of
01, the default IP address is 192.168.250.1.
The node address can be set to any number in the setting range (01 to FE), as long as the
same address is not set on another node in the network.
Ethernet Connectors
This is the connector used to connect the twisted-pair cable to the Ethernet.
• Electrical Characteristics: Conforms to IEEE802.3 standards.
• Connector Layout: RJ45 8-pin modular connector (conforms to ISO 8877).
1
8
Connecto
r Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal name
Send data
Send data −
Receive data +
Not used.
Not used.
Receive data −
Not used.
Not used.
Abbreviation
TD+
TD−
RD+
−
−
RD−
−
−
Signal direction
Output
Output
Input
−
−
Input
−
−
Connecting to an NJ/NX-series CPU Unit
NJ101-@@@@
NJ301-@@@@
NJ501-@@@@
NX701-@@@@
Setting Local IP Address
Set the local IP address with the Sysmac Studio or other Support Software. Refer to the
NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. 506) for details on
setting methods.
Ethernet Connectors
This is the connector used to connect the twisted-pair cable to the Ethernet.
• Electrical Characteristics: Conform to the IEEE 802.3 standard.
• Connector Layout: RJ45 8-pin modular connector (conforms to ISO 8877.)
1
8
5-32
Connecto
r Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal name
Send data
Send data −
Receive data +
Not used.
Not used.
Receive data −
Not used.
Not used.
Abbreviation
TD+
TD−
RD+
−
−
RD−
−
−
Signal direction
Output
Output
Input
−
−
Input
−
−
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
Connecting to a CS-series EtherNet/IP Unit
• Always turn OFF the power to the PLC before setting the rotary switches.
• Create I/O tables for the CPU Unit when setting the unit number for the first
time or changing settings.
Precautions
for Safe Use
CS-series EtherNet/IP Unit:
CS1W-EIP21
Setting the Front Panel Switches
Setting Unit Numbers
Always set the unit numbers so that the unit numbers of other CPU Bus Units mounted to the
same CPU Unit are all unique.
Use a small screwdriver to set the rotary switches, being careful not to damage them.
The factory setting is 0.
UNIT
NO.
Setting range
0 to F
Setting Node Numbers
Use the node address switches to set the node address to a unique hexadecimal value. Do
not set it to the same value as any other EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in port on the same
EtherNet/IP network. As long as it does not duplicate the address of any other EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in port, the node address can be set from 01 to 7E hex (1 to 126 decimal).
NODE
NO.
Setting range
161
160
01 to 7E (1 to 126 decimal)
Set the upper digit using the left rotary switch and the lower digit using the right rotary switch.
The factory setting is 01.
When using automatic generation to convert addresses, set the node number to the same
value as that of the rightmost byte of the local IP address. If the same values cannot be set,
the IP address table method or combination method must be used to convert the addresses.
Setting Local IP Addresses
Set the local IP address with the CX-Programmer or other Support Software.
For the setting procedure, refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units Operation
Manual (Cat. No. W465).
5-33
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
Ethernet Connectors
This is the connector used to connect the twisted-pair cable to the Ethernet.
• Electrical Characteristics: Conforms to IEEE802.3 standards.
• Connector Layout: RJ45 8-pin modular connector (conforms to ISO 8877).
1
8
Connecto
r Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal name
Send data
Send data −
Receive data +
Not used.
Not used.
Receive data −
Not used.
Not used.
Abbreviation
TD+
TD−
RD+
−
−
RD−
−
−
Signal direction
Output
Output
Input
−
−
Input
−
−
Connecting to a CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit or NJ-series CPU Unit
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Always turn OFF the power to the PLC before setting the rotary switches.
• Create I/O tables for the CPU Unit when setting the unit number for the first
time or changing settings.
CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit:
CJ1W-EIP21
Setting the Front Panel Switches
Setting Unit Numbers
Always set the unit numbers so that the unit numbers of other CPU Bus Units mounted to the
same CPU Unit are all unique.
Use a small screwdriver to set the rotary switches, being careful not to damage them.
The factory setting is 0.
Setting range
0 to F
Setting Node Numbers
Use the node address switches to set the node address to a unique hexadecimal value. Do
not set it to the same value as any other EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in port on the same
EtherNet/IP network. As long as it does not duplicate the address of any other EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in port, the node address can be set from 01 to 7E hex (1 to 126 decimal).
Setting range
01 to 7E (1 to 126 decimal)
Set the upper digit using the left rotary switch and the lower digit using the right rotary switch.
The factory setting is 01.
When using automatic generation to convert addresses, set the node number to the same
5-34
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
value as that of the rightmost byte of the local IP address. If the same values cannot be set,
the IP address table method or combination method must be used to convert the addresses.
Setting Local IP Addresses
Set the local IP address with the CX-Programmer or other computer support software. Refer
to the EtherNet/IP Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W465) or the CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units
Operation Manual for NJ-series CPU Unit (Cat. No. W495) for details on setting methods.
Ethernet Connectors
This is the connector used to connect the twisted-pair cable to the Ethernet.
• Electrical Characteristics: Conforms to IEEE802.3 standards.
• Connector Layout: RJ45 8-pin modular connector (conforms to ISO8877).
1
8
Connecto
r Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal name
Send data
Send data −
Receive data +
Not used.
Not used.
Receive data −
Not used.
Not used.
Abbreviation
TD+
TD−
RD+
−
−
RD−
−
−
Signal direction
Output
Output
Input
−
−
Input
−
−
5-35
5-3 Connecting to Host via EtherNet/IP
5-36
Section 6
System Menu Operations
This section describes the methods for operating the System Menu.
This section also provides details on functions that are useful for NS-series PT applications and
for system maintenance.
Operating Modes and System Menu................................................................................ 6-4
6-1-1 Mode Configuration ................................................................................................. 6-4
6-1-2 System Menu Configuration .................................................................................... 6-4
6-1-3 Overview of Menu Items.......................................................................................... 6-5
6-1-4 Using the System Menu ........................................................................................... 6-8
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card..................................... 6-11
6-2-1 Screen Data Area Format ....................................................................................... 6-12
6-2-2 Initializing or Saving the Alarm/Event History...................................................... 6-13
6-2-3 Initializing and Saving Data Log............................................................................ 6-15
6-2-4 Initializing and Saving the Operation Log ............................................................. 6-16
6-2-5 Initializing and Saving the Error Log..................................................................... 6-18
6-2-6 Language Selection ................................................................................................ 6-19
6-2-7 Removing the Memory Card.................................................................................. 6-20
6-2-8 Initializing Internal Holding Memories ($HB/$HW)............................................. 6-21
6-3 PT Settings..................................................................................................................... 6-22
6-3-1 Start-up Wait Time................................................................................................. 6-26
6-3-2 Screen Saver........................................................................................................... 6-27
6-3-3 Key Press Sound .................................................................................................... 6-28
6-3-4 Buzzer Sound ......................................................................................................... 6-28
6-3-5 Backlight Brightness .............................................................................................. 6-29
6-3-6 Calendar Check ...................................................................................................... 6-32
6-3-7 Printer Type............................................................................................................ 6-33
6-3-8 Printing Mode......................................................................................................... 6-33
6-3-9 Orientation.............................................................................................................. 6-34
6-3-10 Changing Values in Device Monitor Setting.......................................................... 6-34
6-1
6-3-11 Contrast (NS5-SQ@@/NS5-MQ@@ Only) ........................................................... 6-34
6-3-12 CJK Han Unification Priority................................................................................. 6-35
6-3-13 Alarm Monitor Registration Procedure .................................................................. 6-35
6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu
6-3-14 Starting the Ladder Monitor from Alarm/Event Summary and History
(NS15/12/10/8 Only) ......................................................................................................... 6-36
6-3-15 Setting the Tag Update Notification Message........................................................ 6-36
6-3-16 Time to Switch to System Menu (NS12, NS10, NS8, or NS5).............................. 6-36
6-3-17 Double-touch Interval (NS15 Only)....................................................................... 6-37
6-3-18 Analog RGB Output (NS15 only) .......................................................................... 6-37
6-4 Project Settings .............................................................................................................. 6-38
6-4-1 Project Title ............................................................................................................ 6-38
6-4-2 Number of Labels................................................................................................... 6-39
6-4-3 Initial Screen .......................................................................................................... 6-39
6-4-4 Initial Label ............................................................................................................ 6-39
6-4-5 Barcode Input When Using Keypad....................................................................... 6-39
6-4-6 Alarm/Event History Recording Method ............................................................... 6-39
6-4-7 Data Log Recording Method.................................................................................. 6-40
6-4-8 Operation Log Recording Method ......................................................................... 6-40
6-4-9 Error Log Recording Method ................................................................................. 6-40
6-4-10 System Memory ..................................................................................................... 6-40
6-5 Setting Passwords .......................................................................................................... 6-41
6-5-1 Changing the Password .......................................................................................... 6-41
6-5-2 Setting the Password Function ............................................................................... 6-42
6-6 Communications Settings .............................................................................................. 6-44
6-6-1 Communications Conditions .................................................................................. 6-44
6-6-2 Setting 1:1 NT Link................................................................................................ 6-46
6-6-3 Setting High-speed 1:N NT Links (Standard, High-speed).................................... 6-47
6-6-4 Ethernet and EtherNet/IP Settings.......................................................................... 6-47
6-6-5 Setting the Controller Link Network...................................................................... 6-50
6-6-6 Setting Bar Code Readers....................................................................................... 6-50
6-6-7 Modem Settings...................................................................................................... 6-52
6-7 Screen Data Check......................................................................................................... 6-53
6-8 Special Screens .............................................................................................................. 6-54
6-8-1 Alarm History......................................................................................................... 6-55
6-8-2 Operation Log ........................................................................................................ 6-56
6-8-3 Error Log................................................................................................................ 6-57
6-8-4 Device Monitor ...................................................................................................... 6-58
6-8-5 Communication Test .............................................................................................. 6-60
6-8-6 Video Configuration............................................................................................... 6-62
6-8-7 USB Device List..................................................................................................... 6-64
6-8-8 Display Capture Data ............................................................................................. 6-65
6-8-9 Memory Card Transfers ......................................................................................... 6-66
6-8-10 External Application Startup .................................................................................. 6-68
6-8-11 Version Display...................................................................................................... 6-69
6-8-12 PLC Data Trace (NS15, NS12, NS10, and NS8 Only) .......................................... 6-69
6-8-13 NJ-series Troubleshooter........................................................................................ 6-71
6-9 Hardware Check ............................................................................................................ 6-72
6-9-1 LCD Check............................................................................................................. 6-72
6-9-2 Touch Switch Check .............................................................................................. 6-73
6-9-3 Touch Panel Calibration (NS15 Only) ................................................................... 6-73
6-2
6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu
6-10 Starting Operations ........................................................................................................ 6-74
6-11 Verifying Tags............................................................................................................... 6-76
6-3
6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu
6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu
The System Menu can be used to set various PT settings by operating the touch switches on
the screen. The following diagram shows the menu configuration in the System Menu. Refer
to 6-1-4 Using the System Menu for details on System Menu operations.
6-1-1
Mode Configuration
The NS-series PTs have the following operating modes.
Mode
System Menu:
Displays the System Menu, and sets each of the settings for the PT.
RUN mode:
Displays screens, allows data input, and communicates with each device.
TRANSFER mode: Data transfer with
CX-Designer:
Memory Card transfer:
ERROR mode:
6-1-2
Uploads and downloads screen data and
system programs between the CX-Designer
(computer) and PT.
Uploads and downloads screen data and
system programs via the Memory Card.
Fatal error:
Stops processing (operating) and displays error
message.
Non-fatal error:
Continues processing (operating) without displaying error
message.
System Menu Configuration
The System Menu items and functions are as follows:
System Menu
6-4
Initialize:
Save:
Initializes or saves operation log, alarm/event histories, data log,
error log, and formats screen data, initializes internal holding
memories, provides a function to remove the Memory Card, and
sets the system language.
PT:
Sets the system startup waiting time, screen saver, key press
sound, buzzer, backlight, and calendar check. Also makes the
settings for the printer connected to the PT and the alarm
monitor registration method.
Project:
Displays the project title, number of labels, history recording
method, and addresses allocated to the system memory.
Displays and sets the screen numbers displayed at startup time.
Password:
Sets the password functions (including passwords with levels).
Also sets and changes passwords.
Comm:
Sets the communications conditions for serial ports A and B, a
modem (data transfer), Host Link, Ethernet, and Controller Link.
Data Check:
Checks the stored screen contents without communications.
Special Screen:
Displays the operation log, alarm history, error log, device
monitor, communication test, version display, capture data, and
PLC data trace, and performs video configuration. Also lists
devices connected to the USB port.
Hardware Check:
Performs a hardware check, such as checking that the touch
panel is operating properly.
6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu
6-1-3
Overview of Menu Items
The following tables show the eight menu items and provide an overview of their contents.
1. Initialize Tab
Item
Screen Data Area
Alarm/Event History
Data Log
Operation Log
Error Log
Select language
Memory Card
Internal Holding Memory
($HB/$HW)
Function
Formats project data, such as screen data.
Initializes or saves in a CSV file in the Memory Card the
alarm/event history data that has been generated during operation.
Initializes or saves in a CSV file in the Memory Card the data log
data that registers changes to the contents of an address, or saves
in the Memory Card as a CSV file.
Initializes or saves in a CSV file in the Memory Card the operation
log data, such as that for functional object operations and screen
switching.
Initializes or saves in a CSV file in the Memory Card the error log
data that is generated by macro errors.
The language to display system menus, input keypads, error
messages, etc., can be set to Japanese, English, Italian, Spanish,
French, German, or Chinese (traditional or simplified).
The Memory Card in the PT can be removed.
Initializes the Internal Holding Bit/Word Memories.
Page
P. 6-12
P. 6-13
P. 6-15
P. 6-16
P. 6-18
P. 6-19
P. 6-20
P. 6-21
2. PT Settings Tab
Item
Start-up Waiting Time
Screen Saver
Screen Saver Start-up
Time
Key Press Sound
Buzzer Sound
Backlight
Backlight Brightness
(NS5-SQ1, NS5-TQ1,
NS8, NS10, NS12, and
NS15)
External brightness
adjustment (NS15 only)
(This applies to lot
numbers 30114 and
earlier.)
Calendar Check
Printer Type
Mode
Orientation
Changing Value in Device
Monitor Setting
Contrast (NS5-SQ/MQ
only)
Function
Sets the system startup waiting time. Communications are not
performed during this specified time when the power is turned ON
or the PT is reset. The default is 0 s.
Sets the screen saver to ON or OFF. The default setting is OFF.
Sets the amount of time after which the screen saver is started.
The default setting is 15 min.
If the screen saver start-up time is indirectly specified, the address
of the allocation destination will be displayed.
Sets whether a sound will be heard when a touch switch is
pressed. The default setting is ON.
Sets whether a buzzer will be heard when a command from the
host is received or an error occurs. The default setting is ERR ON.
Sets the backlight brightness to one of three levels. The brightness
cannot be adjusted much.
The default setting is High.
The brightness of the backlight can be adjusted to one of three or
one of 32 levels. The default is the highest level for 3-level
adjustment. With the 32-level adjustment, the brightness can be
adjusted to a lower level than the low level of 3-level adjustment.
Enables the brightness of NS-series PT panel backlighting to be
adjusted externally. It allows panel brightness to be set lower than
the Low selection in the backlight brightness settings.
Displays and sets the date and time for the internal clock.
Sets the control method for the printer connected to the PT.
Sets the printing method for the printer connected to the PT.
Sets the paper orientation for the printer connected to the PT.
Selects whether to set or just monitor device monitor values in the
functions for Registered Monitor and 6-3-9 Switch Box.
Adjusts the contrast for the screen. (This applies to lot number
2110 or earlier for the NS5-SQ.)
Page
P. 6-26
P. 6-27
P. 6-27
P. 6-28
P. 6-28
P. 6-29
P. 6-29
P. 6-29
P. 6-31
P. 6-32
P. 6-32
P. 6-33
P. 6-33
P. 6-33
6-5
6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu
CJK Han Unification
Priority
The CJK Han unification setting is used to select what character
P. 6-34
style (traditional Chinese, simplified Chinese, or Japanese) will be
given priority for display.
Alarm Monitor Registration Specifies the method for performing monitor registration of alarms P. 6-34
Method
and events.
Starting Ladder Monitor
Specifies whether to start the ladder monitor when an alarm/event P. 6-35
from Alarm/Event
summary or history record is pressed.
Summary and History
(NS15/NS12/10/8 only)
Tag Update Notification
Specifies whether to display a confirmation message before
P. 6-35
Message Setting
starting tag verification when tags are verified while the NS-series
PT is operating.
Time to Switch to System Sets the time required to switch to the System Menu when two of P. 6-35
Menu (NS12, NS10, NS8, the four screen corners are pressed. The time to switch to the
or NS5)
System Menu can be set to between 0 and 5 s.
Double-touch interval
With the NS15, one corner of the screen must be touched twice in P. 6-36
(NS15 only)
a row to move to the System Menu. The interval between the
touches can be set.
Analog RGB Output
Sets whether to use the analog RGB output. The default setting is P. 6-36
(NS15 only)
Disable.
3. Project Tab
Item
Project Title
Number of Labels
Initial Screen
Function
Displays the project title.
Displays the number of corresponding labels.
Sets and displays the screen numbers first displayed after the
power is turned ON.
Initial Label
Sets and displays the label number shown on the screen after the
power is turned ON.
Barcode input when using Disables data input from barcodes when the keypad is being used.
keypad
Alarm/Event Recording
Displays the method for recording the alarm/event histories.
Method
Data Log Recording
Displays the method for recording the data log.
Method
Operation Log Recording Displays the method for recording the operation log.
Method
Error Log Recording
Displays the method for recording the error log.
Method
System Memory ($SB)
Displays the allocated addresses of the system bit memory ($SB).
System Memory ($SW)
Displays the allocated address of the system word memory ($SW).
Page
P. 6-37
P. 6-38
P. 6-38
P. 6-38
P. 6-38
P. 6-38
P. 6-39
P. 6-39
P. 6-39
P. 6-39
P. 6-39
4. Password Tab
Item
Function
Level 1
Changes the level 1 password.
Level 2
Changes the level 2 password.
Level 3
Changes the level 3 password.
Level 4
Changes the level 4 password.
Level 5
Changes the level 5 password.
Password mode
Selects the password function (including passwords with levels).
Time Out
Specifies whether user authentication is automatically canceled
after a set time has elapsed.
Timeout (min)
Sets the timeout time.
Switch Screen when
Specifies whether the screen is switched automatically when
canceling the authentication authentication is canceled.
Switch Screen No.
Sets the screen number that is displayed at when authentication
is canceled.
6-6
Page
P. 6-40
P. 6-40
P. 6-40
P. 6-40
P. 6-40
P. 6-41
P. 6-41
P. 6-41
P. 6-41
P. 6-41
6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu
5. Comm Tab
Item
Comms. Auto-return
Timeout interval
Retry Counts
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
Expansion Interface
Ethernet
Controller Link
Function
Selects whether automatic recovery is used when a
communications error occurs.
Sets and displays the timeout monitor time.
Sets and displays the number of communications retries.
Sets and displays whether serial port A is used, the
communications method, and other details.
Sets and displays whether serial port B is used, the
communications method, and other details.
Sets and displays the connector used by serial port B (NS5 only).
Sets and displays whether Ethernet is used and communications
details.
Sets and displays whether Controller Link is used and
communications details.
Page
P. 6-43
Function
Sets the screen number that is displayed as a sample.
Displays the communications addresses set for the sample
display.
Page
P. 6-52
P. 6-52
Function
Displays the alarm history screen.
Displays the screen for recording the operation log.
Displays the screen for recording the error log.
Displays the device monitor screen and communications test
screen. This function also starts external applications, lists USB
devices, performs Video Configuration, displays capture data or
PLC data trace data.
Displays the version display screen.
Page
P. 6-54
P. 6-55
P. 6-56
P. 6-57
to
P. 6-63
Function
Checks the LCD.
Checks the touch switches.
Calibrates the touch positions.
Page
P. 6-71
P. 6-72
P. 6-72
P. 6-43
P. 6-43
P. 6-43
P. 6-43
P. 6-43
P. 6-46
P. 6-47
6. Data Check Tab
Item
Screen Number
Show Address
7. Special Screen Tab
Item
Alarm History
Operation Log
Error Log
Special Functions
System Version
P. 6-64
8. Hardware Check Tab
Item
LCD Check
Touch Switch Check
Touch panel Calibration
(NS15 Only)
6-7
6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu
6-1-4
Using the System Menu
Information on using the menus, such as displaying the System Menu, and selecting menu
items, is provided here.
Reference The system settings set in the project data are given priority over those set in the System
Menu.
z Displaying the System Menu
The System Menu can be displayed by using any of the following methods.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously (NS12/10/8/5 only).
Press one of the four corners of the touch panel twice in a row (NS15 only).
Press the command button in the System Menu display.
Press a command button set to switch the screen to the system menu.
Specify screen number 4002 BCD (FA2 binary) and switch the screen.
Press or change the value of a Multifunction Object set to display the System Menu.
1. Pressing the Corners of the Touch Panel (NS12/10/8/5)
The System Menu can be displayed by pressing two of the four corners of the PT touch
panel simultaneously, as shown in the following diagram.
When pressing the corners of the touch panel, however, first press a corner that does not
have a functional object displayed. If the position of a functional object is pressed, its function
will be performed. If the command button for switching screens is kept pressed after the
screen has been switched, it will be detected as if the button has been released.
The second corner pressed can be any of the other three corners. The System Menu will be
6-8
6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu
displayed even if functional objects are displayed.
Reference The time required to switch to the System Menu can be set in the Time to keep pressing
2 corners on the screen [sec] for Entering System Menu Field on the PT Settings Tab
Page in the System Menu.
2. Press one of the four corners of the touch panel twice in a row (NS15 only).
Press one corner
twice in a row.
Make sure you press a corner where no functional object is displayed. If there is a functional
object at the corner you press, the function of the functional object will be executed.
Reference The touch interval (i.e., speed) for pressing one of the four corners of the touch panel
twice in a row can be adjusted using the double-touch interval setting on the PT Tab
Page in the System Menu.
3. Pressing the Command Button in the System Menu
While creating screens, if a command button for displaying the System Menu is created in
the screen, the System Menu can be displayed by pressing this command button.
4. Pressing Command Buttons to Switch Screens
The Display System Menu function of command buttons includes an option to display the
Initialize Tab (the first screen of the System Menu). Press a command button for which this
option has been set.
Alternatively, the Screen Switch command button functions include a Indirect Specification of
Screen No. function. Store the BCD value 4002 (binary FA2) in the communications address
for indirect specification and press the command button.
Refer to 2-9 Buttons in the Programming Manual for information on command buttons.
5. Storing 4002 in $SW0 (in System Memory)
A BCD value of 4002 (binary FA2) can be stored in $SW0 (in System Memory). Refer to 2-4
System Memory in the NS Series Programming Manual for information on the system
memory.
6. Press a Multifunction Object to Display the System Menu
Press the Switch Screen Button of Multifunction Object and set it to Display System Menu System Menu Top Page [Initialize Tab]. Then touch or change the value of this Multifunction
Object to display the System Menu.
6-9
6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu
z Selecting Menu Items
Items in the System Menu can be displayed by simply pressing the tab of the menu item to
be displayed.
Example: Press the Hardware Check Tab in the System Menu to display the Hardware
Check Screen.
z Switching to RUN Status from the System Menu
Press the Exit Button to return to RUN mode.
6-10
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the
Memory Card
The Initialize Tab is used to initialize or save the PT data and specify the system language.
Use these function whenever necessary.
• Memory Card (remove)
• Alarm/event history (initialize, save)
• Data log (initialize, save)
• Operation log initialization (initialize, save)
• Error log (initialize, save)
• Internal Holding Memories ($HB/$HW) (initialize)
• Screen data area (format)
NS15 Data Initialize Screen
NS12 Data Initialize Screen
6-11
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card
NS10/NS8 Data Initialize Screen
NS5 Data Initialize Screen
Page 1
6-2-1
Page 2
Screen Data Area Format
This function formats the PT screen data. Screen data must be formatted if it is corrupted
and cannot start up properly. The data recorded for the operation log, alarm history, data log,
and error log is not initialized when screen data is formatted.
Precautions
for Safe Use
6-12
Before formatting screen data, check that the screen data has been backed up
from the CX-Designer.
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card
Format the screen data by using operations from the Initialize Data Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
1.
Press the Screen Data Area Button.
A confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to format the data. Press the
No Button to cancel the initialize function.
2.
When the PT has completed formatting screen data, a dialog box will be displayed indicating
that the screen data has finished being formatted.
3.
An error message will be displayed if the System Menu is closed while screen data is being
formatted. Always transfer the screen data from the CX-Designer or Memory Card after
formatting.
Reference
6-2-2
• The PT must be restarted after screen data has been transferred.
Initializing or Saving the Alarm/Event History
This function initializes or saves the alarm/event histories saved in the PT.
Use this function when screen data has been changed, for initializing history data, or for
saving history data in the Memory Card as a CSV file.
While the PT is running, the alarm/event histories continually check the status of bits
registered as alarms/events and record the date, time, and number of times the bits turned
ON/OFF.
Up to 1,024 alarms/events can be recorded.
Reference
• The alarm/event histories can also be initialized by turning ON $SB32 in system
memory from the host.
• The alarm/event histories will be deleted when project data or system programs are
downloaded.
• The alarm/event histories can also be saved by turning ON $SB33 in system memory
from the host. Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the NS Series Programming Manual for
details.
6-13
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card
Initialize or save alarm/event histories by using operations from the Initialize Tab Page in the
System Menu, as follows:
Initializing Alarm/Event Histories
1.
Press the Initialize Button.
A confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to initialize the data. Press the
No Button to cancel the initialize function.
2.
When the PT has completed initializing the alarm/event histories, a dialog box will be displayed
indicating that the alarm/event histories have finished being initialized.
Saving Alarm/Event Histories
1. Press the Save Button. The Save Button will be lit yellow while data is being saved.
2. When the PT has completed saving the alarm/event histories, the Save Button will return
to its normal color.
A dialog box will be displayed indicating that the save has been finished.
6-14
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card
6-2-3
Initializing and Saving Data Log
This function initializes or saves the data log saved in the PT.
Use this function when screen data has been changed, or for initializing history data. The
data log is used to record changes over time to the contents of an address that is registered
in the log. Up to 50,000 events can be recorded.
Reference
• The data log for the specified group can be initialized by setting the group number in
$SW37 and turning ON $SB35 in the system memory from the host. The data logs for
all groups can be initialized by setting $SW37 to 0.
• The data log will be deleted when project data or system programs are downloaded.
• The data log for the specified group can be saved by setting the group number in
$SW37 and turning ON $SB36 in the system memory from the host. The data logs for
all groups can be saved by setting $SW37 to 0.
Initialize or save the data log by using operations from the Initialize Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
Initializing the Data Log
1. Press the Initialize Button.
A confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to initialize the data. Press the No
Button to cancel the initialize function.
2. When the PT has completed initializing the data log, a dialog box will be displayed indicating that
the data log has finished being initialized.
Saving the Data Log
1. Press the Save Button. The Save Button will be lit yellow while data is being saved.
2. When the PT has completed saving the data log, the Save Button will return to its normal
color. A dialog box will be displayed indicating that the save has been finished.
6-15
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card
6-2-4
Initializing and Saving the Operation Log
This function initializes or saves the operation log saved in the PT.
Up to 1,024 operations can be recorded in order of occurrence.
Use this function when screen data has been changed, for initializing log data, or for saving
log data as a CSV file in the Memory Card.
The operation log is used to record the number of times the following operations are
performed and the order in which they occur.
• Functional object operation history
• Screen display history
• Macro execution history
• Communications address (bit) value change history
Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the PT Programming Manual for details.
Reference • The functional objects that can be recorded are ON/OFF buttons, word buttons,
Numeral Display & Input, String Display & Input, thumbwheel switches, data block
tables, and Multifunction Objects.
• The following methods can also be used to initialize operation log data with an NSseries PT.
• Turn ON $SB37 in system memory from the host.
• Execute a Multifunction Object set to initialize the operation log.
• For details on how to execute Multifunction Objects that have the operation log
data initialization function set, refer to the NS-series PT Programming Manual.
• The operation log will be deleted when project data or system programs are
downloaded.
• The following methods can be used to save operation log data with an NS-series PT.
• Press the Operation Log (Sort by Occurrence) Button or Operation Log (Sort
by Frequency) Button in the System Menu.
• Turn ON $SB38 in system memory from the host.
• For details on how to execute Multifunction Objects that have the operation log
data initialization function set, refer to the NS-series PT Programming Manual.
Initialize or save the operation log by using operations from the Initialize Tab Page in the
System Menu, as follows:
6-16
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card
Initializing the Operation Log
1.
Press the Initialize Button.
A confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to initialize the data. Press the
No Button to cancel the initialize function.
2.
When the PT has completed initializing the operation log, a dialog box will be displayed
indicating that the operation log has finished being initialized.
Saving the Operation Log
1. Press the Save Button. The Save Button will be lit yellow while data is being saved.
2. When the PT has completed saving the operation log, the Save Button will return to its
normal color.
A dialog box will be displayed indicating that the save has been finished.
Reference
• When saving the operation log, the operation log must be controlled from the system
memory. For details on controlling the operation log, refer to 2-4 System Memory in the
PT Programming Manual.
6-17
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card
6-2-5
Initializing and Saving the Error Log
This function initializes the macro error history saved in the PT or saves the history in the
Memory Card.
Up to 100 errors can be recorded in the error log. The number of errors that can be recorded,
however, also depends on the free space in the memory.
The error log records the errors that occur when the macro function is executed. Initialize or
save the error history by using operations from the Initialize Tab Page in the System Menu,
as follows:
Initializing the Error Log
1. Press the Initialize Button.
A confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to initialize the data. Press the
No Button to cancel the initialize function.
2. When the PT has completed initializing the error log, a dialog box will be displayed indicating that
the error log has finished being initialized.
Saving the Error Log
1. Press the Save Button. The Save Button will be lit yellow while data is being saved.
2. When the PT has completed saving the error log, the Save Button will return to its
normal color.
A dialog box will be displayed indicating that the save has been finished.
Reference
• The error log is deleted when project data or system programs are downloaded.
• The error log can also be initialized by turning ON $SB42 in system memory from the
host, and can be saved by turning ON $SB43 in system memory from the host. Refer
to 2-4 System Memory in the PT Programming Manual for details.
6-18
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card
6-2-6
Language Selection
The system language can be set to Japanese, English, Italian, Spanish, French, German, or
Chinese (traditional or simplified). The system language will be used on the System Menu,
input keypads, message dialog boxes, etc, on the PT.
The system language is set from the Initialize Tab Page in the System Menu Window using
the following procedure.
1. Select the system language in the Select Language Area.
2. After specifying the language, click the Write Button. The system language will be
switched after the new setting has been saved.
Reference
If ASCII codes are set as the character display format for String Display & INPUT, list
display, or data block tables (character fields), the following character codes will be used
depending on the system language that is set.
System Language
Character display
Japanese
Shift-JIS code
Chinese (traditional
and simplified)
English and other
languages
GB2312 code
Latin 1code
Display example
(character code B5)
The corresponding
character does not
exist, so nothing is
displayed.
µ
The above codes will also be used when indirect specifications are made for label strings
for label objects.
6-19
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card
6-2-7
Removing the Memory Card
The Memory Card can be removed from the PT while the PT is ON. Use the following
procedure from the Initialize Tab Page of the System Menu to remove the Memory Card.
1. Press the Remove Button next to Memory Card.
2. The following dialog box will be displayed when it is safe to remove the Memory Card.
Press the OK Button.
3. Confirm that it is safe to remove the Memory Card, and remove it from the PT.
Precautions
for Safe Use
When the Memory Card is removed, reinsert the Memory Card into the PT to
use it again. Once a Memory Card is removed, it must be reinserted before the
PT can access it.
Reference The Memory Card in the PT can be removed if the system memory bit $SB50 turns ON
(indicating that the Memory Card is ready to be removed) when the Host turns ON
system memory bit $SB49. Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the NS Series Programming
Manual for details.
6-20
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card
6-2-8
Initializing Internal Holding Memories ($HB/$HW)
The following procedure is used to initialize the Internal Holding Memories in the PT ($HB0
to $HB8191 and $HW0 to $HW8191). Use the following procedure from the Initialize Tab
Page of the System Menu to initialize the Internal Holding Memories.
1. Press the Initialize Button for the Internal Holding Memories ($HB/$HW). The following
confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to initialize.
2. When Internal Holding Memory ($HB/$HW) initialization has been completed, the
following notification message will be displayed. Press the OK Button.
Reference The NS-series PT’s internal holding memory ($HB/$HW) can be initialized by turning
ON the system memory bit $SB34 from the host. Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the NS
Series Programming Manual for details.
6-21
6-3 PT Settings
6-3 PT Settings
The PT Tab Page is used to set the following functions.
6-3-1 Start-Up Wait Time
6-3-2 Screen Saver
6-3-3 Key Press Sound
6-3-4 Buzzer Sound
6-3-5 Backlight Brightness
6-3-6 Calendar Check
6-3-7 Printer Type
6-3-8 Printing Mode
6-3-9 Orientation
6-3-10 Changing Values in Device Monitor Setting
6-3-11 Contrast (NS5-SQ@@/NS5-MQ@@ Only)
6-3-12 CJK Han Unification Priority
6-3-13 Alarm Monitor Registration Procedure
6-3-14 Starting the Ladder Monitor from Alarm/Event Summary and History (NS15/12/10/8
Only)
6-3-15 Setting the Tag Update Notification Message
6-3-16 Time to Switch to System Menu (NS12, NS10, NS8, or NS5)
6-3-17 Double-touch Interval (NS15 Only)
6-3-18 Analog RGB Output (NS15 only)
6-22
6-3 PT Settings
PT Tab Page for the NS12
(Page 1) Backlight Brightness Adjustment to
Three Levels
(Page 2)
(Page 1) Backlight Brightness Adjustment to
32 Levels
(Page 3)
(Page 4)
6-23
6-3 PT Settings
PT Tab Page for the NS10 and NS8
(Page 1) Backlight Brightness Adjustment to
Three Levels
(Page 2)
(Page 4)
6-24
(Page 1) Backlight Brightness Adjustment to
32 Levels
(Page 3)
6-3 PT Settings
PT Tab Page for the NS5
(Page 1)
(Page 2 with Backlight Brightness
Adjustment to 32 Levels)
(Page 4)
(Page 2) Backlight Brightness Adjustment to
Three Levels
(Page 3)
(Page 5)
(Page 6)
6-25
6-3 PT Settings
PT Tab Page for the NS15
(Page 1) Backlight Brightness Adjustment to
Three Levels
(Page 1) Backlight Brightness Adjustment to
32 Levels
(Page 2)
6-3-1
Start-up Wait Time
The start-up wait time refers to the waiting time before the PT starts communicating with the
host after the PT power is turned ON or the PT is reset Set the system startup waiting time
when the host requires time before it starts running.
The setting range is between 0 and 10 s and the default is 0 s.
Set the system startup waiting time by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
1. Set the waiting time in the Start-up Wait Time field in second units.
Input the value in the dialog box that is displayed by pressing the setting input column.
2. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
6-26
6-3 PT Settings
Reference •
Nothing is displayed during the system startup waiting time.
• The system startup waiting time is calculated from when initialization finishes.
Therefore, if the startup waiting time is set to 0 s, the PT will not start actual
communications with the host immediately after the power is turned ON.
6-3-2
Screen Saver
To extend the life of the backlight, the screen saver function turns OFF the screen display
when operations are not performed for a fixed period of time.
The default setting is for no screen saver.
The time before the screen saver function is activated can be set in one-minute units
between 1 and 255 minutes. The default setting is 15 min.
Set the screen saver movement by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
1. Select either OFF or Display Erased for the screen saver.
2. If Display Erased is selected, set the screen saver startup time.
Input the value in the dialog box that is displayed by pressing the setting input column.
3. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
If the screen saver start-up time is set to Indirect Specification with the CX-Designer, the
address of the allocation destination will be displayed. The address of the allocation
destination will be displayed only. It cannot be changed.
Reference Pressing any part of the touch panel will cancel the screen saver and display the
previously displayed screen. When canceling the screen saver, If the part of the touch
panel corresponds to the input for a functional object, the screen saver will be cancelled
only. The input for the functional object will not be processed.
6-27
6-3 PT Settings
6-3-3
Key Press Sound
This function sets whether an input sound is heard when the touch switches that allow input
functions for the PT are pressed.
ON: Input sound is heard when the touch switches that allow input functions for the
PT are pressed.
OFF: Input sound is not heard when the touch switches that allow input functions for
the PT are pressed.
The default setting is ON.
1. Select either ON or OFF for the touch switch input sound.
3. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
6-3-4
Buzzer Sound
The buzzer is used at times such as when a command from the host is received or an error
occurs. This function is set to ON or OFF in the System Menu.
ON:
Buzzer turns ON when a command is received from the host or an error
occurs.
OFF:
Buzzer is OFF.
ERR ON: Buzzer turns ON when an error occurs only.
The default setting is ERR ON.
Reference • Other commands and settings associated with the buzzer exist, but the settings here
have the highest priority.
• When the buzzer is set to ON or ERR ON, the buzzer will be heard when messages
are displayed with a cross (X) or exclamation mark (!) icon.
• Refer to 2-20 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the buzzer
function.
Set the buzzer to ON/OFF by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System Menu,
as follows:
1. Select either ON, OFF, or ERR ON for the buzzer setting.
4. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
6-28
6-3 PT Settings
6-3-5
Backlight Brightness
NS15
This function sets the backlight brightness.
The brightness of the backlight can be set to any of three levels or to an external adjustment.
The default setting is for High.
Perform the following procedure from the PT Operation Tab Page of the System Menu to set
the brightness of the backlight.
1. Select one of the three levels, High, Middle, or Low, or select External for the backlight
brightness.
2. Press the Write Button. The setting will be saved.
3. If External is set, the following dialog box will be displayed to confirm writing the PT
settings when the Write Button is pressed.
Press the Yes Button to write the PT settings.
Press the No Button to cancel writing the PT settings.
4. The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed if the Yes Button is pressed.
Press the OK Button to write the PT settings, including the backlight
brightness.
If 15 s elapses without the OK Button being pressed or the Close Button is
pressed, the backlight brightness and other PT settings will not be written.
If External is selected, the external brightness adjustment of the NS15 can
be set. Refer to 3-10 External Brightness Adjustment for information on the
external brightness adjustment connector.
6-29
6-3 PT Settings
Reference • The backlight brightness cannot be changed using $SB6 to $SB8 in system memory if
External is set for the backlight brightness. To change the backlight brightness by using
$SB6 to $SB8, turn OFF external brightness adjustment by selecting High, Middle, or
Low.
• Steps 3 and 4, above, are required only if External is set.
NS15 PTs with Lot Number 31114 or Later
This function sets the backlight brightness.
The brightness can be set to one of three levels or one of 32 levels.
The default is the highest level for 3-level adjustment.
The brightness of the RUN indicator will change according to the brightness setting of the
backlight.
Set the brightness of the backlight by using operations from the PT Settings Tab Page in the
System Menu, as follows:
1. Select one of the three backlight brightness levels, high, middle, or low, or select setting to one of
32 levels.
2. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
3. If setting to one of 32 levels is selected, the following setting screen will appear.
Brightness Setting Button Functions
Decreases the brightness by 5 levels.
Increases the brightness by 5 levels.
Decreases the brightness by 1 level.
Increases the brightness by 1 level.
4. The backlight brightness will change when any of the brightness setting buttons is pressed.
If the Write Button is not pressed and no other operation is performed for 30 seconds after setting
the brightness, the brightness setting will return to the original setting, and the PT settings, including
the backlight brightness setting, will not be written.
5. After setting, press the Write Button within 30 seconds to save the setting.
Precautions
for Safe Use
6-30
If the brightness of the backlight is reduced, the display and RUN indicator may
be very dark. Do not reduce the brightness of the backlight so far that the
display and RUN indicator cannot be seen.
6-3 PT Settings
NS12, NS10, NS8, or NS5
This function sets the backlight brightness to one of three levels.
The default setting is high.
Set the brightness of the backlight by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
1. Select one of the three backlight brightness levels to set to high, middle, or low.
2. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
NS5-SQ1/-TQ1 PTs with Lot Number 15Z0 or Later, NS8 PTs with Lot
Number 28X1 or Later, NS10 PTs with Lot Number 11Y1 or Later, and
NS12 PTs with Lot Number 14Z1 or Later
This function sets the backlight brightness.
The brightness can be set to one of three levels or one of 32 levels.
The default is the highest level for 3-level adjustment.
The brightness of the RUN indicator will change according to the brightness setting of the
backlight.
Set the brightness of the backlight by using operations from the PT Settings Tab Page in the
System Menu, as follows:
1. Select one of the three backlight brightness levels, high, middle, or low, or select setting to one of
32 levels.
2. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
3. If setting to one of 32 levels is selected, the following setting screen will appear.
Brightness Setting Button Functions
Decreases the brightness by 5 levels.
Increases the brightness by 5 levels.
Decreases the brightness by 1 level.
Increases the brightness by 1 level.
4. The backlight brightness will change when any of the brightness setting buttons is pressed.
If the Write Button is not pressed and no other operation is performed for 30 seconds after setting
the brightness, the brightness setting will return to the original setting, and the PT settings, including
the backlight brightness setting, will not be written.
5. After setting, press the Write Button within 30 seconds to save the setting.
Precautions
for Safe Use
If the brightness of the backlight is reduced, the display and RUN indicator may
be very dark. Do not reduce the brightness of the backlight so far that the
display and RUN indicator cannot be seen.
6-31
6-3 PT Settings
6-3-6
Calendar Check
This function displays the time and date of the PT’s internal system clock.
The factory settings for the date and time are not correct.
Set and display the date and time by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
1. The currently set date and time will be displayed in the Date and Time Setting field.
2. To change the date/time, set the date/time in the dialog box that is displayed by pressing the date
and time field.
• Use the following input format to set the date:
yyyy.mm.dd (yyyy: year, mm: month, dd: day)
Set the year using four digits.
Example: Set March 15, 2002 as 2002.3.15. (Adding 0 prefix to single-digit settings is not required.)
• Use the following input format to set the time.
hh.mm.ss (hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second)
Set the year using the 24-hour clock.
Example: Set 06:01:01 p.m. as 18.1.1. (Adding 0 prefix to single-digit settings is not required.)
5. Press the Enter Button to enable the settings.
6-32
6-3 PT Settings
6-3-7
Printer Type
If there is a printer connected to the PT, select the printer’s control method.
Setting item
ESC/P Raster
BJ Raster
PictBridge
Details
Sets the printer’s control method to ESC/P Raster. Use this setting if
mainly using Epson printers.
Sets the printer’s control method to BJ Raster. Use this setting if
mainly using Canon printers.
Selected to use a PicBridge-compatible printer.
1. Select either ESC/P Raster, BJ Raster, or PictBridge in Print Control.
2. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
Reference • If the print control method is set to PictBridge for system version 8.3 or lower, the print
type and orientation will be automatically set as follows and cannot be changed:
Print type: Color Print
Orientation: Landscape
The orientation, however, can be changed in the printer settings with some printers.
• The print control method is set to PictBridge and cannot be changed for the NS5@Q1@, NSJ5-@Q1@, NSH5-SQ@10.
6-3-8
Printing Mode
Select the printing method of the printer that will be connected to the NS-series PT.
Setting item
Details
Color Print
Prints in color.
Monochrome Print (See note 1.)
Prints in monochrome.
Monochrome Print (Inverse) (See Prints in inverted monochrome.
note 1.)
Note 1: If PictBridge is selected, system version 8.4 or higher is required to change these settings.
6-33
6-3 PT Settings
1. Select Color Print, Monochrome Print, or Monochrome Print (Inverse) in Print Type.
2. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
6-3-9
Orientation
Select the printing orientation of the printer that will be connected to the NS-series PT.
1. Select either Portrait or Landscape in Orientation.
Portrait (See note 1.): Prints with the longer page measurement as the height (factory
default).
Landscape: Prints with the shorter page measurement as the height.
2. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
Note 1: If PictBridge is selected, system version 8.4 or higher is required to change these settings.
6-3-10 Changing Values in Device Monitor Setting
This setting enables using the registered monitor and switch box functions of the device
monitor only for monitoring by prohibiting address changes while monitoring.
Disable Button: Prohibits changing monitor values
Enable Button: Enables changing monitor values (factory default)
This setting can also be made with the CX-Designer on the PT Operation Tab Page of the
System Settings.
6-3-11 Contrast (NS5-SQ@@/NS5-MQ@@ Only)
This function adjusts the screen contrast. Contrast can be adjusted in 100 degrees.
Adjust the contrast by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System Menu, as
follows:
6-34
6-3 PT Settings
1. Change the contrast setting using the left and right arrow buttons (<<, <, >, >>) for contrast
adjustment. The contrast will change as soon as the buttons are pressed.
<< Button: Decreases the contrast by ten degrees.
< Button: Decreases the contrast by one degree.
> Button: Increases the contrast by one degree.
>> Button: Increases the contrast by ten degrees.
Check the contrast from the sample display of eight shades above the arrow buttons.
Reference The contrast cannot be adjusted on NS5-SQ@@-V2 PTs with lot number 2110 (January 21,
2010) or later. (The contrast is adjusted to the optimum value in advance.)
Refer to NS-series PT Lot Numbers on page A-8 for information on lot numbers.
6-3-12 CJK Han Unification Priority
The CJK Han unification setting is used to select what character style (traditional Chinese,
simplified Chinese, or Japanese) will be given priority for display.
If Japanese or Chinese is used, the displayed character form will differ even if the character
code is the same. In this case, use the CJK Han unification priority setting to select what
character style will be given priority for display. Use the following procedure starting from the
PT Settings Tab in the System Menu to select the priority.
1. In the CJK Priority Area, select from JÆ C (Simplified) Æ C (Traditional), C (Simplified)
Æ C (Traditional) Æ J, or C (Traditional) Æ C (Simplified) Æ J.
“J” indicates Japanese and “C” indicates Chinese.
2. After completing the setting, press the Write Button. The setting will be saved.
6-3-13 Alarm Monitor Registration Procedure
Set the method for performing monitor registration of alarms and events.
Normally, the method is set to When switching screens.
If multiple alarms or events are registered, the screen-switching speed may increase if the At
startup Option is selected. If there is no difference, set the method to When switching
screens.
Set the alarm monitor registration method by performing the following operation from the PT
Tab Page in the System Menu.
1.
Set either At startup or When switching screens for the alarm monitor registration
method.
2. After completing the setting, press the Write Button. The setting will be saved.
6-35
6-3 PT Settings
6-3-14 Starting the Ladder Monitor from Alarm/Event Summary and
History (NS15/12/10/8 Only)
You can start the Ladder Monitor if an alarm or event is selected in the Alarm/Event
Summary and History.
If ON is selected, a message to confirm whether to start the Ladder Monitor will be displayed
when an alarm or event is selected in the Alarm/Event Summary and History.
1. Select either ON or OFF for starting Ladder Monitor from alarm/event summary and
history.
2. After completing the setting, press the Write Button. The setting will be saved.
Reference • Refer to the NS-series PT Programming Manual for information on the alarm/event
summary and history.
• With Ladder Monitor version 3.0 or higher, the system will automatically search for the
communications address of the selected alarm or event when the Ladder Monitor
starts.
6-3-15 Setting the Tag Update Notification Message
If tags are used by projects in the NS-series PT, tags will be automatically verified when
ladder data is downloaded to the host. Set whether to display a confirmation message
before the system starts to verify the tags.
Make the setting on the PT Operation Tab Page in the System Menu.
1. Select either Display or Hide for the tag update notification message setting.
Reference • Refer to 6-11 Verifying Tags for information on verifying tags.
• Tags can be used when connected using EtherNet/IP to a CPU Unit with a built-in
EtherNet/IP port.
6-3-16 Time to Switch to System Menu (NS12, NS10, NS8, or NS5)
With a NS12, NS10, NS8, or NS5 PT, the time required to switch to the System Menu when
two of the four screen corners are pressed can be set. A longer time can be set to help
prevent unintentional access to the System Menu.
The time to switch to the System Menu can be set to between 0 and 5 s.
Set the time using the following procedure from the PT Settings Tab Page in the System
Menu:
6-36
6-3 PT Settings
1. Set the time in seconds in the Time to keep pressing 2 corners on the screen [sec] for
Entering System Menu Field. Press the field and enter the time from the dialog box that
is displayed.
2. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
6-3-17 Double-touch Interval (NS15 Only)
With the NS15, one corner of the screen must be touched twice in a row to move to the
System Menu. The interval between the touches is called the double-touch interval and it can
be set to between 500 and 1,500 ms. The default setting is 1,000 ms. The display will
change to the System Menu if any corner of the screen is pressed twice within this interval. If
switching to the System Menu is difficult, increase the interval.
Perform the following procedure from the PT Operation Tab Page of the System Menu.
1. Set the desired value for the double-touch interval in milliseconds. An input dialog box
will be displayed when the input field for the setting is touched.
2. Press the Write Button. The setting will be saved.
6-3-18 Analog RGB Output (NS15 only)
Set whether to use the analog RGB output. The default setting is Disable. Use the following
procedure from the PT Settings Tab Page of the System Menu to set the analog RGB output.
1. Set the analog RGB output to either Enable or Disable.
2. Press the Write Button to save the setting.
Precautions
for Correct Use
• Even when the analog RGB output is set to Use, the analog RGB output will
stop if a screen with an analog RGB video display object is displayed on the
PT.
• When using the analog RGB output, if a screen with an object that switches
display colors is displayed on the PT, the image on the screen may be
distorted.
6-37
6-4 Project Settings
6-4 Project Settings
The Project Tab Page is used to display and set the following functions.
• Project title
• Number of labels
• Initial screen
• Initial label
• Barcode input when using keypad:
This setting is used to disable data input from barcodes when the keypad is being used.
• Alarm/event history recording method:
Method for recording log of generated and deleted alarms/events.
• Data log recording method:
Method for recording log of changes to addresses.
• Operation log recording method:
Method for recording log of functional object operations, screen switching, and macro
executions.
• Error log recording method:
Method for recording log of macro execution errors.
• System memory:
The addresses allocated in system memory will be displayed.
6-4-1
Project Title
This function displays title of projects that are registered in the PT.
The title is read-only and cannot be edited.
6-38
6-4 Project Settings
6-4-2
Number of Labels
Multiple label data can be created in each project. This function displays the number of
labels set for the project that is registered in the PT.
The number of labels is read-only and cannot be edited.
Reference • For details on setting multiple labels for a project, refer to System Settings and Project
Properties in the CX-Designer’s Online Help.
• Refer to Labels in 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions in the Programming
Manual for information on how to set multiple labels for a functional object.
6-4-3
Initial Screen
This function displays and sets the screen number of the screen that is first displayed when
the PT is started.
Display and set the initial screen number by using operations from the Project Tab Page in
the System Menu, as follows:
1. The number of the screen that is displayed when the PT is started is displayed in the initial
screen field.
2. To change the initial screen number, input the value using the tenkey, which is displayed by
pressing the display area.
3. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
Reference The initial screen number can also be set from the CX-Designer.
6-4-4
Initial Label
This function displays and sets the label number that is shown on the screen when the PT is
started.
Reference This initial label number can also be set from the CX-Designer.
6-4-5
Barcode Input When Using Keypad
You can disable data input from barcodes when the keypad is being used.
Reference The setting for data input from barcodes when the keypad is being used can also be
made from the CX-Designer.
6-4-6
Alarm/Event History Recording Method
This function displays the method for recording the alarm/event histories. The alarm/event
history recording method is read-only and cannot be edited.
This alarm/event history recording method is set from the CX-Designer.
If a ring buffer is used, when the specified number of records is exceeded, the oldest data is
deleted and the new data is recorded.
If the ring buffer is not used, the PT stops collecting history data when the specified number
of records has been reached. Initialize the alarm/event histories to reopen the history
records.
Reference Refer to 6-2-2 Initializing or Saving the Alarm/Event History for details on initializing the
alarm/event histories.
6-39
6-4 Project Settings
6-4-7
Data Log Recording Method
This function displays the data log recording method.
The data log recording method is read only and cannot be edited.
The use of a ring buffer for the data log recording method is fixed.
When the specified number of log entries is exceeded, the oldest data is deleted and the
new data is recorded.
Use the CX-Designer to set the number of log entries.
Reference Refer to 6-2-3 Initializing and Saving Data Log in this manual and Data Log Function in
2-20 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the data log.
6-4-8
Operation Log Recording Method
This function displays the method for recording the operation log. The operation log
recording method is read only and cannot be edited. This operation log recording method is
set from the CX-Designer.
If Save in Ring Buffer Format is set, when the specified number of items is exceeded, the
oldest data is deleted and the new data is recorded.
If the log is not saved in ring buffer format, the PT stops collecting log data when the
specified number of items has been reached. Initialize the operation log to reopen the record.
Reference Refer to 6-2-4 Initializing and Saving the Operation Log in this manual and Operation
Log Function in 2-20 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the
operation log.
6-4-9
Error Log Recording Method
This function displays the error log recording method. The error log recording method is read
only and cannot be edited. The use of a ring buffer for the error log recording method is fixed.
When the maximum number of items is exceeded, the oldest data is deleted and the new
data is recorded.
Reference Refer to 6-2-5 Initializing and Saving the Error Log in this manual and Error Log Function
in 2-20 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the error log.
6-4-10 System Memory
The system memory is used to control the PT and exchange information between the host
and the PT, such as notifying the host of PT status. The system memory can be allocated to
host addresses or to PT memory.
Allocating the system memory as host addresses allows operations such as controlling the
PT from the host. The allocated location in the host is displayed in the System Memory and
cannot be edited.
The location where the system bit memory and system word memory is allocated (allocated
host and address) is displayed in the System Bit Memory ($SB) and System Word Memory
($SW).
Reference Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the PT Programming Manual for details on the system
memory.
If the system memory has been set to NT compatibility, allocations for the Control Area,
Notification Area, and Window Control Area will be displayed.
6-40
6-5 Setting Passwords
6-5 Setting Passwords
The NS-series PT’s password function is divided into the following two functions.
• Password Function
Requires a password input before allowing operations on a password-protected
functional object.
• Password with Levels Function
Requires a password for authentication when performing operations on a passwordprotected functional object for the first time. Once authentication has been completed,
operations can be performed on all functional objects of the same or lower password
levels. Operations cannot be performed on functional objects protected with higher-level
passwords.
The passwords are set from the CX-Designer and up to five passwords (5 levels) can be set
for a single project. The passwords can be set and changed from the System Menu.
Reference When Indirect Password Specification is used, these settings can not be changed on the
NS Unit.
6-5-1
Changing the Password
Perform the following procedure from the System Menu to change the password.
1. Select the Password Tab.
2. Select the password to be changed using the Level 1 to Level 5 Buttons.
3. Input the old password and new password in the corresponding fields, and then input the new
password again in the confirmation field. Input the password using the virtual keyboard (text input
dialog box) that is displayed by pressing the input column.
4. After changing the password, press the Write Button to save the setting. Save separately for
each password level that is changed.
6-41
6-5 Setting Passwords
Precautions
for Safe Use
6-5-2
• When changing passwords, do not reset the PT or turn OFF the power until
the write operation has been completed (i.e., the Write Button has returned
to the status before being pressed). If the password is not saved properly,
the screen may malfunction.
• If the password is forgotten, it cannot be checked from the PT. Check the
password using the CX-Designer.
Setting the Password Function
Perform the following procedure from the System Menu to set a password.
1. Select the Password Tab.
6-42
2.
Press the Password mode Button.
3.
After making the required settings, press the Write Button to save the settings.
6-5 Setting Passwords
• Settings for the Password Function
The following table describes the password function’s setting items.
Setting item
Function
Level
Press the OFF (password) or ON (password with levels)
Button to select the function.
OFF
Requires a password input before allowing operations on a
password-protected functional object.
ON
Requires a password input for level authentication. During a
session from authentication to cancellation, the user only
can perform operations on functional objects that are
allowed for the password level that was input at the start of
the session. The user cannot perform operations on
functional objects at higher levels.
Time Out
Click the ON or OFF Button to specify whether
authentication is automatically canceled (timed out) after a
set time has elapsed.
This option can be set when the password with levels
function has been turned ON.
ON
A user is automatically timed out if there are no functional
object operations within the timeout time.
OFF
Authentication is not automatically canceled. To cancel
authentication, press a command button set for
cancellation.
When the Time Out Option is set to ON, this setting
specifies the timeout time in minutes (1 to 60 minutes).
Click the ON or OFF Button to specify whether the screen is
automatically switched to a specified screen when a user
logs out.
This option can be set when the password with levels
function has been turned ON.
The screen is switched to the specified Switch Screen No.
when authentication is canceled.
The screen is not switched when authentication is canceled.
Timeout (min)
Switch Screen when
canceling the authentication
ON
OFF
Switch Screen No.
If switching the screen when authentication is canceled has
been turned ON, the screen is changed to the screen
number set here when authentication is canceled.
Reference The password settings can also be made from the CX-Designer.
Precautions
for Safe Use
• When changing passwords, do not reset the PT or turn OFF the power until
the write operation has been completed (i.e., the Write Button has returned
to the status before being pressed). If the password is not saved properly,
the screen may malfunction.
• If the password is forgotten, it cannot be checked from the PT. Check the
password using the CX-Designer.
6-43
6-6 Communications Settings
6-6 Communications Settings
The methods for setting the communications conditions with the host are described here.
6-6-1
Communications Conditions
Set the communications conditions by using operations from the Comm. Tab Page in the
System Menu, as follows:
After inputting the communications conditions, press the Write Button to save the settings.
Changed settings are enabled after the PT is restarted.
z Communications Conditions Setting Items
The setting items for the communications conditions between the PT and host are as follows:
• Communications Auto-return
Select whether or not to use communications auto-return using the ON and OFF Buttons.
ON:
The PT will automatically return to RUN mode when a communications error
occurs, without displaying an error message dialog box.
OFF:
The PT will stop running when a communications error occurs and an error
message dialog box will be displayed. Press the OK Button in the error message
dialog box to return to RUN mode. The default setting is OFF.
• Time-out Interval
Set the time before a timeout error occurs when a response is not received from the host.
The timeout interval can be set to between 1 and 10 (unit: s). Input the value by using the
tenkey or the Up ( ) and Down ( ) buttons that are displayed by pressing the display area.
The default setting is 3 s.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Set the time-out interval to 3 s min. when using 1:N NT Links. If the time-out
interval is less than 3 s, abnormal communications may occur.
• Retry Counts
Set the number of retries for communications before an error screen will be displayed, when
a communications error occurs while communicating with the host. If communications are
unsuccessful after the number of communications retries specified here have been executed,
6-44
6-6 Communications Settings
processing set for the communications auto return will be executed. The number of retries
can be set to between 0 and 255 times. Input the value by using the tenkey or the Up ( )
and Down ( ) buttons that are displayed by pressing the display area.
The default setting is 5 retries.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Set the retry counts to 5 retries min. when using 1:N NT Links. If less than 5
retries is set, abnormal communications may occur.
• Port Communications Method and Communications Type
Set the communications method for serial ports A and B, for Ethernet and for Controller Link. The
right half of the screen will change according to the settings.
Reference
•
To change the communications method for another port, the Write Button must be pressed before
continuing. The settings will not be saved if the communications method is switched without
pressing the Write Button.
•
For details on Temperature Controller and Memory Link setting methods and other procedures,
refer to the NS Series Host Connection Manual (Cat. No. V085).
•
For details on Host Link setting methods and other procedures, refer to the NS Series Host
Connection Manual (Host Link).
z Supported Communications Method Combinations
It is not possible to connect to a PLC via NT Link (1:N) with both serial ports A and B at the
same time. It is not possible to use a Bar Code Reader with both serial ports A and B at the
same time. It is also not possible to use a modem with both serial ports A and B at the same
time.
Serial ports A and B, Ethernet and Controller Link can be used in any combination with other
communications methods.
Serial ports A and B, Ethernet and Controller Link, however, cannot be all used
simultaneously (except when using a Bar Code Reader).
Reference Serial ports A and B, Ethernet and Controller Link can be set to be used simultaneously,
but proper operations cannot be guaranteed (except when using a Bar Code Reader).
Therefore, do not set all the ports to be used simultaneously.
z Interface Setting (NS5 Only)
A setting in the System Menu for the NS5 enables switching serial port B between using the
expansion interface connector and the serial port B interface connector. Communications will
not be possible with the CX-Designer through the serial port B connector if the expansion
6-45
6-6 Communications Settings
interface is selected.
The use of the expansion interface is for future expansion and cannot yet be used. Always
use the serial port B connector. (The default setting is Disable.)
z Status of the RS-232C/RS-422A Selector DIP Switch (NS15 Only)
A DIP switch can be used on the NS15 to change the communications protocol for serial port
B between RS-232C and RS-422A. Refer to 3-11 RS-232C/RS-422A Selector DIP Switch for
the switch setting procedure. The default setting is for RS-232C.
The current setting of the RS-232C/RS-422A selector DIP switch is displayed on the System
Menu as shown below.
6-6-2
Setting 1:1 NT Link
Select the Comm. Tab from the System Menu, and select NT Link 1:1 (1:1 NT Link) as the
communications method for serial port A or B.
After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.
When 1:1 NT Link is selected, there are no details settings.
6-46
6-6 Communications Settings
6-6-3
Setting High-speed 1:N NT Links (Standard, High-speed)
Select the Comm. Tab from the System Menu, and select NT Link 1:N (1:N NT Link) as the
communications method for serial port A or B.
Press the Detail Button to display the setting items for high-speed 1:N NT Links on the right
side of the screen. Set the unit number and communications speed.
After setting, press the Write Button.
• Communications Conditions for 1:N NT Links
Setting item
Unit number
Communications Speed
Function
Sets the unit number.
Sets the baud Communications speed.
Settings
0 to 7
Standard, high-speed
Reference
• The unit numbers that can be set depend on the type of host used, as follows:
• C200HE(-Z):
Unit numbers 0 to 3 (up to four PTs for each port of the host)
• C200HG(-Z), C200HX(-Z), CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H, CQM1H, CJ1G, and CJ1G/H-H:
Unit numbers 0 to 7 (up to eight PTs for each port of the host)
Refer to 4-2 1:N Host Connection for the host settings.
• If the Detail Button is pressed for the NS15, the display will switch to the Protocol
Setting Dialog Box. Make the settings and press the Write Button. Press the Comm.
Button to return to the Comm Tab Page.
6-6-4
Ethernet and EtherNet/IP Settings
To use Ethernet, select the Comm Tab from the System Menu and press the Enable Button.
The setting items for Ethernet will be displayed on the right side of the screen. Display and
set the network address, node address, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
Display the MAC address and IP address table display.
After setting, press the Write Button.
6-47
6-6 Communications Settings
• Setting Ethernet Communications Conditions
Setting item
Network Add.
Node Add.
IP address
Sub-net
Default gateway
MAC address
Function
Sets the network address used for
Ethernet communications.
Sets the local node address.
Sets the local IP address.
Sets the subnet mask of the local node.
Sets the IP router.
Displays the MAC address (devicespecific information to identify each
device connected to the network.)
LAN SPEED
Selects the method used to set the
Ethernet baud rate.
FTP
Selects whether or not to use the FTP
server.
IP Address: Show Table
Displays the node numbers and IP
addresses of other nodes connected
through Ethernet.
Note: Do not set the following values for the IP address.
Host ID with all bits set to 0 or 1 (e.g., 192.168.21.0).
Net ID with all bits set to 0 or 1 (e.g., 255.255.21.16).
Subnet ID with all bits set to 1 (e.g., 192.168.255.16).
IP addresses that begin with 127 (e.g., 127.35.21.16).
Settings
1 to 127
0 to 254
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
(See note.)
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Read-only.
Automatic switch or fixed
10Base-T
Enable or disable
Node addresses: 1 to 254
IP addresses:
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
• Host Settings
This setting is used to display detailed data for hosts connected using Ethernet or Controller
Link. The host type, network address, and node address for each host can also be changed.
3. Press the ETN/CLK Host Display Button. The registered hosts will be displayed in a list.
6-48
6-6 Communications Settings
4. Select the host by pressing the button to the left of the host name.
5. Press the Detail Button.
6. The settings for the selected host can be changed. The settings depend on the
communications protocol set in the host.
• Using FINS (Ethernet, Controller Link)
The host type, network address, and node address for the selected host can be changed.
Setting item
Host type
Function
Change the host type by pressing the Up (
Buttons.
Network
address
Node address
Set the network address of the host.
Details
SYSMAC-CS/CJ,
SYSMAC-CV,
Trajexia,
SYSMAC-CJ2,
SYSMAC-NJ
1 to 127
Set the node address of the host.
1 to 254
) and Down (
)
• Using EtherNet/IP
The IP address of the selected host can be changed. The host type and route path are
displayed only. They cannot be changed.
6-49
6-6 Communications Settings
Setting item
Host type
IP address
Function
The host type is displayed.
Set the IP address of the host (if IP address is selected as the
method to specify the communications destination.)
Route path
The route path of the host is displayed (if route path is
selected as the method to specify the communications
destination.)
Details
Display only
0.0.0.0255.255.255.255
Display only
7. After completing the settings, press the Write Button.
6-6-5
Setting the Controller Link Network
If using a Controller Link Network is enabled for the project, settings for the network will be
displayed on the right side of window. Set the node address and baud rate (Comm. Speed).
Click the Write Button after setting these items. The Controller Link is supported by the
NS15, NS12, and NS10 PTs only, and is not supported by the NS8 PTs.
• Setting Communications Conditions for the Controller Link Network
Item
Network Add.
Node Address
6-50
Function
Displays the network address
used for Controller Link.
Sets the local node address.
Setting
Display only
1 to 32
6-6 Communications Settings
Comm. Speed
Read Status
Sets the baud rate.
500K, 1M, or 2M
Displays whether Controller Link status is read (display
only).
Displays address where status is read (display only).
Read Allocation
Add.
Note: Using the Controller Link network and the network number cannot be changed at the PT. If you
change the setting, display the communications settings in the CX-Designer by selecting PT –
Communication Setting, change the setting, and then transfer the project to the PT.
6-6-6
Setting Bar Code Readers
The PT has a Bar Code Reader input function allowing input of barcode data as character
strings in the String Display & Input object.
The methods for setting the communications conditions with the Bar Code Reader are
described here.
Reference • Refer to 3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers for information on methods for
connecting Bar Code Readers.
• The Bar Code Reader can be connected to either serial port A or serial port B only.
Set the communications conditions and confirmation method for the Bar Code Reader using
the following procedure from the System Menu.
Set the Bar Code Reader’s communications method for serial port A or serial port B.
The setting items for the Bar Code Reader will be displayed on the right side of the screen.
Set the Communications speed, data bits, stop bits, parity, and input method.
After setting, press the Write Button to save the settings.
• Setting Communications Conditions for Bar Code Reader Mode
Setting item
Comm. speed
Data bits
Stop bits
Parity
Input method
Continuous input
Function
Sets the communications speed for
communications with the Bar Code
Reader.
Sets the data bit length.
Sets the data stop bit length.
Sets the data parity bits.
Sets the confirmation method used after
inputting data in the input column.
Sets continuous barcode input to Yes or
No.
Settings
4800, 9600, or 19200 (bps)
7 or 8 bits
1 or 2 bits
None, odd, or even
Auto or manual confirmation
Yes or No
6-51
6-6 Communications Settings
6-6-7
Modem Settings
Data can be transferred from a personal computer to the PT through a modem. The method
used to set the data transfer conditions for the modem is described here.
Reference • Refer to 10-1 PT Transferring Data to the PT in the CX-Designer Operation Manual for
details on modem types and connections.
• The modem can be connected to either Serial Port A or Serial Port B, but not to both at
the same time.
Set the communications conditions for the modem from the System Menu using the following
procedure.
8. Set the communications method for serial port A or serial port B to the modem, and
press the Detail Button
9. The settings for the modem will be displayed on the right side of the screen. Set the
communications speed. After the setting is entered, press the Write Button to save it.
• Setting Communications Conditions for Modem Data Transfers
Setting item
Comm. Speed
6-52
Function
Sets the communications speed.
Settings
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or
115200 (bps)
6-7 Screen Data Check
6-7 Screen Data Check
Registered screens (numbers 0 to 3,999) can be displayed and checked using operations
from the System Menu.
Reference • The screen displayed when checking screen data is a sample and cannot be used to
communicate with the host. The flicker function is also disabled.
• Only the user screens (0 to 3,999) can be displayed. System screens cannot be
displayed.
Display check screens by using the following procedure from the System Menu.
1. Select the Data Check Tab.
2. Set the screen number and press the Display Button to display the screen as a sample.
3. Press the ON Button next to the Show Address heading and display the sample screen to display
the set address instead of the functional object label.
At this point you can also switch between displaying or not displaying the host name by setting
Show Host Name to ON or OFF.
4. Press any part of the sample screen that is displayed to return to the Screen Data Check Screen.
Reference Addresses are not displayed for data block tables.
6-53
6-8 Special Screens
6-8 Special Screens
These screens are used to display the data histories, device monitor, communications test,
and version information.
Item
Alarm history
Operation log
Error log
Special function
Function
Displays the alarm history.
Displays the operation log.
Displays the error log.
Performs the following special functions.
Switches PLC operating modes, displays and changes specified PLC
addresses, and displays and deletes PLC error data.
Refer to 6-8-4 Device Monitor for information on how to display the Device
Device monitor
Monitor Screen.
Refer to Device Monitor in 2-20 Special Functions in the Programming
Manual for details on the device monitor.
Communications test Checks the PT communications functions.
Video Configuration Performs video configuration.
USB device list
Displays a list of the devices connected to the USB port.
Display Capture
Displays video capture data or screen capture data stored in a Memory
Data
Card.
Transfer Memory
Transfers screen data and the system program on the PT to a Memory
Card
Card.
Reads the results of a data trace executed in the PLC and displays the
PLC Data Trace
results in a time chart. The data trace parameters can also be set.
External applications Starts external applications.
NJ-series
Monitors error status and other status in the Controller.
Troubleshooter
System Version
Displays information on the PT version.
Details on how to use the functions are explained here.
6-54
6-8 Special Screens
6-8-1
Alarm History
This function displays the alarm history. The alarm history can be displayed in order of
occurrence or frequency.
Display alarm history data by using operations from the Special Screen Tab Page in the
System Menu, as follows:
1. Press the Alarm History (Sort by Occurrence) Button or Alarm History (Sort by Frequency)
Button to display the history contents.
2. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Screen.
Reference Refer to Alarm/Event History in 2-20 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for
details on the alarm history function.
6-55
6-8 Special Screens
6-8-2
Operation Log
This function displays the operation log. The operation log can be displayed in order of
occurrence or frequency.
Display operation log data by using operations from the Special Screen Tab Page in the
System Menu, as follows:
1. Press the Operation Log (Sort by Occurrence) Button or Operation Log (Sort by Frequency)
Button to display the operation log contents.
2. With the NS10, NS8, or NS5, press the Switch Item Button to change the items that are
displayed.
3. Press the Save Log Button. The operation log data will be saved to the Memory Card as a CSV
file.
4. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Screen.
Reference • Refer to 6-2-4 Initializing and Saving the Operation Log in this manual and Operation
Log in 2-20 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the operation
log.
• Project versions 8.0 and higher support setting operation log messages.
6-56
6-8 Special Screens
6-8-3
Error Log
This function displays the macro error history. Macro errors can be displayed in order of
occurrence or frequency.
Display error log data by using operations from the Special Screen Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
1. Press the Error Log (Sort by Occurrence) Button or Error Log (Sort by Frequency) Button to
display the error log contents.
2. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Screen.
Reference
Refer to 6-2-5 Initializing and Saving the Error Log in this manual and Error Log in 2-20
Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the error log.
6-57
6-8 Special Screens
6-8-4
Device Monitor
The device monitor is an expansion function of the PT. This function is supported by CPM1A,
CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CS1G/CS1H, CS1D,
CS1G/CS1H-H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H, CJ2M, NJ501, NJ301 and NJ101 PLCs.
The device monitor has the following functions.
• Switches the PLC operating modes.
• Displays, changes, and performs force-sets/resets of current values in specified addresses
(registered monitor).
• Displays a list of the current values (continuous monitor) in consecutive addresses (DM,
EM, and WR Area words).
• Displays PLC error information (error logs) and deletes the errors (error information).
Details on methods of opening the Device Monitor Screen are explained here. Refer to
Device Monitor in 2-20 Special Functions in the Programming Manual (Cat. No. V073) for
details on the function and operation methods.
Precautions
for Safe Use
6-58
Always check carefully that the system is safe before performing the following
operations using the device monitor.
• Changing the monitor data and timer/counter current values.
• Switching operating modes.
• Performing force-sets/resets.
• Changing timer/counter set values.
6-8 Special Screens
The Device Monitor Screen is displayed by using operations from the Special Screen Tab
Page from the System Menu, as follows:
1. Select Device Monitor from the Special Functions List Box, and press the START Button.
2. The Device Monitor Screen will be displayed.
3. Press the Quit Button to return to the Special Screen.
6-59
6-8 Special Screens
6-8-5
Communication Test
This function checks whether communications are enabled, by performing simple
communications.
Screen
FINS
communications test
CIP
communications test
Method of
connection with
host
Serial port
Ethernet
Controller Link
EtherNet/IP
Display the Communication Test Screen by using operations from the Special Screen Tab
Page in the System Menu, as follows:
1. Select Communication Test from the Special Functions List Box, and press the START Button.
2. Press the Communication Test Button to switch to the Communications Test Screen.
3. Select either FINS or CIP.
4. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Window.
6-60
6-8 Special Screens
FINS Communications Test
1. Set each of the setting items, as follows:
• Setting and Display Items in Communication Test Screen
Item
Send to
Send message
Number of
sends
Receive
Timeout
Details
Sets the address of the transmission destination in the format (network
address).(node address).(unit number).
Sets the following addresses when performing a communications test for a node
connected to serial port A or B.
• Serial port A: 111.1.0
• Serial port B: 112.1.0
Sets the FINS command being to be sent.
Displays the number of times messages are transmitted. The number of times is
fixed to 1.
Sets the time before the message timeout occurs. Displays an error message
when the timeout time is exceeded after transmission.
The setting time is applicable for Ethernet only. For serial communications, the
timeout monitor time set from the Comm Tab is used.
2. Press the Start Button to start transmission.
The sending indicator will remain lit until the transmission is completed.
After transmission, the Receiving indicator will remain lit until reception is completed.
3. If communications are normal, a response will be received from the transmission destination and
the following items will be displayed. Refer to the FINS Command Reference Manual (Cat. No.
W227) for details on FINS commands and information displayed in comments.
• Display Items in Communication Test Screen
Item
SID (See note 1.)
Details
The SID used for transmission is displayed as a hexadecimal.
The SID is incremented between 0 and 0xFF and returns to 0 after 0xFF is
exceeded.
Received header
Displays the FINS header that is received. (See note 2.)
Received message Displays the received message.
ms
Displays the time lapsed in ms from sending the FINS command until
receiving the FINS response.
Comment
Displays the status, such as "normal completion," according to the
completion code after reception.
Note 1. SID is the source process ID.
2. The FINS header is the header that precedes the FINS command. Refer to the FINS
Command Reference Manual (Cat. No. W227) for details on FINS commands.
6-61
6-8 Special Screens
CIP Communications Test
1. Set each of the setting items, as follows:
Item
Send To
Send message
Number of Sends
Receive Timeout
Details
Sets route path of the send destination. Also, if you click the Host Button, a list
of hosts registered in the project will be displayed. You can select the host of
the send destination from the list.
Inputs an explicit message.
Displays the number of times messages are transmitted. The number of times
is fixed to 1.
Sets the time before the message timeout occurs.
2. Press the Start Button to start transmission.
The sending indicator will remain lit until the transmission is completed.
After transmission, the Receiving indicator will remain lit until reception is completed.
3. If communications are normal, a response will be received from the transmission destination and
the following items will be displayed.
Item
SID
Received Message
ms
Comment
Details
Displays the identification number of the explicit message.
Displays the received message.
Displays the time from sending the command message to receiving the
response message.
Displays the status, such as "normal completion," according to the completion
code after reception.
Reference • For details on explicit messages, refer to documentation on EtherNet/IP and CIP
specifications.
• To obtain documentation on EtherNet/IP and CIP specifications, contact an ODVA
office.
6-8-6
Video Configuration
A Video Input Unit can be mounted to the PT to display images by connecting video devices.
The user can adjust the image and output signals to a Vision Sensor from this window.
This section describes only the procedure for opening the window. For details, refer to 2-2010 Video Configuration in the NS Series Programming Manual.
The Video Configuration Window can be access by selecting the System Menu and clicking
6-62
6-8 Special Screens
the Special Screen Tab as shown below.
1. Select Video Configuration from the list under Special Function, and click the Start
button.
The Video Configuration Window will be displayed.
2. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Window.
Reference
Press the Write Button to save the adjustments to the displayed image.
When starting the PT next time, the saved settings for the adjustments will be
automatically reflected on the display.
6-63
6-8 Special Screens
6-8-7
USB Device List
This function displays information about the devices connected to the PT’s USB port.
Item
Device list
Driver list
Details
A list of the devices currently connected to the USB port is
displayed.
A list of connectable USB devices that are supported by the NS
Series is displayed.
1. Select USB Device List from the Special Functions List Box, and press the START Button.
2. The USB Device List Window will be displayed.
A list of USB devices currently connected and a list of USB devices supported by the NS Series
are displayed. Press the Update Button to reconfirm the connected USB devices and refresh the
display.
3. Press the Return Button to return to the Special Screen.
Reference
6-64
The USB Device List Window displays the devices connected to the USB host connector
on the PT. A PictBridge-compatible printer connected to the USB slave connector will not
be displayed.
6-8 Special Screens
6-8-8
Display Capture Data
Video capture data and screen capture data stored in a Memory Card can be displayed.
Perform the following procedure under Special Screen Tab on the System Menu.
1. Select Display Capture Data from the Special Function List Box and press the START
Button.
2. The Show The Captured Data Screen will be displayed.
1
5
3
4
2
6
7
8
9
10
11
No.
Item
1
Data
2
3
File name
Display
4
Delete
5
Back
Details
Displays a BMP file stored in the LOG/CAPTURE folder in the Memory
Card.
Display the file name and time stamp of the BMP file.
Press the Display Button and then the bitmap to enlarge the display.
Press the Print Button to print the BMP file. Press the Full Screen
Button to display the BMP file in original format. The original display
divided into four areas will return if BACK is pressed.
The following dialog box will appear if the Delete Button and then the
bitmap are pressed.
Press the Yes Button to delete the BMP. The capture display screen
will return if the No Button is pressed.
Press to return to the Special Screens Tab Page.
6-65
6-8 Special Screens
No.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Item
Sort by name
(Ascending)
Sort by name
(Descending)
From Old Date &
Time
From New Date
& Time
< Button and
> Button
<< Button and
>> Button
Reference
Details
Press to sort the bitmap file names alphabetically.
Press to sort the bitmap file names reversed alphabetically.
Press to sort the bitmap file names starting from the oldest one.
Press to sort the bitmap file names starting from the newest one
Press to display the next or previous page (4 files) of bitmaps.
Press to display the page back or forward by 3 pages (12 files) of
bitmaps.
The following types of data are also displayed for capture data.
• PLC data trace
• Ladder Monitor
6-8-9
Memory Card Transfers
With a Memory Card is inserted into the PT, please perform the following procedures using
the Special Screens Tab Page of the System Menu. You can manually transfer screen data
and system programs without manipulating the DIP switch on the PT. The Memory Card can
be used to transfer data in the following situations.
• To transfer data to or from a Memory Card already inserted to save or read data such as
data logs and captured data.
• To transfer data after replacing a Memory Card already inserted to save data such as data
logs and captured data with a Memory Card for data transfer.
• To transfer data after inserting a Memory Card to a PT without one.
Perform the following procedures as required by the application.
Transferring Data to a Memory Card in the PT
No special action is required prior to transferring data to the Memory Card.
Replacing a Memory Card in the PT with Another Memory Card Used to
Save Data
Use the following procedure to replace the Memory Card already in the PT with another
Memory Card that will be used to save data. Perform the following procedure from the
Initialize Tab Page of the System Menu. Remove the Memory Card that is currently inserted,
and insert another one.
1. Press the Remove Button next to Memory Card of the Initialize Tab Page.
2. Confirm that it is safe to remove the Memory Card, and remove it from the PT.
3. Insert the Memory Card that will be used to save data into the PT.
6-66
6-8 Special Screens
Inserting a Memory Card into a PT without One
Insert the Memory Card into the PT.
Transferring Memory Card Data
Use the following procedure from the Special Screen Tab Page of the System Menu to
transfer data to Memory Card. Press the EXIT Button at the top left of the Memory Card
Transfer screen to reset the PT.
1. Select Memory Card Transfer from the Special Functions list, and press the Start
Button.
2. A Memory Card transfer will be executed, and the following screen will be displayed on
the PT.
3. Specify the direction (download or upload), contents (Project, Project & System, or
System), and banks. The IPP file name and system version that are stored in both the
specified bank of the Memory Card and the PT will be displayed in the Project File and
System Version Fields. After confirming the details, press the Go Button.
4. The following screen will be displayed if data transfer security has been set for the
project data stored in the PT to protect the project data in the PT from unauthorized data
transfers. Input the password and press the ENTER Button.
5. A message confirming the transfer will be displayed. Press the OK Button to execute the
specified data transfer operation. When downloading, the screen data previously stored
in the PT will be deleted. Also, specify whether or not to delete the log data.
Precautions
for Correct Use
Always clear the log data for the following.
• When changing settings related to alarms, events, or the data logs.
• When transferring a different project to the PT.
6. A warning message will be displayed if the PT model, system program/screen data
versions, or language for the data stored in the PT are different from that for the data
stored in the Memory Card. Press the Yes Button to continue transferring the data.
7. The uploading/downloading screen will be displayed while data is being transferred. A
screen indicating that the transfer has been completed will be displayed when the
transfer has finished. (If an error occurs, a transfer error screen will be displayed. Refer
to page 3-27 if an error occurs.)
8. The indicator will flash green and the following screen will be displayed when the transfer
is completed.
6-67
6-8 Special Screens
9. If you want to continue using the Memory Card, press the Reset Button to reset the PT.
If you remove or replace the Memory Card, press the Reset Button immediately after
removal or replacement to reset the PT.
Precautions
for Correct Use
• Please refer to the procedure above for removing a Memory Card when
transferring data and always follow the messages displayed on the PT. If a
Memory Card is removed at the wrong time, the data that has been
transferred may not work properly.
• The data that can be transferred using the Memory Card Transfer operation
on the System Menu is only the screen and system program data can be
manually transferred with a Memory Card inserted. The DIP switch on the
PT must be manipulated to insert a Memory Card and automatically
upload/download screen or system program data. Refer to 3-6 Using
Memory Cards for details.
6-8-10 External Application Startup
This function closes the regular work screen and starts up an external application, such as
the Programming Console function or Ladder Monitor.
The following describes the procedure for starting up external applications. Refer to the
individual manual for more details on functions and operations applicable to the application.
Start up an external application by using operations from the Special Screen Tab in the
System Menu as follows:
1. Select an external application from the Special Functions List Box, and press the START Button.
The following diagram shows the screen with Ladder Monitor selected.
2. The NS-series PT resets.
3. The NS-series PT reboots, and the selected application starts up.
If an application displays a message, refer to its manual.
6-68
6-8 Special Screens
Reference
Device monitor, Communication Test, Video Configuration, USB Device List,
Display Capture Data, and PLC Data Trace are not external applications. The screen
in the System Menu switches when you press the START button with one of these
selected, but the NS-series PT does not reset.
• For information on the Ladder Monitor, refer to the Ladder Monitor Operation Manual
(Cat. No. V082). The Ladder Monitor Operation Manual is provided as a PDF file with
the CX-Designer.
CX-Designer
CD-ROM: \Utility\English\LadderMonitorFunc\V082.pdf
If you cannot obtain a copy of the manual as a PDF file, consult your OMRON
representative.
• For details on programming functions, refer to the NS-Series PT Programming Manual.
6-8-11 Version Display
This function displays information on the PT version.
Display the Version Display Screen by using operations from the Special Screen Tab Page
in the System Menu, as follows:
1. Press the System Version Button to switch to the Version Display Screen.
2. The product model and version will be displayed.
3. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Screen.
6-8-12 PLC Data Trace (NS15, NS12, NS10, and NS8 Only)
The PLC Data Trace function uses the data trace function within a CS/CJ-series PLC (CPU
Unit) and displays the results of the PLC’s data trace at the PT.
After receiving the data trace execution command from the NS-series PT and establishing
the specified trigger condition, the PLC reads the specified bit’s status or present value of
the specified word according to the sampling conditions, and stores the sampled data in the
CPU Unit’s Trace Memory.
The PT reads the data stored in the PLC and displays that data on the screen as a time
chart.
The PLC Data Trace function can be used in the NS15, NS12, NS10, and NS8 PTs only.
6-69
6-8 Special Screens
NS-series PT
(NS12, NS10 or NS8)
Results
Execute PLC
Data Trace
CPU Unit
Stored data trace results
This section only explains how to open the PLC Data Trace Screen. Refer to 2-20 Special
Functions in the NS Series Programming Manual for details on the specifications and
operation of the data trace function.
Precautions
for Correct Use
The data trace function is supported by the CS/CJ-series PLCs (except CPseries PLCs). This function cannot be used with other PLC models.
Display the PLC Data Trace Screen by using operations from the Special Screen Tab Page in
the System Menu, as follows:
1. Select PLC Data Trace from the Special Functions List Box, and press the START
Button.
2. The PLC Data Trace Screen will be displayed.
3. Press the Back Button to return to RUN mode.
6-70
6-8 Special Screens
6-8-13 NJ-series Troubleshooter
The NJ-series Troubleshooter is used to monitor the error status in an NJ/NX-series CPU
Unit and to display that status on an NS-series PT.
The procedure to open the Troubleshooter Screen is given here. For details on functions and
operating methods, refer to NJ-series Troubleshooter in 2-20 Special Functions of the NSSeries PT Programming Manual.
The Troubleshooter is supported by NJ/NX-series Controllers. It cannot be used for other
Controllers or PLCs. Perform the following procedure from the Special Screen Tab Page of
the System Menu to display the Troubleshooter.
1. Select Troubleshooter (NJ) from the list of special functions and press the START
Button
2. The Troubleshooter Screen will be displayed.
3. Press the Back Button to return to RUN mode.
6-71
6-9 Hardware Check
6-9 Hardware Check
The hardware check is used to check the following functions.
Item
LCD check
Touch switch check
Touch panel Calibration (NS15 only)
6-9-1
Function
Checks the LCD.
Checks touch panel input.
Calibrates the touch positions.
LCD Check
This function checks whether the LCD (screen display) is operating normally.
Check the LCD by using operations from the Hardware Check Tab Page in the System Menu,
as follows:
1. Press the LCD Check Button to switch to the LCD Check Screen.
2. Press the Back Button to return to the Hardware Check Screen.
6-72
6-9 Hardware Check
6-9-2
Touch Switch Check
This function checks whether the touch switches are operating normally.
Check the touch panel by using operations from the Hardware Check Tab Page in the
System Menu, as follows:
1. Press the Touch Switch Check Button to switch to the Touch Switch Check Screen.
2. Press the screen. If the part of the screen touched is shown in inverse display, the touch switch is
operating normally.
The position touched
is shown in inverse
display.
3. Press the button in the top right corner to return to the Hardware Check Screen.
Reference Two points cannot be touched at the same time on the Touch Panel Check Screen.
6-9-3
Touch Panel Calibration (NS15 Only)
This function calibrates the touch positions on the touch panel. Use the following procedure
from the Hardware Check Tab Page of the System Menu to perform the calibration.
1. Press the Touch panel Calibration Button. The Calibration Display will appear.
2. Press the marks in the four corners of the screen and the mark in the center of the
screen. The marks may be pressed in any order.
3. The touch positions will be calibrated.
4. Press the blue button at the top of the display. The Hardware Check Tab Page will be
displayed again.
6-73
6-10 Starting Operations
6-10 Starting Operations
The host and PT connected to it start operating after the project data has finished being
transferred and the System Menu settings (communications conditions with the host, etc.)
have been completed.
Precautions
for Safe Use
Start actual operation only after sufficiently checking the operation of the screen
data and host programming.
z Switching to RUN Mode and Starting Up
Pressing the Exit Button at the top right of the screen in the System Menu will display the
screen that was displayed before moving to the System Menu, change the status to RUN
mode, and start running the PT. The pop-up screens that were open before switching to the
System Menu, however, will not be displayed.
Reference The error message indicating a project read error will be displayed if the System Menu is
closed while screen data is being initialized. Always transfer the screen data from the
CX-Designer or Memory Card after initializing screen data.
z Checking Communications with the Host
Execute the host program and check that the following operations are normal.
• Check that the PT screens will switch according to the host program.
If the screen displays cannot be switched normally, check whether the PT and host are
connected properly, and whether the hardware settings are correct. For details, refer to
Section 4 Connecting the Host to Serial Port or Section 5 Connecting to Host via Ethernet
or Controller Link.
• Use the Support Software (CX-Programmer, etc.) to display the details on words and bits
to check that the results of PT button operations and numerical/character string input
operations have been properly transmitted to the host.
• If the operation results are not transmitted to the host properly, check the object settings.
Refer to the object descriptions in the PT Programming Manual for details on object
settings.
6-74
6-10 Starting Operations
z Communications Not Established with Host
Use the following procedure to check communications if the PT and host are not
communicating normally.
Check the cable models and cable pins.
Check cables
Refer to Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables.
Check PT settings
Check the communications settings under the System Menu.
Refer to 6-6 Communications Settings.
Check host settings
Check the host settings using the CX-Programmer or other Programming
Device. Refer to Section 4 Connecting the Host to Serial Port and Section 5
Connecting to Host via Ethernet or Controller Link.
Check connections host to PT
Check the connections between the PT and the host. Refer to Section 4
Connecting to the Host to Serial Port and Section 5 Connecting to Host via
Ethernet or Controller Link.
Check functional object
addresses
Precautions
for Correct Use
Check the addresses and host names set for functional objects. Be sure
that all address settings are within range.
The whole system may stop, depending on the method used to turn the power
ON and OFF. Always follow the specified procedure when turning the power ON
or OFF.
6-75
6-11 Verifying Tags
6-11 Verifying Tags
If tags are used by projects in the NS-series PT, verification will be perform to check whether
the tag settings match the host tag settings (i.e., network variables).
Tags will be verified in the following cases.
• When the NS-series PT is started
• When ladder data is downloaded to the host (i.e., tag settings are updated)
1. The following screen will be displayed when the NS-series PT is started or ladder data is
downloaded to the host.
2. When verification has been completed, the user screen will be displayed if the tags of the
NS-series PT and the host match.
3. If the tags do not match, the Tag Comparison Results List will be displayed.
The following will be displayed in the Verification Error Details Column.
Item
Missing tag
Different data type
Different array size
Maximum number of tags
is exceeded
Communications error
6-76
Details
A tag that is registered in the project is not registered in the
host.
The data type set for the tag registered in the project is
different from the setting for the host tag.
The setting for the number of elements for array tags
registered in the project is different from the setting for the
host tag.
A tag is registered in the project, but the maximum number
of tags (20,000) is exceeded.
An error occurred in communications with the host.
6-11 Verifying Tags
4. Check the differences, and then revise the settings for the project data or the tag.
5. To revise the settings of the host tag, click the Recompare Button to verify the tags again.
6. Click the System Menu Button to move to the System Menu. You can check the
communications settings for the host and transfer memory card data.
Reference
• Tags can be used when connection is made to a CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, CJ2M-CPU3@,
NJ@01-@@@@ or NX@01-@@@@ CPU Unit using EhterNet/IP.
• If ladder data is downloaded to the host, the tags will be verified once downloading
has been completed when the host tags are monitored.
Examples for the Following Screen Data
Host
Screen 1
Screen 2
Host 1 and host 2
Using tags for host 1 and not host 2
Using tags for host 2
While screen 1 is displayed, tags will not be verified when ladder data is
downloaded to host 2. Tags will be verified when you switch to screen 2.
• When ladder data is downloaded to the host, you can display a confirmation
message before the system starts to verify tags. For information on the setting
method, refer to 6-3-15 Setting the Tag Update Notification Message.
• The Tag Comparison Results List Screen can display up to 50 results.
• If you are connected to an NJ@01-@@@@ or NX@01-@@@@ Controller, some time
may be required to verify tags, depending on the task execution times. Allow leeway
in the task period settings in comparison with the task execution times, or verify the
tags when task execution is stopped.
6-77
6-11 Verifying Tags
6-78
Section 7
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This section describes the maintenance and inspection methods for preventing errors occurring,
and troubleshooting measures when errors occur in the PT.
7-1 Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7-1-1 Replacing the Battery ............................................................................................... 7-2
7-2 Inspection and Cleaning .................................................................................................... 7-4
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance .................................................................................... 7-6
7-4 Requesting a Replacement PT......................................................................................... 7-14
7-1 Maintenance
7-1 Maintenance
Perform maintenance operations to maintain the PT in optimum condition.
Do not attempt to take the Unit apart and do not
touch any internal parts while the power is being
supplied. Doing either of these may result in
electrical shock.
z Backing up Project Data
Always back up project data and store it in a safe place when the PT malfunctions and
needs to be sent out for repair, or when replacing the Unit.
z Spare Units
Prepare a spare PT to allow quick recovery of the system at such times as when the PT
malfunctions, or the service life of the backlight has expired causing poor screen visibility.
z Backlight
The backlight must be replaced when the brightness of the display backlight dims and the
display becomes difficult to see. The backlight cannot be replaced by the user.
Contact your nearest OMRON representative.
• Backlight Replacement Guidelines
Replace the backlight according to the following guidelines under normal conditions.
After 50,000 hours of use at room temperature and humidity, (or after approximately
40,000 hours if an NS8-V1 PT is used.)
LEDs are used in the backlights of the following PTs: NS5-SQ1/-TQ1 PTs with lot number
15Z0 or later, NS8 PTs with lot number 28X1 or later, NS10 PTs with lot number 11Y1 or
later, NS12 PTs with lot number 14Z1 or later, and NS15 PTs with lot number 31114 or later.
Operation at high temperatures will reduce the life of the backlight. If the backlight become
darker, making it difficult to see the screen, replace the backlight. The NS5-SQ1/-TQ1, NS8,
NS10, NS12, NS15, and NS5-MQ PTs with lot numbers that are earlier than the ones given
above use a CCFL (cold cathode fluorescent light) as the backlight. The life of the backlight
is affected by environmental conditions, particularly by cold environments. If the backlight
become darker, making it difficult to see the screen, replace the backlight.
7-1-1
Replacing the Battery
Use a lithium battery to back up data other than screen data, such as calendar, clock, and
log data.
The battery service life is approximately five years at 25°C. The service life will be shortened
if the battery is used at higher temperatures. Replace the battery periodically, according to
the operating environment.
Keep a spare battery available, so that the battery can be replaced immediately when
required.
7-2
7-1 Maintenance
• Battery Models
CJ1W-BAT01
• Replacement Guidelines
The guidelines for replacing the battery are as follows:
• Replace when five years have lapsed since a new battery was installed in the Unit.
• Replace within five days after the RUN indicator lights orange.
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Never use batteries that have been subjected to a severe shock, such as
being dropped on the ground. Batteries subjected to shock may leak.
• When mounting the battery, be sure to use the correct battery and mount it
correctly.
• Replacement Method
Perform the following procedure within five minutes to replace the battery.
The shape of the battery cover and the direction for installing the connector depend on the
PT model.
1. After power to the PT has been turned ON and at least five minutes have lapsed, turn
OFF the power.
2. Open the battery cover on the rear panel of the PT.
3. Remove the battery that is secured inside the PT, grasp the cable, and pull the connector
out vertically to remove it.
4. Connect the new battery connector, and insert the battery into the battery holder in the
battery cover.
5. Close the battery cover, being careful not to squash the battery cable.
7-3
7-2 Inspection and Cleaning
7-2 Inspection and Cleaning
Clean and inspect the PT periodically to maintain it in optimum condition for use.
z Cleaning Methods
The screen visibility will be impaired if the display becomes dirty. Clean the display
periodically using the following methods:
• For daily cleaning, wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Attempting to remove heavy dirt with the
cloth may scratch the front panel sheet. Use a damp cloth and wipe the surface again to
remove dirt.
• If dirt cannot be removed using a dry cloth, dampen the cloth sufficiently with a neutral
cleaning agent solution (approximately 2%), squeeze the cloth out, and then wipe the
surface.
• Materials such as rubber, vinyl, or tape that are attached to the Unit will leave stains if left
for a long time. If such material is attached to the Unit, remove when cleaning.
Precautions
for Correct Use
Never use benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents, or chemical cloths to
clean the PT.
z Inspection Methods
Inspect the PT once every six to twelve months. Shorten the interval between inspections
when using the PT in extreme conditions, such as under high temperatures, high humidity, or
environments subject to large quantities of dust.
7-4
7-2 Inspection and Cleaning
• Inspection Items
Inspect the PT for the following items to check whether the PT is operating within the
specified criteria. If the PT is outside the criteria, use measures such as improving the
operating environment to conform to the standards, or tightening screws.
Inspection
items
Power
supply
Ambient
environment
Inspection details
Power terminal voltage
fluctuation
Ambient temperature
(temperature in control panel)
Ambient humidity
(temperature in control panel)
Presence of dust
Presence of oil
Criteria
Allowable voltage range
(24 VDC ±15%)
0 to 50°C
(Refer to Appendix 1.)
35% to 85%
(Refer to Appendix 1.)
No dust accumulated.
No oil between front panel sheet
and molding.
Mounting
Looseness of fixed mounting Specified torque.
conditions
bracket
Connection status of
Fully inserted, locked, and with
Connecting Cable
No looseness.
Connectors
Looseness of external wiring No looseness.
screws
Status of external connecting No breaks or other damage
cables
Parts with
Backlight brightness
Sufficient brightness.
limited
Backlight life (at room
service life
temperature of 25°C) is 50,000
hours,
as a guideline.
Battery
5 years (at room temperature of
25°C).
Touch panel Shifted input positions on the Calibrate the touch panel if the
input
touch panel
input positions have shifted.
position
accuracy
(NS15 only)
Precautions
for Safe Use
Inspection means
Tester
Thermometer
Temperature meter
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
Phillips screwdriver
Phillips screwdriver
Phillips screwdriver
Visual inspection,
tester
Visual inspection
Replace every 5
years
Touch panel
operation
• Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the PT.
• Follow all local government regulations, where applicable, when disposing of
the Unit and used batteries.
7-5
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
When an error occurs while operating the PT, search for the symptom in the following table
and take measures according to those provided.
Errors during Data Transfer
Symptoms at
PT
Serial transfer
not possible
between CXDesigner and
PT.
Personal
computer
cannot detect
PT when
connected via
USB.
Timeout
occurs during
screen transfer
using USB.
Cause
Possible countermeasure
The CX-Designer is
not connected to the
PT.
The Expansion
Interface for serial
port B is set to the
expansion interface
(NS5 only).
The serial port used
for connection with
the CX-Designer is
set to Allen-Bradley
DF1.
The installed PT
system is using
system program
lower than Ver. 6.2.
Check the wiring conditions of the connecting cable.
(Refer to 3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer.)
The PT has a lot
number earlier than
that indicated in
3-3-2 Connecting
via USB.
Use a PT from the lot number (or later) indicated in 3-3-2
Connecting via USB.
The USB cable is
longer than 2 m.
To use a cable longer than 2 m, connect a USB Hub
between the PT and personal computer as shown in
Connection Methods under in 3-3-2 Connecting via USB.
A malfunction has
occurred due to
external noise.
Configure the USB Hub and wire the USB cables taking
measures to prevent noise.
A PictBridgecompatible printer is
connected to the
USB slave
connector.
The USB cable is
longer than 2 m.
Connect the personal computer to the USB slave
connector.
A malfunction has
occurred due to
external noise.
Set the Expansion Interface to Disable on the Comm Tab
Page from the NS5 System Menu.
Data cannot be transferred using a serial port set to AllenBradley DF1. Use another serial port.
Alternatively, change the serial port setting to Disable in the
Comm. Tab of the System Menu. Click the Write Button,
and transfer the data again after resetting the NS-series PT.
Install system program Ver. 6.2 or higher in the PT.
To use a cable longer than 2 m, connect a USB Hub
between the PT and personal computer as shown in
Connection Methods under in 3-3-2 Connecting via USB.
Configure the USB Hub and wire the USB cables taking
measures to prevent noise.
Errors during PT Startup
Symptoms at
PT
Indicators do
not light.
7-6
Cause
Power is not being
supplied to the PT.
The fuse is broken.
Possible countermeasure
Check the connection points and supply power to the PT
correctly. (Refer to 3-1 Installing the PT.)
The PT needs repair. Contact your nearest OMRON
representative.
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Symptoms at
PT
Indicators do
not light.
The indicator
is lit orange
and the screen
is blank.
The indicator
is lit green and
the screen is
blank.
The indicator
is flashing
green and the
buzzer
repeatedly
turns ON and
OFF.
The screen is
blank and the
indicator is
flashing green.
Cause
The system
program is
corrupted (fatal
error).
The system
program is
corrupted (fatal
error).
The Memory Card
cannot be
recognized.
The system
program is
corrupted (non-fatal
error). The
combination of NSseries PT hardware
and system
program version is
incorrect.
In the following
cases, project data
was downloaded
without clearing the
log data saved in
the NS.
• A project was
downloaded to the
NS-series PT in
which settings
related to history,
such as alarm/
event or data log
settings, have
been changed.
• An attempt was
made to download
a project that was
different from the
project saved in
the NS.
The backlight has
malfunctioned.
Automatic upload/
download has
ended normally.
Possible countermeasure
The PT may be faulty. Contact your nearest OMRON
representative.
The PT may be faulty. Contact your nearest OMRON
representative.
• Use a Memory Card specified by OMRON. (Refer to 3-6
Using Memory Cards.)
• If you can confirm that the NS-series PT is operating
normally after the Memory Card has been removed from
the PT, there may be a failure in the Memory Card.
Replace the Memory Card before using the PT.
Recovery/update the system program. (Refer to 3-6 Using
Memory Cards.)
Contact your nearest OMRON representative if the same
problem occurs after recovering/updating the system
program.
Download the project data again. When downloading the
project data again, be sure to clear the log data saved in the
NS.
The backlight must be replaced. Contact your nearest
OMRON representative.
This is not an error. Turn OFF all the DIP switch pins and
turn ON the power to the PT again.
7-7
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Symptoms at
PT
The screen is
blank and the
indicator is
flashing red.
Automatic
upload/download
has ended
abnormally.
The indicator
is lit red and
the screen is
blank.
The PT is faulty,
or the system
program is
corrupted.
Cause
Possible countermeasure
The system program may be corrupted. Reinstall the system
program.
(Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards.)
If the same problem occurs after reinstalling the system
program, the PT may be faulty. Contact your nearest
OMRON representative.
An attempt may have been made to transfer screens that
are larger than the memory of the PT. Check the screen
data at the transfer destination.
Reinstall the system program. (Refer to 3-6 Using Memory
Cards.)
If the same problem occurs after reinstalling the system
program, the PT may be faulty. Contact your nearest
OMRON representative.
Errors during PT Powerup
Message
FATAL ERROR No. 01:
Touch Panel is not
connected: Please contact
your OMRON service
center.
FATAL ERROR No. 02:
SRAM Initialization Error:
Please contact your
OMRON service center.
FATAL ERROR No. 03:
MAC Address Error: Please
contact your OMRON
service center.
FATAL ERROR No. 04: PT
Model type Identify Error:
Please contact your
OMRON service center.
ERROR No. 10: File System
Error: Please recover the
system program.
ERROR No. 10: Fail in
loading files or executing
program: Please recover the
system program.
ERROR No. 10: Fail in
loading files: Please recover
the system program.
7-8
Cause
Touch panel error.
Possible countermeasure
Contact your nearest OMRON
representative.
Hardware error in log
SRAM.
Incorrect MAC address.
Built-in model code cannot
be read.
Contact your nearest OMRON
representative.
File system is corrupted.
(A hardware fault occurred
or power was interrupted
during writing.)
File reading or program
execution failed.
Reinstall the system program by
inserting the Memory Card containing
the recovery program in the PT and
resetting the PT or turning the power
supply OFF and ON again. (Refer to
3-6 Using Memory Cards in the Setup
Manual.)
When the PT contains a read-only
file, do a clean installation. After the
clean installation, verify that the
project data does not contain any
read-only files and transfer the
project data.
If the same problem occurs after
reinstalling the system program,
contact your nearest OMRON
representative.
A read-only file is being
transferred to the PT.
File reading failed.
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Message
ERROR No. 11: Fail in
loading files: Please reinstall
the system program.
ERROR No. 11: Device
check program error: Please
reinstall the system
program.
ERROR No. 11: SRAM
check program error: Please
reinstall the system
program.
ERROR No. 11: IP Address
Setting Error: Please
reinstall the system
program.
ERROR No. 11: Device
check program error: Touch
the screen to continue.
Cause
File reading failed.
ERROR No. 12: Fail in
loading fonts: Please
reinstall the system
program.
ERROR No. 12: Installed
system program is not
applicable for this hardware:
Please reinstall the system
program.
Reading of font files when
operation performed with
DIP switch 6 set to ON
failed.
The installed system
program does not match the
hardware.
ERROR No.13: Memory
Card Error: Memory card or
some files in a memory card
may be corrupted.
Safely change the memory
card, and reset the PT or
turn the power supply OFF
and ON again.
WARNING No. 20: Date and
Time are not set: Touch the
screen to continue.
WARNING No. 21: SRAM
previously broken…
Initialization Complete:
Touch the screen to
continue.
Memory card is corrupted,
or using unsupported
memory card.
Hardware check program is
corrupted.
Log SRAM check program is
corrupted.
IP address setting program
is corrupted.
At startup with DIP switch 6
set to ON, the hardware
check program is corrupted.
Date set outside the PT’s
allowable range of 2000 to
2049.
SRAM contents could not be
held because the battery
was not connected or there
was insufficient capacity.
For this reason, SRAM was
initialized.
Possible countermeasure
Execute automatic download of the
system program. If the same problem
occurs after downloading, insert the
Memory Card containing the recovery
program in the PT and reset the PT
or turn the power supply OFF and ON
again. (Refer to 3-6 Using Memory
Cards in the Setup Manual.) If the
same problem occurs after
reinstalling the system program,
contact your nearest OMRON
representative.
The Memory Card transfer program
started up after this can be used. If
operation is not restored after
continuing with the Memory Card
transfer program, insert the Memory
Card containing the recovery
program in the PT and reset the PT
or turn the power supply OFF and ON
again. (Refer to 3-6 Using Memory
Cards in the Setup Manual.) If the
same problem occurs after
reinstalling the system program,
contact your nearest OMRON
representative.
Download the system program by
automatic download that does not
use DIP switch 6. If operation is not
restored after downloading, insert the
Memory Card containing the recovery
system program in BANK 1 in the PT.
(Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards in
the Setup Manual.) If the same
problem occurs after reinstalling the
system program, contact your
nearest OMRON representative.
Safely remove the memory card, and
change it.
(Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards in
the Setup Manual.)
If the same problem occurs after
changing the memory card, contact
your nearest OMRON representative.
Touch the touch panel to continue
booting. Then set the correct date in
the System Menu.
Touch the touch panel to continue
booting. Replace the battery the next
time power is turned OFF.
7-9
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Message
WARNING No. 22: Memory
Card Error: Some files in a
memory card may be
corrupted. Safely remove
the memory card, and check
whether files are not
corrupted on a computer.
You can continue to startup
the PT by touching on the
screen, however, it may
NOT operate correctly when
accessing to the memory
card. (The same message
will also be displayed in
Japanese. This is not a
fault.)
WARNING No. 23: Screen
data file(s) is not correct:
Touch the screen to
continue and transfer screen
data again.
Cause
The two following causes
are possible:
The previous time the PT
was used, power was turned
OFF while accessing the
Memory Card.
Memory Card access safety
information could not be
held because the battery
was connected or there was
insufficient capacity.
Possible countermeasure
Touch the touch panel to continue
booting. When the Memory Card is
accessed, however, the PT may not
operate normally.
The PT screen data is
corrupted. (The cable was
disconnected or the power
was turned OFF during
screen data transfer).
WARNING No. 24: The
recovery program in the
inserted Memory Card is not
supported by the PT. Update
the recovery program,
referring to NS Series Setup
Manual. To continue starting
the PT without executing the
program, touch the screen.
The recovery program
cannot be started because
the recovery program
installer in the Memory Card
that is inserted in the PT is
not supported by the current
hardware version of the PT.
Touch the PT’s touch panel, and after
connecting is displayed at the bottom
right of the screen, or after the
message "No project data is
registered. Press OK button and
download project data." is displayed,
reattempt screen transfer.
Touch the screen to start the system
that is currently installed in the PT
(i.e., not the recovery program). To
start the recovery program that is in
the Memory Card, you must update
the recovery program that is stored in
the Memory Card. To update the
program, install the CX-Designer in a
personal computer and then select
Programs - OMRON - CX-One –
CX-Designer – How to recover or
update the system program from
the Window's Start Menu.
Errors while Connecting to the Host
Symptoms at
PT
PT cannot
communicate
with the host.
(An error
message is
displayed or
connecting is
displayed at
the bottom
right of the
screen.)
7-10
Cause
The settings for
Ethernet connection,
such as node number,
network number, and
IP address, are not
set correctly.
The protocol settings
for the host and the
settings at the PT do
not match.
The PT is not
connected to the host
properly.
For 1:N NT Link
connections, two or
more Units have the
same unit number.
Possible countermeasure
Set the settings correctly, referring to Section 5
Connecting to Host via Ethernet or Controller Link.
Set the communications settings using the CX-Designer.
Check that the type, length, and wiring of the connecting
cables meet the specifications.
(Refer to Section 4 Connecting the Host to Serial Port.)
Reset so that each Unit has a unique unit number.
(Refer to 6-6 Communications Settings.)
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Symptoms at
PT
PT cannot
communicate
with the host.
(An error
message is
displayed or
connecting is
displayed at
the bottom
right of the
screen.)
Cause
Possible countermeasure
With the NS5, the
Expansion Interface
for serial port B is set
to the expansion
interface when the
connection is to serial
port B.
Initializing system
memory at startup has
been disabled, and
the NS-series PT was
started with a nonexisting screen
number (0 to 3,999)
set in the allocation
address of $SW0 or
with a special screen
number set, such as
4002, that displays the
system menu.
Set the Expansion Interface to Disable on the Comm Tab
Page from the NS5 System Menu.
Correctly set the screen number for display in the
allocation address of $SW0.
Errors during PT Operation
Symptoms at
PT
RUN indicator
does not light.
The screen is
blank.
Cause
Possible countermeasure
Power is not being
supplied to the PT.
The fuse is broken.
The RUN indicator is
too dark.
The PT is in system
startup waiting status.
The screen saver
function is operating.
Check the connection points and supply power to the PT
correctly. (Refer to 3-1 Installing the PT.)
Contact your nearest OMRON representative.
Increase the brightness of the backlight on the PT Setting
Tab Page of the System Menu.
This is not an error. Information will be displayed when
the waiting time has lapsed.
This is not an error. Touch the screen, or operate the
system memory for switching the screen from the host to
switch the screen as follows:
• Set the screen number in $SW0.
• Set the pop-up screen number in $SW1, 4 and 7.
(Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the PT Programming
Manual for details on the system memory.)
Turn ON the backlight by setting system memory bits
$SB6 to 8 for adjusting backlight brightness to ON. (Refer
to 2-4 System Memory in the PT Programming Manual
for details on the system memory.)
The backlight must be replaced. Contact your nearest
OMRON representative.
Increase the brightness of the backlight on the PT Setting
Tab Page of the System Menu.
If screens are opened and closed frequently, the display
update may take some time and communications may be
delayed.
Adjust the interval between screen switches so that the
system is not overloaded.
The backlight is OFF.
The display
update is slow.
The backlight has
malfunctioned.
The backlight is too
dark.
Screen switching,
opening and closing
pop-up screens, and
switching frames are
being performed
frequently.
The message
communications
interval is too long.
In the CX-Designer, select PT - Communication
Setting, click the Comm-All Tab, and set a shorter
communications interval. (For details, refer to System
Settings and Project Properties in the CX-Designer’s
Online Help.)
7-11
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Symptoms at
PT
Screens are
slow to
change.
Cause
Communications are
not possible with the
host.
The touch
panel does not
respond.
PT has malfunctioned
due to external noise.
The touch panel is
damaged.
The display is
dark.
The brightness setting
is too low.
The backlight is faulty
or its service life has
expired.
The communications
settings are incorrect.
Cannot enter
the device
monitor
function.
The PLC does not
support the device
monitor function.
Possible countermeasure
If a communications error is displayed, refer to 5-2-7
Communication Errors and Countermeasures in the NS
Series Programmable Terminals PROGRAMMING
MANUAL
(Cat. No. V073).
Communications errors will not be displayed if automatic
recovery is set for communications. If automatic recovery
is set, check if communications with the host are possible
using the communications test on the System Menu. If
more than one host is registered, test communications
with all of the hosts.
Reset the PT, and wire it according to noise prevention
measures.
Test the touch panel using the hardware check in the
System Menu. If an error has occurred, contact your
nearest OMRON representative.
Increase the backlight brightness in the PT Tab Page of
the System Menu.
The backlight must be replaced. Contact your nearest
OMRON representative.
When using the device monitor, set the communications
mode as follows:
• C-series PLCs:
1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Links
• CS1-series PLCs:
1:N NT Links (normal, high speed)
The device monitor function is not supported for Ethernet
or Controller Link.
The PLCs that support the device monitor function are
restricted. Check the PLC model being used.
(Refer to 6-8-4 Device Monitor.)
Errors during Object Operation
Symptoms at
PT
The numerical
and character
string update
is slow.
7-12
Cause
Communications are
unstable due to
external noise.
There are too many
Numeral Display &
Input objects and
String Display & Input
objects in the display.
For RS-422A
communications, the
branch is incorrect or
the terminating
resistance is not set
properly.
Possible countermeasure
Perform noise countermeasures such as separating
communications cables from power lines.
Reduce the number of Numeral Display & Input and
String Display & Input objects in the screen where update
is slow.
Wire correctly, referring to Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002
Converters.
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Symptoms at
PT
The numerical
and character
string update
is slow.
Cause
The host is
processing a large
volume of data and
the cycle time is
long.
The message
communications
interval is too long.
Some objects
in the screen
configuration
are not
displayed.
A communications
error has occurred.
The control flags
set in the object
include Hide
Display Flags.
The Log Flag
display does
not match the
actual log
timing.
The
communications
address set for the
event of log timing
is turning ON and
OFF at high speed.
The numerical
value input upper
and lower limit
check function is
running.
The control flags
set in the objects
include Input
Prohibit Flags.
Cannot input
numerical
values.
Cannot input
for some
functional
objects.
Cannot input
to any
functional
object.
Cannot move
to System
Menu.
The list
selection and
bitmap object
are blank.
A password has
been set.
PT is set to input
prohibit mode.
Moving to System
Menu is prohibited.
There is no
reference file.
The number of rows
specified in the first
row of the list
selection is above
the maximum.
Possible countermeasure
Shorten the host cycle time.
In the CX-Designer, select PT - Communication Setting,
click the Comm-All Tab, and set a shorter communications
interval. (For details, refer to System Settings and Project
Properties in the CX-Designer’s Online Help.)
Check the communications settings again.
Display the control flags for the objects set to be not
displayed, as follows:
Display the Expansion Tab from the functional object
property setting using the CX-Designer. Select Display from
Display/Hide in the Control Flags Tab Page.
Turn ON the indirect address of the control flag set for the
object.
Set the ON/OFF cycle of the communications address for
events to a longer time.
Display the Expansion Tab from the functional object
property setting using the CX-Designer. Check the set
values in the Input Upper and Lower Limits Tab Page and
correct if necessary.
Display the Expansion Tab from the functional object
property settings using the CX-Designer. Select Enable for
Input in the Control Flag Tab Page.
Turn ON the indirect address of the control flag set for the
object.
Input the password in the password input dialog box that is
displayed.
Set system memory bit $SB19 to OFF.
Touch the screen and input the password to cancel
disabling inputs.
Turn ON or OFF the touch switch lock control flag to enable
input. (Whether ON or OFF enables input depends on the
settings.)
Set system memory bit $SB3 to OFF.
Use the CX-Designer to check whether the folder storing
project data contains a reference file, and resend the screen
data to the PT.
Set the number of rows to less than the maximum.
7-13
7-4 Requesting a Replacement PT
7-4 Requesting a Replacement PT
Always observe the following precautions when faults are detected during inspection and the
PT is to be replaced.
• Create a backup of the PT project data.
Project data may be deleted when the PT is repaired by OMRON.
• Always turn OFF the power before replacing the PT.
• After replacing the PT, check to confirm that the new PT has no faults.
• When returning a faulty PT for repair, include a document with the Unit that provides as
many details on the fault as possible, and send to your OMRON representative.
7-14
A
Appendices
Appendix 1 Specifications..................................................................................................... A-3
A-1-1 General Specifications............................................................................................. A-3
A-1-2 Characteristics ......................................................................................................... A-5
A-1-3 Communications Specifications .............................................................................. A-8
Appendix 2 Dimensions ...................................................................................................... A-12
Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters .......................................................................... A-21
A-3-1 Dimensions............................................................................................................ A-21
A-3-2 Mounting and Removing....................................................................................... A-22
A-3-3 Specifications ........................................................................................................ A-22
A-3-4 DIP Switch Settings............................................................................................... A-23
A-3-5 Pin Arrangement ................................................................................................... A-24
A-3-6 Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables ....................................................... A-25
A-3-7 Connection Example ............................................................................................. A-28
Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters .......................................................................... A-29
A-4-1 Dimensions............................................................................................................ A-29
A-4-2 Methods for Mounting and Removal .................................................................... A-29
A-4-3 Specifications ........................................................................................................ A-31
A-4-4 DIP Switch Settings............................................................................................... A-32
A-4-5 Pin Arrangement ................................................................................................... A-33
A-4-6 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... A-34
Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables........................................................................... A-35
A-5-1 Cable Preparation .................................................................................................. A-35
A-5-2 Soldering ............................................................................................................... A-36
A-5-3 Hood Assembly ..................................................................................................... A-36
A-5-4 Preparing Connecting Cables for Host Connection............................................... A-37
Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection .................................................... A-41
A-6-1 Connecting Cable Assembly ................................................................................. A-41
Appendix 7 Preparing Connecting Cables for Bar Code Readers....................................... A-43
Appendix 8 Standard Models .............................................................................................. A-44
Appendix 9 List of Optional Products................................................................................. A-60
A-9-1 Anti-reflection Sheets: NS15-KBA04, NS12-KBA04, NS7-KBA04,
NT30-KBA04........................................................................................................ A-60
A-9-2 Protective Covers: NS15-KBA05N, NS12-KBA05(N), NS7-KBA05(N),
NT31C-KBA05(N)................................................................................................ A-61
A-1
A-9-3 NT30-KBA01 Chemical-resistant Cover .............................................................. A-62
A-9-4 Replacement Battery: CJ1W-BAT01 .................................................................... A-62
A-9-5 Recommended Memory Cards .............................................................................. A-63
A-9-6 NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface Unit ........................................................... A-63
A-9-7 NS-CA001/CA002 Video Input Unit .................................................................... A-63
A-9-8 Attachments: NS12-ATT01(B)/NS12-ATT02/NS8-ATT01/ NS8-ATT02 .......... A-63
A-9-9 NS-USBEXT-1M USB Relay Cable..................................................................... A-64
Appendix 10 System Memory List........................................................................................ A-65
Appendix 11 Differences between "-V1"/"-V2" Models and Other Models......................... A-68
Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu ........................................................................................... A-70
Appendix 1 Specifications
Appendix 1
A-1-1
Specifications
General Specifications
Specifications
Item
Rated power
supply voltage
Allowable
voltage range
Allowable input
power
interruption time
Power
consumption
Ambient
operating
temperature
Storage
temperature
Ambient
operating
humidity
Operating
environment
Noise immunity
Vibration
resistance
(during
operation)
Shock resistance
(during
operation)
Dimensions
Panel cutout
dimensions
NS15-TX01@-V2
NS12-TS0@-V1
NS12-TS0@-V2
NS10-TV0@-V1
NS10-TV0@-V2
NS8-TV@@-V1
NS8-TV0@-V2
NS5-SQ0@-V1
NS5-SQ@@-V2
NS5-TQ@@-V2
NS5-MQ@@-V2
24 VDC
20.4 to 27.6 VDC (24 VDC ±15%)
No restriction.
45 W max.
25 W max
15 W max.
0 to 50°C (See notes 1, 2, and 3.)
−20 to 60°C (See note 2.)
35% to 85% (0 to 40°C) with no condensation
35% to 60% (40 to 50°C) with no condensation
No corrosive gases.
Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 KV (power lines)
2
5 to 8.4 Hz with 3.5 10 to 57 Hz with 0.075 mm amplitude and 57 to 150 Hz with 9.8 m/s
mm single
acceleration for 30 min in each of X, Y, and Z directions
amplitude and 8.4
to 150 Hz with 9.8
2
m/s acceleration
10 times in each of
X, Y, and Z
directions
2
147 m/s 3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions.
405 × 304 ×
75.8 mm
(W × H × D)
Width 383.5 +10 ×
Height
282.5 +10 mm
Panel thickness:
1.6 to 4.8 mm
315 × 241 × 48.5 mm (W × H × D)
Width 302 +10 ×
Height
228 +10 mm
Panel thickness:
1.6 to 4.8 mm
Width 302 +10 ×
Height
228 +10 mm
Panel thickness:
1.6 to 4.8 mm
232 × 177 ×
48.5 mm
(W × H × D)
Width
220.5 +0.5
0 ×
Height 165.5 +0.5
0
mm
Panel thickness:
1.6 to 4.8 mm
2.0 kg max.
Front-panel
controls: IP65 oilproof type
195 × 142 ×
54 mm
(W × H × D)
Width 184 +0.5
0 ×
Height 131 +0.5
0
mm
Panel thickness:
1.6 to 4.8 mm
Weight
Enclosure rating
4.2 kg max.
2.5 kg max.
Front panel: IP65 oil-proof type (equivalent to NEMA4)
(See note 4.)
Battery life
5 years (at 25°C)
The SRAM and RTC will be backed up for 5 days after the battery runs low (indicator lights orange).
The SRAM and RTC will be backed up by a super capacitor for 5 minutes after removing the old
battery. (This assumes that the power is first turned ON for at least 5 minutes and then turned OFF.)
EC Directives
UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, EC Directives
International
standards
1.0 kg max.
Front panel: IP65
oil-proof type
(equivalent to
NEMA4)
(See note 4.)
Note 1. The operating temperature is subject to the following restrictions, depending on the
mounting angle and whether an Expansion Unit is installed or not.
A-3
Appendix 1 Specifications
• Without any Expansion Unit Installed
- NS15-V2/NS12-V1/-V2, NS10-V1/-V2, NS8-V1/-V2
Mounting angle of 0° to less than 30° to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 45°C
Mounting angle of 30° to 90° or less to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 50°C
- NS5-V1/-V2
Mounting angle of 0° to 90° or less to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 50°C
• With an Expansion Unit (Video Input Unit or Controller Link Unit) Installed
- NS15-V2/NS12-V1/-V2, NS10-V1/-V2
Mounting angle of 0° to less than 30° to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 35°C
Mounting angle of 30° to 90° or less to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 50°C
- NS8-V1/-V2
Mounting angle of 0° to less than 30° to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 35°C
Mounting angle of 30° to less than 90° to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 45°C
Mounting angle of 90° to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 50°C
90°
Display surface
30°
Horizontal 0°
Operate the PT within the temperature and humidity ranges shown in the following
diagram.
Humidity (RH)
Wet-bulb temperature (°C)
2.
Storage
Operating
Temperature (°C)
3. When a STN LCD display device is used, the display quality will decline (e.g., the contrast
ratio will be reduced) if the temperature exceeds 40°C. Also, when the temperature drops,
the response speed is lowered due to characteristics of liquid crystals.
This applies to the following models. Refer to NS-series PT Lot Numbers on page A-8 for
information on lot numbers.
Display device
PT model
Color STN LCD
NS5-SQ0@-V1
NS5-SQ@@-V2 with lot number earlier than 2110
Monochrome STN LCD
NS5-MQ@@-V2
4. May not be applicable in locations with long-term exposure to oil.
A-4
Appendix 1 Specifications
A-1-2
Characteristics
Display Specifications
Item
Display panel
(See note 5.)
Display device
Number of
dots
Display color
Display area
View angle
Backlight (See
note 4.)
Life
expectancy
Brightness
adjustment
Backlight error
detection
Front panel
indicators
RUN
Rear panel
indicators
MCPWR
Specifications
NS12-TS0@NS10-TV0@V1
V1
NS15-TX01@-V2
NS8-TV@@-V1
NS8-TV0@-V2
NS12-TS0@NS10-TV0@V2
V2
High-definition TFT color LCD
1024 dot horizontal 800 dot
640 dot horizontal × 480 dot vertical
× 768 dot vertical
horizontal ×
600 dot
vertical
256 colors (32,768 colors for BMP/JPEG images, NS5: 4,096 colors for BMP/JPEG images)
Width 304.1 mm ×
Width 246.0
Width 215.2
Width 162.2
Width 170.9 mm ×
height 228.1 mm
mm × height
mm × height
mm × height
height 128.2 mm
(15.0 inches)
184.5 mm
162.4 mm
121.7 mm
(8.4 inches)
(12.1 inches)
(10.4 inches)
(8.0 inches)
Left 80°,
-V1:
-V1:
Left 60°,
Left 80°,
Right 80°,
Left 60°,
Left 60°,
Right 60°,
Right 80°,
Top 70°,
Right 60°,
Right 60°,
Top 50°,
Top 80°,
Bottom 60°
Top 45°,
Top 35°,
Bottom 60°
Bottom 60°
Bottom 55°,
Bottom 65°,
-V2:
-V2:
Left 80°,
Left 70°,
Right 80°,
Right 70°,
Top 80°,
Top 65°,
Bottom 80°
Bottom 65°
50,000 hours min. (See note 1.)
40,000 hours
50,000 hours min.
min. (See
(See note 1.)
note 1.)
There are 3 levels or 32 levels of adjustment that you can make by operating the touch panel.
(See note 9.)
Error is detected automatically, and the RUN indicator
No detection
Error is detected
flashes green as notification. (See note 3.)
function.
automatically, and
the RUN indicator
flashes green as
notification.
(See note 3.)
Lit green:
PT is operating normally.
Flashing green:
The Memory Card transfer has ended normally or a backlight error was
detected immediately after power was turned ON. (Backlight errors are not
detected for the NS8-V1.)
Lit orange:
Immediately after power turns ON, indicates file
system check in progress, battery low, or disconnected and operating
normally.
Flashing orange:
Memory Card transfer in progress.
Flashing red:
Memory Card transfer has ended abnormally.
Lit green:
Memory Card
power ON.
None
Green not lit:
Memory Card
power OFF.
A-5
Appendix 1 Specifications
Item
Specifications
NS5-SQ0@-V1
Display panel
(See note 5.)
Display device
STN color LCD
Number of dots
Display color
Display area
View angle
Backlight
(See note 4.)
Life expectancy
Brightness
adjustment
Front panel
indicators
Backlight error
detection
RUN
NS5-SQ@@-V2
(See note 6.)
TFT color LCD
NS5-TQ@@-V2
High-luminance TFT
color LCD (See note
7.)
NS5-MQ@@-V2
Monochrome STN LCD
320 dot horizontal × 240 dot vertical
256 colors (4,096
256 colors (32,768 colors for BMP/JPEG
Monochrome/16
colors for
images)
grayscale levels
BMP/JPEG images)
Width 117.2 mm × Height 88.4 mm (5.7 inches)
Left 50°,
Left 80°,
Left 45°,
Right 50°,
Right 80°,
Right 45°,
Top 30°,
Top 80°,
Top 20°,
Bottom 50°
Bottom 60°
Bottom 40°
50,000 hours min.
75,000 hours min. (See note 1.)
50,000 hours min. (See
(See note 1.)
note 1.)
The brightness can
The brightness can be adjusted to any of 3
The brightness can be
be adjusted to any
levels or any of 32 levels by operating the
adjusted to any of 3
of 3 levels by
touch panel. (See note 8.)
levels by operating the
operating the touch
touch panel.
panel. (See note 2.)
(See note 2.)
No detection
Error is detected automatically, and the RUN indicator flashes green as
function.
notification. (See note 3.)
Lit green:
PT is operating normally.
Flashing green:
The Memory Card transfer has ended normally or a backlight error was
detected immediately after power was turned ON. (Backlight errors are not
detected for the NS5-V1.)
Lit orange:
Immediately after power turns ON, indicates file system check in progress,
battery low, or disconnected and operating normally.
Flashing orange:
Memory Card transfer in progress.
Note 1. This is the estimated time before brightness is reduced by half at room temperature and
humidity. It is not a guaranteed value. (It is based on the middle brightness setting using
the NS8.)
The life expectancy will be drastically shortened if PT is used at low temperatures. For
example, using the PT at temperatures of 0°C will reduce the life expectancy to
approximately 10,000 hours (reference value).
2. The brightness cannot be adjusted much.
3. This function does not detect service life expectancy.
It detects when the backlight is not lit due to a disconnection or other errors. Backlight
error detection indicates that all backlights are OFF.
4. Contact your nearest OMRON representative to replace the backlight.
5. There may be some defective pixels in the display. This is not a fault as long as the
numbers of defective light and dark pixels fall within the following standard ranges.
Model
NS15-TX01@-V2
NS12-TS@@-V1/-V2
NS10-TV@@-V1/-V2
NS8-TV@@-V1/-V2
NS5-SQ@@-V1/-V2
NS5-MQ@@-V2
NS5-TQ@@-V2
6.
Standard range
Number of light and dark pixels:
10 or less. (Must not be 3 consecutive.)
Number of light and dark pixels:
4 or fewer defects the size of 0.2 < (minor axis + major axis)
/ 2 ≤ 0.55 mm (within 1 per 20-mm square)
Specifications are as follows for NS5-SQ@@-V2 PTs with lot number 2110 (manufactured
January 21, 2010) or earlier.
Item
Specification
Display device
STN color LCD
Display colors
256 colors (4,096 colors for BMP/JPEG images)
View angle
Left 50°, Right 50°, Top 45°, Bottom 50°
Refer to NS-series PT Lot Numbers on page A-8 for information on lot numbers.
A-6
Appendix 1 Specifications
7.
8.
9.
The NS5-TQ PTs (high-luminance TFT LCDs) are approx. 70 cd/m2 brighter than the
NS5-SQ PTs (TFT LCDs).
Lot number 14Z0 or earlier can be adjusted to only one of three levels.
NS8 PTs with lot number 27X1 or earlier can be adjusted to only three levels. NS10 PTs
with lot number 10Y1 or earlier can be adjusted to only three levels. NS12 PTs with lot
number 13Z1 or earlier can be adjusted to only three levels. NS15 PTs with lot number
30114 or earlier can be adjusted to only three levels.
Operating Specifications
Item
Specifications
NS15-TX01@V2
Touch panel
NS12-TS0@V1/
NS12-TS0@-V2
NS8-TV@@-V1/
NS8-TV@@-V2
NS5-SQ0@-V1
NS5-SQ@@-V2
NS5-TQ@@-V2
NS5-MQ@@-V2
Number of
switches: 768
(32 horizontal ×
24 vertical)
20 × 20 dots for
each switch.
(Matrix type)
Number of
switches: 300
(20 horizontal ×
15 vertical)
16 × 16 dots for
each switch.
(Matrix type)
NS8-TV@@-V1
NS5-SQ0@-V1
NS5-SQ0@-V2
NS5-TQ0@-V2
NS5-MQ0@-V2
NS8-TV0@-V1:
6 MB
NS8-TV1@-V1:
20 MB
6 MB
20 MB
NS10-TV0@V1/
NS10-TV0@-V2
Method: Resistive membrane
Vertical and
Number of
Number of
horizontal
switches: 1900
switches: 1200
resolution: 1024 (50 horizontal ×
(40 horizontal ×
Three function
38 vertical)
30 vertical)
16 × 16 dots for
16 × 16 dots for
keys (Analog)
each switch.
each switch.
(Matrix type)
(Matrix type)
Input: Pressure-sensitive
Service life: 1,000,000 touch operations.
Data Capacity Specifications
Item
Standard screen
data
capacity
NS15-TX01@V2
NS12-TS0@-V2
NS10-TV0@-V2
NS8-TV0@-V2
60 MB
NS12-TS0@-V1
NS10-TV0@-V1
20 MB
External Interface Specifications
Item
Specifications
NS15-TX01@-V2
USB HOST
USB Slave
Memory card
interface
Expansion
interface
(See note 1.)
Analog RGB
output
External
brightness
adjustment
NS12-TS0@-V1/-V2
NS10-TV0@-V1/-V2
NS8-TV@@-V1/-V2
1 port (for connecting printers)
1 port (screen data transfer, connection to
computer, connection to printer) (NS-V2 only)
NS5-SQ0@-V1/-V2
NS5-TQ0@-V2
NS5-MQ0@-V2
None
1 port (screen data
transfer, connection
to computer)
NS5-SQ1@-V2
NS5-TQ1@-V2
NS5-MQ1@-V2
1 port (screen data
transfer, connection
to computer,
connection to
printer)
1 ATA-Compact Flash interface slot.
Used to transfer and store screen data and to store history data.
For Expansion Interface Units
For Expansion Interface Units
Used to install a Controller Link Interface Unit
Used to install Expansion Units specially
or Video Input Unit.
designed for the NS5.
1 port (connects to
--an LCD monitor)
Used to adjust
--brightness externally
(See note 2.)
Note 1. This interface is for NS-series PTs only. Units not specified in this manual cannot be
installed.
2. This applies to lot numbers 30114 and earlier.
A-7
Appendix 1 Specifications
Programming Device (Software for Creating Screen Data)
Item
Specifications
Name
Model
CX-Designer
NS-CXDC1-V@
NS-series PT Lot Numbers
The four-digit lot number that is given on the back of an NS-series PT can be used to
check the manufacturing date of PTs that were manufactured on May 31, 2012 or earlier.
Lot No. 1 0
2 0
The rightmost digit of the year, 2010 in this example
The month of manufacture, February in this example
(1 to 9 = January to September, X to Z = October to December)
The day of the month of manufacture, the 10th in this example
The five-digit lot number that is given on the back of an NS-series PT can be used to
check the manufacturing date of PTs that were manufactured on June 1, 2012 or later.
Lot No. 0 1
6 12
The rightmost two digits of the year, 2012 in this example
The month of manufacture, June in this example
(1 to 9 = January to September, X to Z = October to December)
The day of the month of manufacture, the 1st in this example
A-1-3
Communications Specifications
• Serial Communications
Item
Specifications
Port A
Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
D-Sub female 9-pin connector
5-V output (250 mA max.) through pin 6
(See note 1.)
Port B
Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
D-Sub female 9-pin connector (See note 2.)
5-V output (250 mA max.) through pin 6.
(See note 1.)
Conforms to EIA RS-422/RS-485 (insulated) (NS15 only)
7-pin connector
Note 1: The 5-V output of serial ports A and B cannot be used at the same time.
Note 2: With the NS5, the Expansion Interface on the Comm Tab Page in the System Menu
settings can be set to use a communications port in the expansion interface connector.
The expansion interface, however, is a future expansion, which cannot yet be used.
Always use the serial port B connector (D-Sub female 9-pin connector).
• 1:1 NT Link
Item
Communications standards
Connectors
Number of Units connected
Transmission distance
A-8
Specifications
Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
D-Sub female 9-pin connector (Serial ports A and B)
1:1
Up to 15 m. (See note 1.)
Appendix 1 Specifications
• 1:N NT Links
Item
Communications standards
Connectors
Number of Units connected
Transmission distance
Specifications
Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
D-Sub female 9-pin connector
(Serial ports A and B)
1:1 to 8
Up to 15 m. (See note 2.)
Note 1. When using an NS-AL002 Adapter, the transmission distance is as follows:
RS-422A cable: Up to 500 m total extended length.
2. The NS-AL002 is required when connecting two or more PTs to the host.
RS-422A cable: Up to 500 m total extended length.
• Bar Code Reader
Item
Communications
standards
Communications
settings
Ports that can be
connected
Number of Units
connected
Transmission
distance
Communications
protocol
Data format
Power supply
Specifications
Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate: 4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps
Data length: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bits: 1 or 2 bits
Parity: None, odd, or even
Flow control: RS/CS control
Either port A or port B only.
1:1
Using PT serial port and D-Sub 6-pin Using external power supply
2m
15 m
No protocol mode
[STX]
Data (0 to 254 bytes)
[ETX]
Using PT serial port and D-Sub 6-pin Using external power supply
Depends on Bar Code Reader
5 V ±5% 250 mA max.
specifications.
● Ethernet Specifications (NS15-TX01@-V2, NS12-TS01(B)-V1, NS10TV01(B)-V1, NS8-TV@1(B)-V1, NS5-SQ01(B)-V1, NS5-SQ@1(B)-V2, NS5TQ@1(B)-V2, NS5-MQ@1(B)-V2)
Item
Conformance standards
Transmission medium
Transmission distance
Connector
Specifications
Conforms to IEEE 802.3 / Ethernet (10/100Base-T).
2 pair Cat 3 UTP 22 to 26AWG, Cat 5, Cat 5e, Cat 6
100 m (node-to-hub and hub-to-hub)
8-pin modular connector
A-9
Appendix 1 Specifications
• Ethernet
Item
Network address
Node address
UDP port number
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
IP proxy address
Conversion table
Specifications
1 to 127
1 to 254
1024 to 65535 (See note 1.)
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (See note 2.)
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
“”(blank), 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Node address: 1 to 253
IP address: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Note 1. The default UDP port number is 9600.
2. Do not set the following values for the IP address.
• Host ID with all bits set to 0 or 1.
(Example: 192.168.21.0)
• Net ID with all bits set to 0 or 1.
(Example: 255.255.21.16)
• Subnet ID with all bits set to 1.
(Example: 192.168.255.16)
• IP addresses that begin with 127. (Example: 127.35.21.16)
EtherNet/IP Specifications
Item
Conformance standards
Transmission medium
Transmission distance
Connector
Specifications
Conforms to IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet (10/100Base-T)
Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable, Category 5, 5e, or higher
100 m (node-to-hub and hub-to-hub)
8-pin modular connector
Controller Link Specifications (with NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface
Unit Mounted)
Item
Communications method
Code
Modulation
Synchronization
Transmission path type
Baud rate and maximum
transmission distance
Media
Connections to nodes
Max. number of nodes
Communications
functions
Number of data link
words
Data link areas
Message length
A-10
Specification
N:N token bus
Manchester code
Baseband code
Flag synchronization (conforming to HDLC frames)
Multidrop (bus)
The maximum transmission distances depends on the baud rate setting as
follows:
2 Mbits/s: 500 m
1 Mbits/s: 800 m
500 Kbits/s: 1 km
Specified shielded twisted-pair cable
2 signal lines and 1 shield
PLCs:
Connected via terminal block
Personal computers: Connected via special connector (provided)
32 modes
Data links and message service
• Transmission area per node:
1,000 words max. (2,000 bytes)
• Send/receive data link areas per SYSMAC CS-series PLC:
12,000 words max. (24,000 bytes)
• Send/receive data link areas per SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, or
CV-series PLC:
8,000 words max. (16,000 bytes)
• Send/receive data link areas per personal computer:
32,000 words max. (64,000 bytes)
• Total send data link words on entire network:
32,000 words max. (64,000 bytes)
Bit (CIO, and LR Area), data memory (DM Area), expansion data memory (EM
Area)
2,012 bytes max.
Appendix 1 Specifications
Item
RAS functions
Specification
• Polling unit backup function
• Self-diagnosis (hardware check at startup)
• Internode tests and broadcast test (via FINS commands)
• Watchdog timer
• Error log
Manchester code check
CRC check (CCITT X16+X12+X5+1)
Error correction
Note: A Controller Link Interface Unit can be used only for the NS15, NS12, and NS10 NSseries PTs.
• Video Input Specifications
Item
Specifications
Input system
NTSC (RS-170A compliant) or PAL
Scanning system (See note.)
Interlaced
Input signal
1.0 V p-p 75 Ω
Signal input connector
BNC connector
Note: The NS-series PTs do not support progressive scanning (i.e., non-interlaced scanning)
Item
Model
Dimensions
Weight
Ambient operating
temperature
Specifications
NS-CA001
NS-CA002
150 x 90 x 21 mm (WxHxD)
150 x 102 x 22 mm (WxHxD)
0.5 kg or less
• NS12-V1/-V2 and NS10-V1/-V2
• NS12-V1/-V2, NS10-V1/-V2,
Mounting angle of 0° or greater but and NS8-V1/-V2
less than 30° to horizontal: 0 to
Mounting angle of 0° or
35°C
greater but less than 30° to
Mounting angle of 30° or greater
horizontal: 0 to 35°C
but less than 90° to horizontal: 0 to
Mounting angle of 30° or
50°C
greater but less than 90° to
• NS8-V1/-V2
horizontal: 0 to 45°C
Mounting angle of 90° to
Mounting angle of 0° or greater but
horizontal: 0 to 50°C
less than 30° to horizontal: 0 to
35°C
Mounting angle of 30° min. but less
than 90° to horizontal plane: 0 to
45°C
Mounting angle of 90° to
horizontal: 0 to 50°C
Ambient storage
−20 to 60°C
temperature
Ambient operating
35% to 85% (with no condensation)
humidity
Rated power supply Power supply used from NS-series PT expansion interface connector
voltage (See note.)
(5 V ±5%, 3.3 V ±5%).
Ambient operating
No corrosive gases.
atmosphere
Vibration resistance Conforms to NS-series PT specifications.
Shock resistance
Conforms to NS-series PT specifications.
Note: You can still use 5 V from either port A or port B on the NS-series PT after you mount a
Video Unit on the PT.
A-11
Appendix 2 Dimensions
Appendix 2
Dimensions
● NS15
(Includes Mounting Dimensions)
Mounting panel
Mounting bracket
Note: The NS15 conforms to version-2 hardware standards.
With Controller Link Interface Unit Mounted
A-12
With Video Input Unit Mounted
Mounting panel
Mounting panel
Mounting bracket
Mounting bracket
Appendix 2 Dimensions
NS15 Cable Connection Dimensions
NS15 Video Board (NS-CA001) Mounted Dimensions
NS15 Controller Link Interface Unit Mounted Dimensions
A-13
Appendix 2 Dimensions
● NS12-V1/-V2, NS10-V1/-V2
(Includes Mounting Dimensions)
Mounting panel
Mounting bracket
39 (min.)
42 (max.)
(Unit: mm)
With Controller Link Interface Unit Mounted
M o u n tin g p a n e l
M o u n tin g b ra cke t
M o u n tin g b ra cke t
3 9 (m in .)
4 2 (m a x.)
A-14
With Video Input Unit Mounted
M o u n tin g p a n e l
3 9 (m in .)
4 2 (m a x.)
Appendix 2 Dimensions
NS12-V1/-V2, NS10-V1/-V2 Cable Connection Dimensions
NS12-V1/-V2 and NS10-V1/-V2 Video Board (NS-CA001) Mounted Dimensions
NS12-V1/-V2 and NS10-V1/-V2 Video Board (NS-CA002) Mounted Dimensions
A-15
Appendix 2 Dimensions
NS12-V1/-V2 and NS10-V1/-V2 Controller Link Interface Unit Mounted Dimensions
NS12/NS10 (without "V1") Cable Connection Dimensions
31.5
30.8
90.2
4.3
59.4
103
69.5
A-16
20
60
Appendix 2 Dimensions
NS8-V1/NS8-V2 Main Unit Dimensions (Mounted)
Mounting panel
Mounting bracket
15.5
39 min.
42 max.
(Unit: mm)
A-17
Appendix 2 Dimensions
NS8-V1/ NS8-V2 Cable Connection Dimensions
9.6
50.1
31.13
32.49
33.6
33.28
64.55
59.3
9.2
43.2
26.6
44.1
63.4
91
NS8-V1/-V2 Video Board (NS-CA001) Mounted Dimensions
149
68.3
8.7
45.3
27.3
58.2
59.1
48.4
36.8
89.3
9.3
NS8-V1/-V2 Video Board (NS-CA002) Mounted Dimensions
149
59.4
19.6
A-18
58.9
1.57
58.2
59.6
68.9
48
36.2
37.3
89.3
23.9
Appendix 2 Dimensions
NS7 Cable Connection Dimensions
26.6
50.1
31.13
32.49
33.6
33.28
64.55
59.3
9.2
43.2
44.1
63.4
91
NS5-V1/-V2 Dimensions (Includes Mounting Dimensions)
Mounting panel
Mounting bracket
A-19
Appendix 2 Dimensions
NS5-V1/-V2 Cable Connection Dimensions
A-20
Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters
Appendix 3
Using NS-AL002 Converters
The NS-AL002 RS-232C/RS-422A Converter is connected directly to RS-232C port A or
B of the PT, and converts RS-232C communications to RS-422A/RS-485. Any of the
Converters listed in Appendix 9 Standard Models can be used. A summary of the NSAL002 external dimensions, mounting and removal methods, and specifications is
provided here. Refer to this information when designing the control panel. Refer to the
Instruction Sheet included with the NS-AL002 for details.
The NS-AL002 is an uninsulated RS-232C/RS-422A Converter. Therefore, if
differences in ground potential or effects from noise are concerns, it is
recommended that an insulated NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A Converter be
used instead. For details, refer to Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters.
Precautions
for Correct Use
Dimensions
42
Mounting screws (2)
49
A-3-1
45
12
28.5
A-21
Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters
A-3-2
Mounting and Removing
Connect the NS-AL002 directly to port A or port B of the PT. Two NS-AL002 Adapters
cannot be connected to ports A and B simultaneously.
Mount the Adapter by tightening and securing the mounting screws on both of the D-Sub
connectors. The correct tightening torque is 0.3 N⋅m. The correct tightening torque for the
terminal block is 0.5 N⋅m.
To remove the Adapter, loosen the screws and pull out the Adapter.
A-3-3
Precautions
for Safe Use
• Always turn OFF the power to the PT before removing the Adapter.
• Do not touch the surface or the mounted parts of the Board with bare hands.
Always discharge any static electricity from your body before handling the
Board.
Precautions
for Correct Use
• Mount to the PT after securely connecting the cable to the terminal block.
Be sure to tighten the mounting screws on both of the D-Sub connectors. If
the screws are loose, the FG terminals of the PT and NS-AL002 will not be
connected.
Specifications
The following table shows the general specifications and communications specifications
of the Adapter.
General Specifications
Item
Dimensions
Weight
Ambient operating temperature
Storage temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Rated power supply
Power consumption
Operating environment
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Specifications
45 × 49 × 28.5 mm (W × H × D)
50 g max.
0 to 50°C
−20 to 60°C
35% to 85% (without condensation)
5 V ±10% (through pin 6 of the RS-232C connector)
150 mW max.
No corrosive gases.
Conforms to PT specifications.
Conforms to PT specifications.
Reference NS-series RS-485 (two-wire) communications are used to connect to an OMRON
Temperature Controller. The NS-AL002 cannot be used with the NT-series PTs or
PLCs.
Communications Specifications
• RS-422A Interface
Item
Specifications
Baud rate
115.2 kbps max.
Transmission distance
500 m total length (See note 1.)
Terminal block format
8-terminal terminal block, M3.0
Insulation
No insulation (See note 2.)
Note 1: This specification is for a configuration in which all the Adapters connected on the same
transmission path are NT-AL002 Link Adapters. If a CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion Adapter is
used, the total length is 50 m.
Note 2: The RS-422A and RS-232C are not insulated.
A-22
Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters
A-3-4
DIP Switch Settings
The NS-AL002 Adapter has four DIP switch pins for setting the RS-422A communications
conditions.
Set the DIP switch pins before connecting the cables to the Adapter.
The factory setting for the DIP switch is all pins set to OFF.
Pin
Pin 1
Pins 2 and 3
Pin 4
Function
Transmission mode
Two-wire/four-wire method selection
Terminating resistance
ON
RS/CS control
Two-wire method
Yes
OFF
Normal transmission
Four-wire method
None
For 1:1 NT Link, set the RS-422A transmission mode to normal transmission (pin 1 OFF).
For 1:N NT Links (normal, high speed), set the RS-422A transmission mode to RS/CS
control (pin 1 ON).
Note
• Use the following DIP switch settings when connecting a CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion
Adapter to the PT.
Pin
Pin 1
Function
Terminating resistance selection
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Two-wire/four-wire method selection
Two-wire/four-wire method selection
Not used.
Selection of RS control for RD
Selection of RS control for SD
Setting
ON: Terminating resistance enabled
OFF: Terminating resistance disabled
OFF (four-wire)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF
OFF (no RS control)
ON (RS control)
• When a CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion Adapter is used, the total transmission length is 50 m.
• If NT-001/NT-002 Link Adapters are used together with CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion
Adapters on the same transmission path, the total transmission length is also 50 m.
• For details, refer to the Appendix G in the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual (Cat.
No. W393).
Precautions
for Correct Use
Make sure that both of the mounting screws on the D-Sub connector are
tightened to a torque of 0.3 N⋅m.
A-23
Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters
A-3-5
Pin Arrangement
The Adapter has a connector for RS-232C interface connection and a terminal block for
RS-422A/485 interface connection.
The pin arrangements for the RS-232C connector and RS-422A/485 terminal block are as
follows:
RS-232C Connector
Terminal block Signal name
pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
NC
RD
SD
CS
RS
5V
(30 mA max.)
7 or 8
NC
9
SG
Connector hood FG
Signal direction
Adapter ⇔ PT
←
→
← (RS signal short-circuited internally)
→
←
(Pins 7 and 8 are short-circuited.)
−
Connects to functional ground terminal of PT.
RS-422A Terminal Block
Terminal block
pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A-24
Signal name
FG
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
RSB (+)
NC
RDA (−)
SDA (−)
RSA (−)
Signal direction
Adapter ⇔ Host
Connects to functional ground terminal of PT.
←
→
→
--←
→
→
Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters
Crimp Terminals
Use M3 crimp terminals.
Forked type
Round type
6.2 mm max.
6.2 mm max.
Applicable Crimp Terminal Examples
Forked type
Manufacturer
J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Molex
Model
V1.25-N3A
VSY1.25-3.5L
Recommended cable size
AWG22 to 16 (0.25 to 1.65 mm2)
AWG22 to 16 (0.3 to 1.65 mm2)
Model
V1.25-MS3
RAV1.25-3
Recommended cable size
AWG22 to 16 (0.25 to 1.65 mm2)
AWG22 to 16 (0.3 to 1.65 mm2)
Round type
Manufacturer
J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Molex
Recommended Cable
Manufacturer
Tachii Electric Wire Co., Ltd.
HIRAKAWA HEWTECH CORP.
A-3-6
Model
TKV VBS3P-03T
CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2
Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables
Perform the following procedures to connect, process the shield, and connect to ground
for communications systems using the NS-AL002. Incorrect connection may result in
communications errors with the host.
Connecting the NS-AL002 D-Sub Connector
Always securely tighten the screws on both sides of the D-Sub connector. Otherwise, the
functional ground terminal (FG: ) of the PT will not be properly connected to the
functional ground of the NS-AL002.
Connecting the Ground Wire
The PT has a functional ground terminal (FG: ).
1. Ground according to Figure (a) for normal grounding.
• Connect the ground terminal (GR) of the devices to the functional ground (FG: ).
Make sure that each signal line is grounded at only one point and ground to 100 Ω max.
• Short the LG terminal of the PLC to the ground terminal (GR).
• Use a wire gauge of at least 2 mm2 for the ground wire.
• Refer to the manual for individual Communications Units for details on proper wiring
procedures.
2. Do not ground the functional ground (FG: ) of the PT if it is mounted to the same
panel as devices that generate noise, such as motors or inverters, as shown in Figure
(b).
A-25
Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters
Preparing the Shield of RS-422A/485 Connectors
Always prepare RS-422A/485 cable shields properly. Otherwise, communications errors
may occur with the host.
Ground only one end of the shield when connecting the ground terminal (GR) of the
devices to the functional ground (FG: ), and grounding each signal line at only one
point and to 100 Ω max, as shown in Figure (a).
Ground both ends of the shield when not grounding the functional ground (FG: ) of the
PT, as shown in Figure (b).
When using the CJ1W-CIF11 or when using the NT-AL001/NS-AL002 together with the
CJ1W-CIF11, always performs connections, shield processing, and grounding as shown
in Figure (b).
A-26
Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters
Example of Recommended Wiring
Figure (a)
Figure (b)
CPU Rack
CPU Unit or
Communications Unit
CPU Rack
Power
supply
Unit
CPU Unit or
Communications Unit
Power
supply
Unit
LG
GR
LG
GR
PT
PT
RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485
FG
FG
NS-AL002
NS-AL002
Signal line
Signal line
PT
PT
FG
FG
NS-AL002
NS-AL002
PT
PT
FG
NS-AL002
FG
NS-AL002
A-27
Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters
A-3-7
Connection Example
An example of connecting a PLC and a PT using an RS-232C/RS-422A Converter is
shown below. Use the wiring example as reference for correct wiring.
CPU Rack
Built-in RS-232C
port on PCU unit
RS-422A Converter
(CJ1W-CIF11)
PT (unit No. 0)
PT (unit No. 1)
RS-422A Converter
(NS-AL002)
RS-422A Converter
(NS-AL002)
1:N NT Link
Wiring Example
Note: Refer to A-3-6 Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables for information on processing
the shield wire on the RS-442A/485 cable.
A-28
Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters
Appendix 4
Using NT-AL001 Converters
This section outlines the external dimensions, procedure for mounting and removal, and
specifications of an NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A Converter. Refer to this information
when designing the control panel. For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with
the NT-AL001.
A-4-1
Dimensions
110
30 (W) ×114 (H) × 100.2 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
30 (W) ×114 (H) × 119.5 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover open
A-4-2
Methods for Mounting and Removal
The RS-232/RS-422 converter unit (NT-AL001) can be mounted on a DIN rail or in an
operation panel.
The RS-422A terminal block of the converter unit can be easily removed.
Mounting to a DIN Rail
Latch the top part of the rear face of the converter unit (a in the figure) onto the top edge
of the DIN rail, and push the unit in the direction indicated by b in the figure.
Now fit end plates at the right and left of the converter unit to secure it and ensure that it
cannot shift laterally.
A-29
Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters
Removal from a DIN Rail
Remove the end plates at right and left of the converter unit and, as shown in the figure
below, insert a flat blade screwdriver into the rail stopper at the bottom face of the
converter unit and prize it free.
Mounting to an Operation Panel
Drill two mounting screw holes in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm
(0.08 inch) and secure the converter unit with screws.
Precautions
for Safe Use
A-30
In order to ensure a secure and strong mount, mount the converter unit in an
operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch).
Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters
A-4-3
Specifications
The general specifications and communications specifications of the converter unit are
shown below.
General Specifications
Item
Dimensions
Weight
Operating ambient
temperature
Operating ambient
humidity
Rated power supply
voltage
Rated power supply
current
Rush current
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Operating
environment
Storage ambient
temperature
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Specification
30 (W) × 114(H) × 100.2(D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover
closed
30 (W) ×114(H) × 119.5(D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover
open
200 g max.
0 to 55 °C
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
+5 V ±10% (using pin No. 6 of the RS-232C connector)
150 mA max.
0.8 A max.
20 MΩ or higher, measured between all RS-422A terminal signal lines
collectively and functional ground terminal with a 500 VDC Megger Tester.
1500 VAC for 1 minute between all RS-422A terminal signal lines
collectively and functional ground terminal
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
No corrosive gases
−20 to 75°C
Conforms to JIS C0911 60 minutes in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Conforms to JIS C0912 147 m/s2, 3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions
Communications Specifications
RS-232C Interface
Item
Communications speed
Transmission distance
Connector
115.2k max. bps
2 m max.
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
RS-422A/485 Interface
Item
Communications speed
Transmission distance
Connector
Specification
115.2k max. bps (depends on the RS-232C communications speed)
500 m max.
8-terminal detachable terminal block, M3.0
Specification
A-31
Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters
A-4-4
DIP Switch Settings
The converter unit has 6 digits DIP switch for setting the RS-422A/485 communication
conditions.
Before connecting the cable to the converter unit, make the DIP switch settings.
When using the host link or 1:1 NT Link, set the RS-422A send mode to continual
sending (set both SW1-5 and 6 OFF).
When using the 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed), set the RS-422A send mode to
comply with CS control of RS-232C (i.e., one of SW1-5 and SW1-6 must be ON).
Precautions
for Safe Use
A-32
• Do not set both SW1-5 and SW1-6 ON at the same time. This may damage
internal circuits.
• The power supply to the device supplying +5 V must be turned OFF before
starting wiring work.
• Before connecting the RS-232C cable and turning on the power to an RS232C device such as a PT (i.e., turning on the power to the converter unit),
check that the cable is wired correctly and that the DIP switch settings are
correct. If the power is turned on while there is a wiring fault, the internal
circuits of the converter unit or the RS-232C device may be damaged.
• When the converter unit is connected to a C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE), CQM1H,
CS1G/H model of OMRON PLC as an RS-422A device, set DIP switches
SW1-5 and SW1-6 as indicated below.
Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters
A-4-5
Pin Arrangement
The converter unit has a terminal block for an RS-422A/485 interface connection and a
connector for an RS-232C interface connection.
The pin arrangements for the RS-422A/485 terminal block and the RS-232C connector
are as follows.
RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
RS-232C Connector
A-33
Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters
A-4-6
Block Diagram
A diagram showing the internal blocks of the converter unit is shown below. Refer to this
diagram when making cables yourself, or when connecting devices with special interfaces.
A-34
Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables
Appendix 5
Preparing Connecting Cables
Use the following procedure to prepare connecting cables.
Refer to this cable preparation method to prepare cables for the RS-232C/RS-422A
Converter.
A-5-1
Cable Preparation
1. Cut the cables to the required length.
2. Remove the vinyl cable covering using a razor blade or other tool.
Use care not to damage the shield (braided mesh).
3. Cut the shield using scissors.
4. Strip back to the core of each wire using a stripper.
5. Bend back the shields.
6. Wrap the section of the shields that is bent back with aluminum foil tape.
(Unit: mm)
Aluminum foil tape
A-35
Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables
A-5-2
Soldering
1. Pass a heat-shrinking tube over each wire.
2. Pre-solder each wire and connector terminal.
3. Solder each of the wires to the connector terminals.
Soldering iron
Heat-shrinking tube
Internal diameter: 1.5
Length = 10
4. Replace the heat-shrinking tube up to the soldered section, and shrink the tube onto
the wire by applying heat using a soldering gun.
Heat-shrinking tube
A-5-3
Hood Assembly
Assemble the hood as shown in the following diagram.
End with Connector
A-36
Aluminum foil tape
End without Connector
Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables
A-5-4
Preparing Connecting Cables for Host Connection
Refer to the following information when preparing the connecting cables for connecting
the PT to the host.
Wiring Layout between PT and Host (RS-232C)
PT
Signal Pin No.
Connector
food
Shield
RS232C
connector
Host
Pin No. Signal
Connector
food
RS232C
connector
9-pin connector
9-pin connector
Wiring Layout between NS-AL002 and Host (RS-422A)
Host
NS-AL002
RS-422A cable
When connecting individual signals with twisted-pair cable, connect RDA and RDB, and
SDA and SDB, as pairs in the twisted-pair cable. A communications error may occur if the
pairs are not combined correctly.
A-37
Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables
Wiring Layout between NS-AL002 and NS-AL002 (RS-422A)
Host side
NS-AL002
RS-422A
NS-AL002
NS-AL002
Signal
Signal
RS-422A
terminal
block
RS
-422A
terminal
block
Shield
FG
FG
Wiring Layout between NT-AL001 and Host (RS-422A)
NT-AL001
NT-AL001
Host
RS-422A
RS-232C
Usable Cables with Connectors
Host Link, NT Link (1:1), NT Link (N:1). +5 V provided from the PLC.
XW2Z-070T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
6
NT-AL001
Signal
RS-232C
CONNECTOR
FG
5
9
Shield
Pin No.
Signal
Hood
FG
---
1
1
---
SD
2
2
SD
RD
3
3
RD
RS
RS
4
4
CS
5
5
CS
+5 V
6
6
+5 V
---
7
7
---
---
8
8
---
SG
9
9
9-pin type
1
PLC or PT
Pin No.
6
RS-232C
CONNECTOR
1
SG
9-pin type
5
9
When connected to a PLC with a +5-V output, an external power supply is not required
for the NT-AL001.
A-38
Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables
Wiring Layout between NT-AL001 and NT-AL001 (RS-422A)
Wiring Layout to CS1G/H Serial Communications Boards, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
Communications Boards, CQM1H Serial Communications Boards, and
CVM1/CV Series Host Link Units
Applicable Units:
CS1G-CPU42(-V1), CS1G-CPU43(-V1), CS1G-CPU44(-V1),
CS1G-CPU45(-V1), CS1H-CPU63(-V1), CS1H-CPU64(-V1),
CS1H-CPU65(-V1), CS1H-CPU66(-V1), CS1H-CPU67(-V1),
C200HE-CPU32(-Z), C200HE-CPU42(-Z), C200HG-CPU33(-Z),
C200HG-CPU43(-Z), C200HG-CPU53(-Z), C200HG-CPU63(-Z),
C200HX-CPU34(-Z), C200HX-CPU44(-Z), C200HX-CPU54(-Z),
C200HX-CPU64(-Z), C200HX-CPU65-Z, C200HX-CPU85-Z,
CQM1H-CPU51, CQM1H-CPU61, CV500-LK201(COM port 2)
For details on processing shielded cable, refer to A-3-6 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables.
A-39
Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables
Wiring Layout to CVM1/CV-series CPU Units
Applicable Units:
CV500-CPU01-V1, CV1000-CPU01-V1, CV2000-CPU01-V1,
CVM1-CPU01-V@, CVM1-CPU11-V@, CVM1-CPU21-V@
CVM1/CV Series CPU Units without the -V@ suffix cannot be connected by any
communications method.
For details on processing shielded cable, refer to A-3-6 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables.
A-40
Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection
Appendix 6
Preparing Cables for Computer
Connection
Refer to the following information when preparing the CX-Designer connecting cables.
A-6-1
Connecting Cable Assembly
Wire the RS-232C connector to the DOS or 98-NX computer according to the type, as
follows:
• 25-pin Connector
Computer
PT serial port
Shield
Connector hood
Connector hood
Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Model
XM3D-2521 or equivalent
XM3A-0921 or equivalent
Connector
hood
XM2S-2511 or equivalent
XM2S-0911 or equivalent
Cable
AWG28 × 5P IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG
Details
25-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (computer side)
9-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (PT side)
25-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (computer side)
9-pin type, mm screws
Manufactured by OMRON (PT side)
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Fujikura Densen.
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Hitachi Densen.
A-41
Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection
• 9-pin Connector
Computer
PT serial port
Shield
Connector hood
Connector hood
Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Details
9-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (computer side)
XM3A-0921 or equivalent
9-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (PT side)
Connector
XM2S-0911 or equivalent
9-pin type, mm screws
hood
Manufactured by OMRON.
(See note.)
XM2S-0913 or equivalent
9-pin type, inch screws
Manufactured by OMRON.
Cable
Multiconductor shielded cable
AWG28 × 5P IFVV-SB
Manufactured by Fujikura Densen.
Multiconductor shielded cable
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG
Manufactured by Hitachi Densen.
Note: Use a connector hood for the computer that conforms to the standards for the screws of the
computer connector.
A-42
Model
XM3D-0921 or equivalent
Appendix 7 Preparing Connecting Cables for Bar Code Readers
Appendix 7
Preparing Connecting Cables for Bar
Code Readers
Refer to the following information when preparing the connecting cables for connecting
the V520-RH21-6 Bar Code Reader.
• Connector Pin Arrangement
2
5
8
4
1
3
7
6
Connector pin
arrangement at
computer
Pin
number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal name
Abbreviation
Send data
Receive data
Request to send
Clear to send
Not connected.
Data terminal ready
0V
Power supply (Vcc)
Signal direction
V520-RH21-6
PT
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
ER (DTR)
SG
+5 V
• Wiring Method
PT
Signal
V520-RH21-6
Pin No.
Signal
Pin No.
RS-232C
interface
When connecting to the 5-V output of the PT’s serial port, use a cable length of less than
2 m. If the cable is 2 m or longer, connect pins 7 and 8 of the Bar Code Reader to an
external power supply.
• Connector Types
Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Model
XM3A-0921 or equivalent
TCS2280-01-2011
Connector hood
XM2S-0911 or equivalent
Cable
AWG28 × 5P IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG
Details
9-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (PT side)
8-pin DIN type Hoshiden, Co., Ltd.
Panel-mounting type
9-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON.
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Fujikura Densen.
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Hitachi Densen.
Use the following cables if the V400-H111 or V400-H211 is used.
Model
V400-W20-2M
V400-W20-5M
Cable length
2m
5m
A-43
Appendix 8 Standard Models
Appendix 8
Standard Models
Programmable Terminals (PTs)
Model
NS15-TX01S-V2
NS15-TX01B-V2
NS12-TS01-V1
NS12-TS01B-V1
NS12-TS00-V1
NS12-TS00B-V1
NS12-TS01-V2
(See note 3.)
NS12-TS01B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS12-TS00-V2
(See note 3.)
NS12-TS00B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS10-TV01-V1
NS10-TV01B -V1
NS10-TV00 -V1
NS10-TV00B-V1
NS10-TV01-V2
(See note 3.)
NS10-TV01B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS10-TV00-V2
(See note 3.)
NS10-TV00B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS8-TV01-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV01B-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV11-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV11B-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV00 -V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV00B-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV10 -V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV10B-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV01-V2
(See note 3.)
NS8-TV01B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS8-TV00-V2
(See note 3.)
A-44
LCD
Ethernet
Case
Type
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT
Size
15.0 inch
15.0 inch
12.1 inch
12.1 inch
12.1 inch
12.1 inch
12.1 inch
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Number of dots
1024 × 768
1024 × 768
800 × 600
800 × 600
800 × 600
800 × 600
800 × 600
10/100Base-T
10/100Base-T
10/100Base-T
10/100Base-T
Not supported.
Not supported.
10/100Base-T
Color
Silver
Black
Ivory
Black
Ivory
Black
Ivory
TFT
12.1 inch
Color
800 × 600
10/100Base-T
Black
TFT
12.1 inch
Color
800 × 600
Not supported.
Ivory
TFT
12.1 inch
Color
800 × 600
Not supported.
Black
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT
10.4 inch
10.4 inch
10.4 inch
10.4 inch
10.4 inch
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
640 × 480
640 × 480
640 × 480
640 × 480
640 × 480
10/100Base-T
10/100Base-T
Not supported.
Not supported.
10/100Base-T
Ivory
Black
Ivory
Black
Ivory
TFT
10.4 inch
Color
640 × 480
10/100Base-T
Black
TFT
10.4 inch
Color
640 × 480
Not supported.
Ivory
TFT
10.4 inch
Color
640 × 480
Not supported.
Black
TFT
8.0 inch
Color
640 × 480
10/100Base-T
Ivory
TFT
8.0 inch
Color
640 × 480
10/100Base-T
Black
TFT
8.0 inch
Color
640 × 480
10/100Base-T
Ivory
TFT
8.0 inch
Color
640 × 480
10/100Base-T
Black
TFT
8.0 inch
Color
640 × 480
Not supported.
Ivory
TFT
8.0 inch
Color
640 × 480
Not supported.
Black
TFT
8.0 inch
Color
640 × 480
Not supported.
Ivory
TFT
8.0 inch
Color
640 × 480
Not supported.
Black
TFT
8.4 inch
Color
640 × 480
10/100Base-T
Ivory
TFT
8.4 inch
Color
640 × 480
10/100Base-T
Black
TFT
8.4 inch
Color
640 × 480
Not supported.
Ivory
Appendix 8 Standard Models
Model
NS8-TV00B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS5-SQ01-V1
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ01B-V1
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ00-V1
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ00B-V1
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ01-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ01B-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ00-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ00B-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ11-V2
(See notes 3 and 4.)
NS5-SQ11B-V2
(See notes 3 and 4.)
NS5-SQ10-V2
(See notes 3 and 4.)
NS5-SQ10B-V2
(See notes 3 and 4.)
NS5-TQ01-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-TQ01B-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-TQ00-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-TQ00B-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-TQ11-V2
(See note 3.)
NS5-TQ11B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS5-TQ10-V2
(See note 3.)
NS5-TQ10B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS5-MQ01-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-MQ01B-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-MQ00-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-MQ00B-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-MQ11-V2
(See note 3.)
NS5-MQ11B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS5-MQ10-V2
(See note 3.)
LCD
Ethernet
Case
Type
TFT
Size
8.4 inch
Color
Color
Number of dots
640 × 480
Not supported.
Color
Black
STN
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Ivory
STN
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Black
STN
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
Not supported.
Ivory
STN
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
Not supported.
Black
STN
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Ivory
STN
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Black
STN
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
Not supported.
Ivory
STN
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
Not supported.
Black
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Ivory
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Black
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
Not supported.
Ivory
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
Not supported.
Black
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Ivory
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Black
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
Not supported.
Ivory
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
Not supported.
Black
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Ivory
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Black
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
Not supported.
Ivory
TFT
5.7 inch
Color
320 × 240
Not supported.
Black
STN
5.7 inch
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Ivory
STN
5.7 inch
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Black
STN
5.7 inch
320 × 240
Not supported.
Ivory
STN
5.7 inch
320 × 240
Not supported.
Black
STN
5.7 inch
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Ivory
STN
5.7 inch
320 × 240
10/100Base-T
Black
STN
5.7 inch
Monochro
me
Monochro
me
Monochro
me
Monochro
me
Monochro
me
Monochro
me
Monochro
me
320 × 240
Not supported.
Ivory
A-45
Appendix 8 Standard Models
LCD
Model
Type
STN
NS5-MQ10B-V2
(See note 3.)
Size
5.7 inch
Color
Monochro
me
Number of dots
320 × 240
Ethernet
Not supported.
Case
Color
Black
Note 1. The capacity of the NS8-TV00/TV01(B)-V1 is 6 Mbytes and the capacity of the NS8TV10/TV11(B)-V1 is 20 Mbytes.
2. The capacity of the NS5-SQ00/SQ01-V1 is 6 Mbytes and the capacity of the NS5-V2 is 20
Mbytes.
3. The capacity of the NS15-TX01@-V2, NS12-V2, NS10-V2, NS8-V2, NS5-SQ1@-V2, NS5TQ1@-V2, and NS5-MQ1@-V2 is 60 MB.
4. Lot number 2110 or earlier use an STN LCD.
Serial Communications Units
Model
CS1W-SCU21
CS1W-SCU41
CJ1W-SCU41
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Specifications
RS-232C (2 ports)
Base-mounting type
RS-232C (1 port)
RS-422A (1 port)
Base-mounting type
RS-232C (1 port)
RS-422A (1 port)
Building-block type
Applicable PLC
CS-series CS1G/H and CS1G/H-H
CS-series CS1G/H and CS1G/H-H
CJ-series CJ1G/H-H and CJ1M
CPU Units That Connect to PTs in 1:1 NT Links
PLC Series
C200HE/HG/HX Series
CQM1(H) Series
CPM1A Series
CPM2A Series
CPM2C Series
CVM1/CV Series
A-46
Specifications
With RS-232C connector (switching/9-pin type)
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
Connects to RS-232C cable using RS-232C Adapter CPM1CIF01.
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
Connects to RS-232C connector branched using CPM2CCN111 with converting cable.
With RS-232C connector (switching/9-pin type)
Appendix 8 Standard Models
CPU Units That Connect in 1:1 NT Links via RS-232C to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series
C Series
CPU Units with built-in 1:1 NT Link
functionality
C200HS-CPU21
C200HS-CPU23
C200HS-CPU31
C200HS-CPU33
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)
CPU Units that connect via
optional Communications Boards
---
C200HE-CPU32 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU33(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU43(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU53(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU34(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU44(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU54(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
---
C200HG-CPU33(-Z)
C200HG-CPU43(-Z)
C200HG-CPU53(-Z)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z)
C200HX-CPU34(-Z)
C200HX-CPU44(-Z)
C200HX-CPU54(-Z)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
CQM1-CPU41-V1
CQM1-CPU42-V1
CQM1-CPU43-V1
CQM1-CPU44-V1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
--CPM1A-10CD@-@ (-V1)
CPM1A-20CD@-@ (-V1)
CPM1A-30CD@-@ (-V1)
CPM1A-40CD@-@ (-V1)
--CPM2A-30CD@@-@
CPM2A-40CD@@-@
CPM2A-60CD@@-@
CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@ (See note 3.) --CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@ (See note 3.)
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CQM1H-CPU61
CV Series
CV500-CPU01-V1
--(See note 2.) CV1000-CPU01-V1
CV2000-CPU01-V1
CVM1 Series CVM1-CPU01-V2
--(See note 2.) CVM1-CPU11-V2
CVM1-CPU21-V2
Note 1. A C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-V1 Communications Board is required.
2. Connection is not possible to CVM1/CV-series PLC CPU Units without "-V1" in the
model number.
3. A CS1W-CN118 Conversion Cable or XW2Z-200T-2 Cable with connector must be used
for the connection.
Reference • CS-series CPU Units cannot connect to 1:1 NT Links, but a 1:1 connection can be
made using 1:N NT Links (normal or high-speed). Refer to 4-2 1:N Host
Connection and 4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link for details.
A-47
Appendix 8 Standard Models
CPU Units That Connect in 1:1 NT Links via RS-422A to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series
CPU Units with built-in 1:1 NT Link functionality
C200HE-CPU32 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU65-Z (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU85-Z (See note 1.)
CQM1H-CPU51 (See note 2.)
CQM1H-CPU61 (See note 2.)
CV Series (See note 3.)
CV500-CPU01-V1
CV1000-CPU01-V1
CV2000-CPU01-V1
CVM1 Series (See note 3.)
CVM1-CPU01-V2
CVM1-CPU11-V2
CVM1-CPU21-V2
Note 1. A C200HW-COM03-V1 or C200HW-COM06-V1 Communications Board is required.
2. A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
3. Connection is not possible to CVM1/CV-series PLC CPU Units without "-V1" in the model
number.
C Series
Reference • NS-series RS-485 (two-wire) communications are used to connect to an OMRON
Temperature Controller. The NS-AL002 cannot be used with the NT-series PTs or
PLCs. Connect using RS-422A (4-wire).
CPU Units That Connect to PTs in Standard 1:N NT Links
Model
C200HE/HG/HX Series
CQM1H Series
CS Series
CJ Series
A-48
Specifications
With RS-232C connector (switching/9-pin type)
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
Appendix 8 Standard Models
CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-232C to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series
CS Series
CJ Series
CP Series
Connecting with built-in ports
CS1G-CPU42(-V1)
CS1G-CPU43(-V1)
CS1G-CPU44(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45(-V1)
CS1H-CPU63(-V1)
CS1H-CPU64(-V1)
CS1H-CPU65(-V1)
CS1H-CPU66(-V1)
CS1H-CPU67(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
CJ1G-CPU42H (See note 2.)
CJ1G-CPU43H (See note 2.)
CJ1G-CPU44H (See note 2.)
CJ1G-CPU45H (See note 2.)
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66H
CJ1H-CPU67H
CJ1H-CPU65H-R
CJ1H-CPU66H-R
CJ1H-CPU67H-R
CJ2H-CPU64(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU65(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU66(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU67(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU68(-EIP)
CJ2M-CPU11
CJ2M-CPU12
CJ2M-CPU13
CJ2M-CPU14
CJ2M-CPU15
CJ2M-CPU31 (See note 3.)
CJ2M-CPU32 (See note 3.)
CJ2M-CPU33 (See note 3.)
CJ2M-CPU34 (See note 3.)
CJ2M-CPU35 (See note 3.)
CP1E-N@@@@-@
Connecting via optional
Communications Boards
Same as at left (See note 1).
CJ1G-CPU42H (See note 2.)
CJ1G-CPU43H (See note 2.)
CJ1G-CPU44H (See note 2.)
CJ1G-CPU45H (See note 2.)
CJ1M-CPU11 (See note 2.)
CJ1M-CPU12 (See note 2.)
CJ1M-CPU13 (See note 2.)
CJ1M-CPU21 (See note 2.)
CJ1M-CPU22 (See note 2.)
CJ1M-CPU23 (See note 2.)
CJ1H-CPU65H (See note 2.)
CJ1H-CPU66H (See note 2.)
CJ1H-CPU67H (See note 2.)
CJ1H-CPU65H-R (See note 2.)
CJ1H-CPU66H-R (See note 2.)
CJ1H-CPU67H-R (See note 2.)
CJ2H-CPU64(-EIP) (See note 2.)
CJ2H-CPU65(-EIP) (See note 2.)
CJ2H-CPU66(-EIP) (See note 2.)
CJ2H-CPU67(-EIP) (See note 2.)
CJ2H-CPU68(-EIP) (See note 2.)
CJ2M-CPU11 (See note 2.)
CJ2M-CPU12 (See note 2.)
CJ2M-CPU13 (See note 2.)
CJ2M-CPU14 (See note 2.)
CJ2M-CPU15 (See note 2.)
CJ2M-CPU31 (See note 3.)
CJ2M-CPU32 (See note 3.)
CJ2M-CPU33 (See note 3.)
CJ2M-CPU34 (See note 3.)
CJ2M-CPU35 (See note 3.)
CP1L-@@@@@-@ (See note 3.)
CP1H-@@@@@-@ (See note 3.)
A-49
Appendix 8 Standard Models
PLC Series
C Series
Connecting with built-in ports
C200HE-CPU42(-Z)
C200HG-CPU43(-Z)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z)
C200HX-CPU44(-Z)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
---
Connecting via optional
Communications Boards
C200HE-CPU32(-Z) (See note 4.)
C200HE-CPU42(-Z) (See note 4.)
C200HG-CPU33(-Z) (See note 4.)
C200HG-CPU43(-Z) (See note 4.)
C200HG-CPU53(-Z) (See note 4.)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z) (See note 4.)
C200HX-CPU34(-Z) (See note 4.)
C200HX-CPU44(-Z) (See note 4.)
C200HX-CPU54(-Z) (See note 4.)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z) (See note 4.)
C200HX-CPU65-Z (See note 4.)
C200HX-CPU85-Z (See note 4.)
CQM1H-CPU21 (See note 5.)
CQM1H-CPU51 (See note 5.)
CQM1H-CPU61 (See note 5.)
Note 1. A CS1W-SCB21/SCB41 Serial Communications Board or a CS1W-SCU21 Serial
Communications Unit is required.
2. A CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit is required.
3. An RS-232C Option Board (CP1W-CIF01) is required.
4. A C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06(-V1) Communications Board is required.
5. A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
Reference • NS-series RS-485 (two-wire) communications are used to connect to an OMRON
Temperature Controller. The NS-AL002 cannot be used with the NT-series PTs or
PLCs. Connect using RS-422A (4-wire).
CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-422A to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series
CS Series
A-50
Unit
CS1G-CPU42(-V1)
CS1G-CPU43(-V1)
CS1G-CPU44(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45(-V1)
CS1H-CPU63(-V1)
CS1H-CPU64(-V1)
CS1H-CPU65(-V1)
CS1H-CPU66(-V1)
CS1H-CPU67(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
Serial Communications Board or
Unit required for connection
CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications
Board
Appendix 8 Standard Models
PLC Series
CJ Series
CP Series
C Series
Unit
CJ1G-CPU42H
CJ1G-CPU43H
CJ1G-CPU44H
CJ1G-CPU45H
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66H
CJ1H-CPU67H
CJ1H-CPU65H-R
CJ1H-CPU66H-R
CJ1H-CPU67H-R
CJ2H-CPU64(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU65(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU66(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU67(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU68(-EIP)
CJ2M-CPU11
CJ2M-CPU12
CJ2M-CPU13
CJ2M-CPU14
CJ2M-CPU15
CJ2M-CPU31 (See note.)
CJ2M-CPU32 (See note.)
CJ2M-CPU33 (See note.)
CJ2M-CPU34 (See note.)
CJ2M-CPU35 (See note.)
CP1E-N@@@@-@
CP1L-@@@@@-@
CP1H-@@@@@-@
C200HE-CPU32(-Z)
C200HE-CPU42(-Z)
C200HG-CPU33(-Z)
C200HG-CPU43(-Z)
C200HG-CPU53(-Z)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z)
C200HX-CPU34(-Z)
Serial Communications Board or
Unit required for connection
CJ1W-SCU31/41 Serial
Communications Unit
RS-422A Option Board: CP1W-CIF11
or CP1W-CIF12 (See note.)
RS-422A Option Board: CP1W-CIF11
or CP1W-CIF12
C200HW-COM03/COM06(-V1)
Communications Board
C200HX-CPU44(-Z)
C200HX-CPU54(-Z)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-SCB41 Serial
Communications Board
CQM1H-CPU61
Note: A CP1W-CIF11 or CP1W-CIF12 RS-422A Board is required to connect a CJ2MCPU31/32/33/34/35 CPU Unit to the serial port on an NS-series PT.
A-51
Appendix 8 Standard Models
Reference • Both the normal 1:N NT Links and high-speed NT Links are supported for CSseries PLC CPU Units with "-V1" in the model number. If the most recent Serial
Communications Unit or Board is used, these connections are also supported by
CPU Units without "-V1." Refer to 4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link for details.
CPU Units That Connect to PTs in High-speed 1:N NT Links
Model
Specifications
CS Series (See note.)
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
CJ Series
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
Note: Connection is not possible for CPU Units without "-V1" in the model number.
CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-232C to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series
CS Series
A-52
Unit
CS1G-CPU42-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1G-CPU43-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1G-CPU44-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1G-CPU45-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1H-CPU63-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1H-CPU64-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1H-CPU65-V1 (See note 1)
CS1H-CPU66-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1H-CPU67-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
Serial Communications Board or
Unit required for connection
Same as at left (See note 2).
Appendix 8 Standard Models
PLC Series
CJ Series
CP Series
Note 1.
2.
3.
4.
Unit
CJ1G-CPU42H
CJ1G-CPU43H
CJ1G-CPU44H
CJ1G-CPU45H
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66H
CJ1H-CPU67H
CJ1H-CPU65H-R
CJ1H-CPU66H-R
CJ1H-CPU67H-R
CJ2H-CPU64(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU65(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU66(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU67(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU68(-EIP)
CJ2M-CPU11
CJ2M-CPU12
CJ2M-CPU13
CJ2M-CPU14
CJ2M-CPU15
CJ2M-CPU31 (See note 4.)
CJ2M-CPU32 (See note 4.)
CJ2M-CPU33 (See note 4.)
CJ2M-CPU34 (See note 4.)
CJ2M-CPU35 (See note 4.)
CP1E-N@@@@-@
Serial Communications Board or
Unit required for connection
Same as at left (See note 3).
CP1L-@@@@-@ (See note 4.)
CP1H-@@@@-@ (See note 4.)
CS-series PLC CPU Units without "-V1" in the model number do not support high-speed
NT Links.
A CS1W-SCB21/SCB41 Serial Communications Board or a CS1W-SCU21 Serial
Communications Unit is required.
A CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Board is required.
An RS-232C Option Board (CP1W-CIF01) is required.
A-53
Appendix 8 Standard Models
CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-422A to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series
CS Series
Unit
Serial Communications Board or
Unit required for connection
CS1W-SCB41 Serial
Communications Board
CS1G-CPU42(-V1)
CS1G-CPU43(-V1)
CS1G-CPU44(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45(-V1)
CS1H-CPU63(-V1)
CS1H-CPU64(-V1)
CS1H-CPU65(-V1)
CS1H-CPU66(-V1)
CS1H-CPU67(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
CJ1W-SCU31/41 Serial
CJ Series
CJ1G-CPU42H
Communications Unit
CJ1G-CPU43H
RS-422A Option Board: CP1WCJ1G-CPU44H
CIF11 or CP1W-CIF12 (See note.)
CJ1G-CPU45H
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66H
CJ1H-CPU67H
CJ1H-CPU65H-R
CJ1H-CPU66H-R
CJ1H-CPU67H-R
CJ2H-CPU64(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU65(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU66(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU67(-EIP)
CJ2H-CPU68(-EIP)
CJ2M-CPU11
CJ2M-CPU12
CJ2M-CPU13
CJ2M-CPU14
CJ2M-CPU15
CJ2M-CPU31 (See note.)
CJ2M-CPU32 (See note.)
CJ2M-CPU33 (See note.)
CJ2M-CPU34 (See note.)
CJ2M-CPU35 (See note.)
CP Series
RS-422A Option Board: CP1WCP1E-N@@@@-@
CIF11 or CP1W-CIF12
CP1L-@@@@@-@
CP1H-@@@@@-@
Note: A CP1W-CIF11 or CP1W-CIF12 RS-422A Board is required to connect a CJ2MCPU31/32/33/34/35 CPU Unit to the serial port on an NS-series PT.
A-54
Appendix 8 Standard Models
CPU Units That Connect to PTs via Ethernet
PLC Series
CV Series
CVM1 Series
CS Series
CJ Series
CP Series
CPU Unit
CV500-CPU01-V1
CV1000-CPU01-V1
CV2000-CPU01-V1
CVM1-CPU01-V2
CVM1-CPU11-V2
CVM1-CPU21-V2
CS1G-CPU42(-V1)
CS1G-CPU43(-V1)
CS1G-CPU44(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU63(-V1)
CS1H-CPU64(-V1)
CS1H-CPU65(-V1)
CS1H-CPU66(-V1)
CS1H-CPU67(-V1)
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
CJ1G-CPU42H
CJ1G-CPU43H
CJ1G-CPU44H
CJ1G-CPU45H
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66H
CJ1H-CPU67H
CJ1H-CPU65H-R
CJ1H-CPU66H-R
CJ1H-CPU67H-R
CJ2H-CPU64(-EIP) (See note 1.)
CJ2H-CPU65(-EIP) (See note 1.)
CJ2H-CPU66(-EIP) (See note 1.)
CJ2H-CPU67(-EIP) (See note 1.)
CJ2H-CPU68(-EIP) (See note 1.)
CJ2M-CPU11
CJ2M-CPU12
CJ2M-CPU13
CJ2M-CPU14
CJ2M-CPU15
CJ2M-CPU31 (See note 1.)
CJ2M-CPU32 (See note 1.)
CJ2M-CPU33 (See note 1.)
CJ2M-CPU34 (See note 1.)
CJ2M-CPU35 (See note 1.)
CP1L-@@@@@-@
CP1H-@@@@@-@
Specifications
Mount a CV500-ENT01 Ethernet Unit
(10Base-5).
Mount a 10Base-T Adapter to the
Ethernet Unit and a 10Base-T cable can
also be used.
Mount a CS1W-ENT01 Ethernet Unit
(10Base-5).
Mount a 10Base-T Adapter to the
Ethernet Unit and a 10Base-T cable can
also be used.
Mount a CS1W-ENT11 Ethernet Unit
(10Base-T).
Mount a CS1W-ETN21 Ethernet Unit
(10Base-T/100Base-T).
Mount a CS1D-ETN21D Ethernet Unit
(100Base-T)
Mount a CJ1W-ENT11 Ethernet Unit
(10Base-T).
Mount a CJ1W-ENT21 Ethernet Unit
(10Base-T/100Base-T).
Mount a CJ1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Unit
(10Base-T/100Base-T).
Mount a CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option
Board (10Base-T/100Base-T).
Note 1. The CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP and CJ2M-CPU3@ CPU Units have a built-in Ethernet connector.
A-55
Appendix 8 Standard Models
CPU Units That Connect to PTs via Controller Link
PLC Series
CS Series
CPU Unit
All CS-series CPU Units
CJ Series
All CJ-series CPU Units
C200HE/HG/
HX Series
(See note 1.)
C200HE-CPU32 (-Z)
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z)
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z)
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z)
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z)
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z)
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z)
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z)
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
All CV-series CPU Units
CQM1 Series
Specifications
Mount a CS1W-CLK21 Controller
Link Unit.
Mount a CJ1W-CLK21 Controller
Link Unit.
Mount a C200HW-CLK21 Controller
Link Unit.
Mount a CQM1H-CLK21 Controller
Link Unit.
Mount a CVM1-CLK21 Controller
Link Unit.
CV Series
(See note 2.)
CVM1 Series
All CVM1-series CPU Units
(See note 2.)
Note 1. The following are required when mounting a Controller Link Unit:
C200HW-COM01/COM04 Communications Board
C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012 Bus Connection Unit
2. Always set routing tables when using a CVM1/CV-series CPU Unit manufactured in April
1996 or earlier. The manufacturing date can be checked with the 4-digit lot number given
on the side of the CPU Unit, as shown below.
Lot No.:
@ @ 4 6
.........Manufactured April 1996
The rightmost digit of the year, 1996
in this example
The month of manufacture
1 to 9 = January to September
X to Z = October to December
Refer to the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (Cat. No. W309) for setting methods
for the PLC Controller Link Units.
EtherNet/IP-connectable NS-series PTs and Controllers
EtherNet/IP-compatible NS-series PTs and System Versions
Model
System version
A-56
NS15-TX01@-V2
NS12-TS@@(B)-V2
NS10-TV@@(B)-V2
NS8-TV@@(B)-V2
NS5-SQ1@(B)-V2
NS5-TQ1@ (B)-V2
NS5-MQ1@ (B)-V2
CS/CJ Series: Version 8.0 or higher
NJ101 Series: Version 8.6 or higher
NJ301 Series: Version 8.6 or higher
NJ501 Series: Version 8.5 or higher
NX701 Series: Version 8.9 or higher
Appendix 8 Standard Models
EtherNet/IP-connectable NS-series PTs and Controllers
Series
name
Using the
built-in board
Using an EtherNet/IP Unit
CS Series
EtherNet/IP Unit
required for
connection
CS1W-EIP21
(100BASE-TX/10BASET)
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67(-V1)
CS1HCPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H
CJ Series
CJ2HCJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1W-EIP21
CPU64/65/66/
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H-R
(100BASE-TX/10BASE67/68-EIP
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
T)
CJ2MCJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23
CPU31/32/33/
CJ2H-CPU64/65/66/67/68
34/35
CJ2M-CPU11/12/13/14/15
NJ Series
CJ1W-EIP21 (See note.)
NJ101-@@@@ NJ101-@@@@
NJ301-@@@@ NJ301-@@@@
NJ501-@@@@ NJ501-@@@@
NX Series
NX701-@@@@ Note: The NJ-series Troubleshooter cannot be used. The following unit versions are required.
NJ-series CPU Unit: Unit version 1.01 or later
EtherNet/IP Unit: Unit version 2.1 or later
RS-232C/RS-422A Converters
Model
NT-AL001
NS-AL002
CJ1W-CIF11
Specifications
RS-232C: 9-pin connector
RS-422A: 8-pin terminal block
RS-232C: 9-pin connector
RS-422A: 8-pin terminal block
RS-232C: 9-pin connector
RS-422A: 5-pin terminal block
Reference • When a CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion Adapter is used, the total transmission length is
50 m.
• If NT-001/NS-002 Link Adapters are used together with CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion
Adapters on the same transmission path, the total transmission length is also 50 m.
Software Related to NS-series PTs
Name
CX-One
CX-One Lite
Sysmac Studio
Model
CXONE-AL@@@-V4
CXONE-LT01C-V4
SYSMAC SE2@@@
Details
A-57
Appendix 8 Standard Models
Support Tools
Name
Optional
products
Model
NS15-KBA04
NS12-KBA04
NS7-KBA04
NT30-KBA04
NS12-KBA05
NS7-KBA05
NT31C-KBA05
NS15-KBA05N
NS12-KBA05 N
NS7-KBA05N
NT31C-KBA05N
NT30-KBA01
CJ1W-BAT01
HMC-EF372
HMC-EF672
Details
Anti-reflection Sheets for NS15
Anti-reflection Sheets for NS12/NS10
Anti-reflection Sheets for NS8
Anti-reflection Sheets for NS5
Protective Cover for NS12 and NS10 (anti-reflection coating)
Protective Cover for NS8 (anti-reflection coating)
Protective Cover for NS5 (anti-reflection coating)
Transparent Protective Cover for NS15
Transparent Protective Cover for NS12 and NS10
Transparent Protective Cover for NS8
Transparent Protective Cover for NS5
Chemical-resistant Cover for NS5
Replacement Battery for NS15/NS12/NS10/NS8/NS5
Memory Card (30 Mbytes)
Memory Card (64 Mbytes)
HMC-EF283
Memory Card (256 Mbytes)
HMC-EF583
Memory Card (512 Mbytes)
HMC-AP001
Memory Card Adapter (for connecting Personal Computer PC
Card Reader/Writer)
Note: The CX-Designer includes a transfer program and standard PT system program.
Connecting Cables and Connectors
Cable with Connector (PT-to-PLC)
XW2Z-200T
Cable
length
2m
XW2Z-500T
5m
XW2Z-200T-2
2m
XW2Z-500T-2
5m
Model
Applicable Units
Units with 9-pin
connector and built-in
1:1 NT Link function.
CPM2C peripheral port
Communications
method
NT Link
(RS-232C only)
NT Link
(RS-232C only)
Specifications
9-pin-to-9-pin
9-pin-to-CPM2C
peripheral port
Cable with Connector (PT-to-Personal Computer)
Model
XW2Z-S002
Cable
length
2m
Applicable computer
Specifications
DOS and 98NX computers
Female 9-pin-to-male 9-pin
Ethernet Cable (PT-to-Personal Computer)
Particular models are not specified, but use a cable that meets the following specifications.
Item
Conformance standards
Transmission medium
Transmission distance
Connector
A-58
Specifications
Conforms to IEEE 802.3 / Ethernet (10/100Base-T).
2 pair Cat 3 UTP 22-26AWG, Cat 5, Cat 5e, Cat 6
100 m (node-to-hub and hub-to-hub)
8-pin modular connector
Appendix 8 Standard Models
EtherNet/IP Cables
Use the twisted-pair cables that are recommended in 5-3-2 Selecting Network
Configuration Devices.
Item
Conformance standards
Transmission medium
Transmission distance
Connector
Specifications
Conforms to IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet (10/100Base-T).
Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable, Category 5, 5e, or higher
100 m (node-to-hub and hub-to-hub)
8-pin modular connector
RS-232C Connecting Cable
Model
AWG28 × 5P IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG
Specifications
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Fujikura Densen.
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Hitachi Densen.
Controller Link Communications Cable
Use one of the twisted-pair cables listed below as the communications cable.
Model
Li2Y-FCY2x0.56qmm
1x2xAWG-20PE+Tr.
CUSN+PVC
#9207
ESVC0.5x2C
ESNC0.5x2C-99-087B
Manufacturer
Remarks
KROMBERG & SHUBERT, Department German company
KOMTEC
DRAKA CABLES INDUSTRIAL
Spanish company
BELDEN
Bando Densen Co.
Nihon Electric Wire & Cable Co.
American company
Japanese company
Japanese company
Applicable Connectors for RS-232C
Name
Connector
Connector hood
Model
XM3A-2521 or
equivalent
XM3D-2521 or
equivalent
XM3A-0921 or
equivalent
XM3D-0921 or
equivalent
DB-25P
XM2S-2511 or
equivalent
XM2S-2513 or
equivalent
XM2S-0911 or
equivalent
XM2S-0911-E or
equivalent
XM2S-0913 or
equivalent
DB-C2-J9
Specifications
25-pin type (male), Manufactured by OMRON.
25-pin type (female), Manufactured by OMRON.
(for DOS computers)
9-pin type (male), Manufactured by OMRON.
9-pin type (female), Manufactured by OMRON.
(for DOS computers)
25-pin type (male), Manufactured by JAE.
25-pin type, mm screws, Manufactured by OMRON.
25-pin type, inch screws, Manufactured by OMRON.
9-pin type, mm screws, Manufactured by OMRON.
9-pin type, mm screws, Manufactured by OMRON.
9-pin type, inch screws, Manufactured by OMRON.
25-pin type, Manufactured by JAE.
Cables for CS1-series PLC Peripheral Port
Model
CS1W-CN118
Specifications
Manufactured by OMRON
(CS1-series peripheral port-to-D-Sub female 9-pin connector)
A-59
Appendix 9 List of Optional Products
Appendix 9
List of Optional Products
A-9-1 Anti-reflection Sheets: NS15-KBA04, NS12-KBA04, NS7-KBA04,
NT30-KBA04
Attached to the display to prevent random reflection and dirt. The sheets are all colorless
and transparent. One set contains five sheets.
Dimensions
RU
N
Y
X
Model
Material
Mounting method
NS15-KBA04
Polyester film
Double-sided tape
Polyester film
Coating of paste
NT30-KBA04
NS12-KBA04
NS7-KBA04
Model
NS15-KBA04
NS12-KBA04
NS7-KBA04
NT30-KBA04
A-60
Specifications
Anti-reflection Sheets for NS15
Anti-reflection Sheets for NS12/NS10
Anti-reflection Sheets for NS8
Anti-reflection Sheets for NS5
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
X
323.5
269.5
188.6
155.0
Y
247.5
205.5
147.2
115.0
Appendix 9 List of Optional Products
A-9-2
Protective Covers: NS15-KBA05N, NS12-KBA05(N), NS7KBA05(N), NT31C-KBA05(N)
This cover protects the display surface from oil, dust, and finger marks. One set contains
five covers.
N
PO
RU
W
ER
RU
N
Dimensions
With Cover Mounted
Y
B
Z
X
A
Note: Do not lift the product by grasping the shaded areas.
Material
Polyester film
Model
NS12-KBA05
NS7-KBA05
NT31C-KBA05
NS15-KBA05N
NS12-KBA05N
NS7-KBA05N
NT31C-KBA05N
Mounting method
Double-sided tape
Specifications
Opaque White Protective
Cover for NS12 and NS10
(anti-reflection coating)
Opaque White Protective
Cover for NS8
(anti-reflection coating)
Opaque White Protective
Cover for NS5
(anti-reflection coating)
Transparent Protective Cover
for NS15
Transparent Protective Cover
for NS12 and NS10
Transparent Protective Cover
for NS8
Transparent Protective Cover
for NS5
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
X
339
Y
265
Z
8.8
A
349
B
275
255
200
6.3
265
210
218
165
7.0
228
175
429
328
9.0
439
338
339
265
8.8
349
275
255
200
6.3
265
210
213
160
6.5
223
170
A-61
Appendix 9 List of Optional Products
A-9-3
NT30-KBA01 Chemical-resistant Cover
This Cover on the front panel protects the Unit from chemicals. The whole sheet is
opaque white and made from silicon rubber.
Dimensions
Y
Z
X
Model
NT30-KBA01
Specifications
Chemical-resistant Cover for the -V1/-V2
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
X
196.4
Y
143.4
Z
5.2
The Unit’s resistance to chemicals is as shown below.
Resistant
Non-resistant
Boric acid
Hexane
Sulfuric acid
Lubricating oil
Nitrogen
Benzine
Ammonia gas
Butane
Carbon dioxide
Carbonic acid
Phenol
Chloric acid
Glycerin
Naphthaline
Aqua ammonia
Soybean oil
Calcium chloride
Toluene
Developing solution (Sodium thiosulfate)
Acetaldehyde
Lard
Contact an OMRON representative for information on resistance to any chemicals not
included in the table above. (The product can be used with chemicals to which silicon
rubber is resistant, even if those chemicals are not included in the “Resistant” column in
the table.)
A-9-4
Replacement Battery: CJ1W-BAT01
This is a lithium battery for backing up the contents of the memory.
CJ1W-BAT01
Model
CJ1W-BAT01
A-62
Specifications
Replacement Battery for NS15-V2, NS12-V1/V2, NS10-V1/-V2, NS8-V1/-V2,
NS5-V1/-V2
Appendix 9 List of Optional Products
A-9-5
Recommended Memory Cards
The Memory Card is an external memory that can save and read screen data, log data,
and system programs between the PT and computer. By using the HMC-AP001, this data
can be exchanged with computers that are connected to PC Cards.
The memory capacity depends on the model of the Memory Card used.
Model
HMC-EF183
HMC-EF283
HMC-EF583
Note
A-9-6
Capacity
128 Mbytes
256 Mbytes
512 Mbytes
Use a Memory Card recommended by OMRON. Incorrect operation may occur if a nonrecommended memory card is used.
NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface Unit
This Expansion Unit enables Controller Link communications with PLCs and FA
computers.
Applicable PTs: NS15-TX0@, NS12-TS0@ or NS10-TV0@
Inapplicable PTs: NS8-TV@@ or NS5-SQ@@/TQ@@/MQ@@
A-9-7
NS-CA001/CA002 Video Input Unit
This Expansion Unit enables displaying video images from video cameras or Vision
Sensors on the PT.
An external analog RGB image can be input with the NS-CA002 and displayed on the PT.
Refer to the NS Series RGB/Video Input Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. V086) for details
on the NS-CA002.
Applicable PTs: NS15-TX0@ (The NS15-TX0@ does not support the NS-CA001, and it
does not support video input from the NS-CA002, but it supports analog RGB input from
the NS-CA002.), NS12-TS0@, NS10-TV0@ or NS8-TV@@
Inapplicable PTs: NS5-SQ@@/TQ@@/MQ@@
A-9-8
Attachments: NS12-ATT01(B)/NS12-ATT02/NS8-ATT01/
NS8-ATT02
NS-series PTs and NT-series PTs are different sizes and have different panel cutout
dimensions. To replace an NT-series PT with an NS-series PT, install an attachment to the
control panel in which the NT-series PT was mounted before mounting the NS-series PT.
Model
NS12-ATT01
NS12-ATT01B
NS12-ATT02
Specifications
NT625C/631/631C Series to NS12/10 Series
NT625C/631/631C Series to NS12/10 Series (black)
NT610C Series to NS12/10 Series
A-63
Appendix 9 List of Optional Products
Model
NS8-ATT01
NS8-ATT02
A-9-9
Specifications
NT620S/620C/600S Series to NS8 Series
NT600M/600G/610G/612G Series to NS8 Series
NS-USBEXT-1M USB Relay Cable
A NS-USBEXT-1M USB Relay Cable can be used to extend the USB slave connector on
the back of the PT and place it on the front of the control panel.
Model
NS-USBEXT-1M
A-64
Specifications
For NS15, NS12, NS10, NS8, NS5 V2 PTs
Appendix 10 System Memory List
Appendix 10 System Memory List
System memory is used for exchanging information between the host and the PT, such as
controlling the PT and notifying the host of PT status.
The system memory is divided into bit and word sections.
System Bit Memory ($SB)
System bit memory ($SB) is used for exchanging information between the host and the
PT in bit units, such as controlling the PT and notifying the host of PT status.
The system bit memory contains 64 bits with predefined functions.
The system bit memory is listed in the following table.
Address
$SB0
$SB1
$SB2
$SB3
$SB4
$SB5
$SB6
$SB7
$SB8
$SB9
$SB10
$SB11
$SB12
$SB13
$SB14
$SB15
$SB16
$SB17
$SB18
$SB19
$SB20
$SB21
$SB22
$SB23
$SB24
$SB25
Classification
Notification
Notification
Notification
Control
Notification
Notification
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Notification
Control
Control
Control
Notification/control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Notification/control
$SB26
Control
Function
RUN signal (Pulse)
RUN signal (Always ON)
Screen switch strobe
Prohibit Shifting to System Menu
Battery Low
Data Input Detector
Brightness adjust, high
Brightness adjust, medium
Brightness adjust, low
Backlight Control (screen saver Control)
Control Backlight Flashing
Backlight status
Continuous buzzer
Short intermittent buzzer
Long intermittent buzzer
Notification/Control of Video Input
Processing Priority Registration for Port A (NT Link 1:N)
Processing Priority Registration Port B (NT Link 1:N)
Display keypad with temporary input
Prohibit input
Contrast Adjustment (+10 levels) (NS5-SQ/MQ only)
Contrast Adjustment (+1 level) (NS5-SQ/MQ only)
Contrast Adjustment (−1 level) (NS5-SQ/MQ only)
Contrast Adjustment (−10 levels) (NS5-SQ/MQ only)
Video Capture
Starts Printing/Capture Screen
(Not supported by NS5-@Q0@.)
Stops Printing
$SB27
Control
Test Pattern Printing
$SB28
Control
Printer Head Cleaning (Ignored for PictBridge.)
$SB29
Control
Update Printer Status
$SB30
Notification
Printer Busy Status
$SB31
$SB32
$SB33
$SB34
$SB35
$SB36
$SB37
$SB38
$SB39
Notification
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Control
Notification of Printer Error
Control
Initialize Alarm/Event History
Save Alarm/Event History
Internal Holding Memory ($HB/$HW) Initialization
Initialize Data Log
Save Data Log
Initialize Operation Log
Save Operation Log
Log Functional Object Operation
A-65
Appendix 10 System Memory List
Address
Classification
Function
$SB40
Control
Log Switch Screen Operation
$SB41
Control
Log Macro Operation
$SB42
Notification/control
Initialize Error Log
$SB43
Notification/control
Save Error Log
$SB44
Reserved
−
$SB45
Control
Macro error dialog control
$SB46
Notification
Notification of Macro Error
$SB47
Notification
Logging Process or Video Capture Error Flag
$SB48
Notification
Memory Card Free Space Check Flag
$SB49
Notification/control
Stop Memory Card
$SB50
Notification
Memory Card Removing Status (Power OFF)
$SB51
Notification
Periodical Data Log Save in Process Flag
$SB52
Notification
Data Block Operation Complete Flag
$SB53
Notification/control
Prohibit Starting of the Screen Saver
$SB54
Notification
Password level 1 operable status
$SB55
Notification
Password level 2 operable status
$SB56
Notification
Password level 3 operable status
$SB57
Notification
Password level 4 operable status
$SB58
Notification
Password level 5 operable status
$SB59
Reserved
−
$SB60
Reserved
−
$SB61
Reserved
−
$SB62
Reserved
−
$SB63
Reserved
−
The notification words are not write prohibited. In addition, the system will not restore values,
except when the status has changed.
System memory is allocated to PLC areas as shown below.
Allocated Addresses for System Memory can be displayed by selecting PT – System
Settings in the CX-Designer and clicking the Initial Tab.
$SB + m
15
0
Word m: $SB0 to $SB15
31
16
Word m+1: $SB16 to $SB31
32
Word m+2: $SB32 to $SB47
48
Word m+3: $SB48 to $SB63
47
63
System Word Memory ($SW)
System word memory ($SW) is used for exchanging information between the host and
the PT in word units, such as controlling the PT and notifying the host of PT status.
The system word memory contains 41 items with predefined functions.
The system word memory is listed in the following table.
Address
$SW0
$SW1
$SW2
$SW3
$SW4
$SW5
$SW6
$SW7
A-66
Classification
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Function
Current screen number
Display pop-up screen 1 number
Pop-up screen 1 display position (X coordinate)
Pop-up screen 1 display position (Y coordinate)
Display pop-up screen 2 number
Pop-up screen 2 display position (X coordinate)
Pop-up screen 2 display position (Y coordinate)
Display pop-up screen 3 number
Appendix 10 System Memory List
Address
Classification
Function
$SW8
Notification/control
Pop-up screen 3 display position (X coordinate)
$SW9
Notification/control
Pop-up screen 3 display position (Y coordinate)
$SW10
Notification/control
Display label number
$SW11
Control
Destination (0: Printer/1: Memory Card)
$SW12
Control
Backlight Brightness Adjustment (1 to 32) (See note.)
$SW13
Control
Password number for input prohibit clear
$SW14
Notification
Current time (min, s)
$SW15
Notification
Current date and time (day, hour)
$SW16
Notification
Current date (year, month)
$SW17
Notification
Current day (day of the week)
$SW18
Notification
No. of generated alarms and events
$SW19
Notification
ID number for generated alarms and events
$SW20
Notification
ID number for cleared alarms and events
$SW21
Notification
Alarm/event ID when alarm/event object macro executed
$SW22
Reserved
−
$SW23
Notification
Macro execution error number
$SW24
Notification
Macro error screen number
$SW25
Notification
Macro error object ID number
$SW26
Notification
Error macro execution timing
$SW27
Control
Offset value for index I0
$SW28
Control
Offset value for index I1
$SW29
Control
Offset value for index I2
$SW30
Control
Offset value for index I3
$SW31
Control
Offset value for index I4
$SW32
Control
Offset value for index I5
$SW33
Control
Offset value for index I6
$SW34
Control
Offset value for index I7
$SW35
Control
Offset value for index I8
$SW36
Control
Offset value for index I9
$SW37
Notification/control
Data Log Group Number
$SW38
Notification
Data Block Error Number
$SW39
Notification
Authentication level
$SW40
Notification/control
Range of initialize Alarm/Event History
Note: This is supported only by NS5-SQ1/-TQ1 PTs with lot number 15Z0 or later, NS8 PTs with lot
number 28X1 or later, NS10 PTs with lot number 11Y1 or later, NS12 PTs with lot number
14Z1 or later, and NS15 PTs with lot number 31114 or later.
The notification words are not write prohibited. In addition, the system will not restore values,
except when the status has changed.
System word memory is allocated to PLC memory as shown below.
Allocated Addresses for System Memory can be displayed by selecting PT – System
Settings in the CX-Designer and clicking the Initial Tab.
$SW = n
Word n: $SW0
Word n+1: $SW1
Word n+40: SW40
Reference • System memory can be allocated to PLC memory using the same procedure as for
NT-series PTs. For details, refer to 2-4-3 System Memory NT Compatibility in the
NS Series Programming Manual.
A-67
Appendix 11 Differences between "-V1"/"-V2" Models and Other Models
Appendix 11 Differences between "-V1"/"-V2" Models
and Other Models
In the NS Series, there are hardware items both with and without "-V1" and "-V2" at the
end of the model number.
Hardware items
without "-V1"
Hardware items
with "-V1"
Hardware items
with "-V2"
A-68
Model
NS12-TS00
NS12-TS01
NS10-TV00
NS10-TV-01
NS7-SV00
NS7-SV01
NS12-TS00-V1
NS12-TS01-V1
NS10-TV00-V1
NS10-TV01-V1
NS8-TV@0-V1
NS8-TV@1-V1
NS5-SQ00-V1
NS5-SQ01-V1
NS12-TS00-V2
NS12-TS01-V2
NS10-TV00-V2
NS10-TV01-V2
NS8-TV00-V2
NS8-TV01-V2
NS5-SQ00-V2
NS5-SQ01-V2
NS5-SQ10-V2
NS5-SQ11-V2
NS5-TQ00-V2
NS5-TQ01-V2
NS5-TQ10-V2
NS5-TQ11-V2
NS5-MQ00-V2
NS5-MQ01-V2
NS5-MQ10-V2
NS5-MQ11-V2
Notes
12.1 inches, no Ethernet connection
12.1 inches, Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, no Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, Ethernet connection
7.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
7.7 inches, Ethernet connection
12.1 inches, no Ethernet connection
12.1 inches, Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, no Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, Ethernet connection
8.0 inches, no Ethernet connection
8.0 inches, Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, Ethernet connection
12.1 inches, no Ethernet connection
12.1 inches, Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, no Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, Ethernet connection
8.4 inches, no Ethernet connection
8.4 inches, Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, Ethernet connection
Appendix 11 Differences between "-V1"/"-V2" Models and Other Models
The differences between "-V1" and "-V2" models and other models are shown below. For
details on the differences in software functions, refer to the Programming Manual.
Display device
Display color
Display area
View angle
Expansion
memory
interface
USB HOST
USB Slave
Ethernet
conformance
standard
Replacement
Battery
Without "-V1" or "-V2"
NS12-TS0@
NS10-TV0@
NS7SV0@
High-definition TFT color
STN color
LCD
LCD
256 colors
12.1 inches
Left/right
±60°,
Top 45°,
Bottom 55°
With
10.4 inches
Left/right,
±60°,
Top 35°,
Bottom 65°
7.7 inches
Left/right
±60°,
Top 35°,
Bottom 65°
Without
Without
Without
10Base-T
(Ethernet models only)
C500-BAT08
NS12-TS0@-V2
With "-V1"
NS12-TS0@- NS10-TV0@NS8TV@@-V1
V1
V1
High-definition TFT color LCD
NS5-SQ0@V1
STN color
LCD
256 colors (32,768 colors for BMP/JPEG images, NS5: 4,096
colors for BMP/JPEG images)
12.1 inches
10.4 inches
8.0 inches
5.7 inches
Left/right
Left/right
Left/right
Left/right
±60°,
±60°,
±60°,
±50°,
Top 45°,
Top 35°,
Top 50°,
Top 30°,
Bottom 55°
Bottom 65°
Bottom 60°
Bottom 50°
Without
With
With
10Base-T/100Base-T
(Ethernet models only)
CPM2ABAT01
NS10-TV0@-V2
High-definition TFT color LCD
Display color
256 colors (32,768 colors for BMP/JPEG images)
Display area
View angle
12.1 inches
Left/right ±80°,
Top 80°, Bottom
80°
Expansion
memory
interface
USB HOST
USB Slave
Ethernet
conformance
standard
Replacement
Battery
Without
10.4 inches
Left/right ±70°,
Top 65°, Bottom
65°
CJ1W-BAT01
With "-V2"
NS8-TV@@- NS5-SQ@@-V2 (See
V2
note 1.)
TFT color LCD
Display device
8.4 inches
Left/right
±80°,
Top 80°,
Bottom 60°
With
With
10Base-T/100Base-T (Ethernet models only)
Without
NS5-TQ@@-V2
High-definition
TFT color LCD
(See note 2.)
256 colors (32,768 colors for BMP/JPEG
images)
5.7 inches
Left/right ±80°,
Top 80°, Bottom 60°
NS5-MQ@@V2
Monochrome
STN LCD
Monochrome/
16 grayscale
levels
Left/right ±45°,
Top 20°, Bottom
40°
Without
CJ1W-BAT01
Note 1.
Specifications are as follows for NS5-SQ@@-V2 PTs with lot number 2110
(manufactured January 21, 2010) or earlier.
Item
Specification
Display device
STN color LCD
Display colors
256 colors (4,096 colors for BMP/JPEG images)
View angle
Left 50°, Top 45°, Bottom 50°
Refer to NS-series PT Lot Numbers on page A-8 for information on lot numbers.
2.
The NS5-TQ PTs (high-luminance TFT LCDs) are approx. 70 cd/m2 brighter than the
NS5-SQ PTs (TFT LCDs).
A-69
Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu
Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu
This section describes the NS5 System Menu screen. Some items are slightly different for
the NS8, NS10, NS12, and NS15. Check all items in the table below before setting or
monitoring.
(9)
(1)
(5)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(8)
No.
(1)
Setting/
display
Setting/
display
Setting
6-2-8
Setting
6-2-1
Alarm/Event History
Setting
6-2-2
Data Log
Setting
6-2-3
Operation Log
Setting
6-2-4
Error Log
Setting
6-2-5
Start-up Waiting Time
Setting
6-3-1
Screen Saver
Setting
6-3-2
Key Press Sound
Setting
6-3-3
Buzzer Sound
Setting
6-3-4
Backlight
Setting
6-3-5
Contrast
Setting
6-3-11
Calendar Check
Setting
6-3-6
Changing Value in Device Monitor Setting
Setting
6-3-10
CJK Han Unification Priority
Setting
6-3-12
Alarm Monitor Registration Procedure
Setting
6-3-13
Tag Update Notification Message Setting
Setting
6-3-15
Menu
Initialize
Item/settings
Memory Card (remove)
Initializing Internal Holding Memories
($HB/$HW)
Screen Data Area Format
Reference
6-2-7
History File Initialize or Save
(2)
A-70
PT Settings
Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu
No.
(3)
Project Title
Setting/
display
Display
6-4-1
Number of Labels
Display
6-4-2
Initial Screen
Setting
6-4-3
Initial Label
Setting
6-4-4
Barcode input when using keypad
Setting
6-4-5
Alarm/Event History
Display
6-4-6
Data Log
Display
6-4-7
Operation Log
Display
6-4-8
Error Log
Display
6-4-9
Display
6-4-10
Setting
6-5
Level
Setting
6-5-2
Time Out
Setting
6-5-2
Timeout (min)
Setting
6-5-2
Switch Screen when canceling
authentication
Switch Screen No.
Setting
6-5-2
Setting
6-5-2
Menu
Project
Item/settings
Reference
History Recording Method
(4)
Password
Addresses Allocated to System Memory
($SB,$SW)
Password Change
Password mode
(5)
(6)
Comm.
Data Check
Automatic Communications Recovery
(Comms. Auto-return)
Timeout Interval
Setting
6-6-1
Setting
6-6-1
Retry Count
Setting
6-6-1
Serial Port A or B Communications Settings
Setting
6-6-1
Ethernet Communications Settings
Setting
6-6-4
Screen Number
Setting
6-7
Show Address
Setting
6-7
A-71
Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu
No.
(7)
Menu
Item/settings
Special Screen
Error Occurrence/Frequency for All History Files
Setting/
display
Reference
Alarm History
Display
6-8-1
Operations Log
Display
6-8-2
Error Log
Display
6-8-3
Display
6-8-11
6-8-4
Communication Test
Setting/
display
Setting
6-8-5
Display Capture Data
Display
6-8-8
Memory Card Transfer
Setting
6-8-9
External Application
Start-up
Setting
6-8-10
System Version
Special Functions
Device Monitor
(8)
(9)
A-72
Hardware
Check
LCD Check
Display
6-9-1
Touch Switch Check
Display
6-9-2
Language
Selection
Language Selection
Display
6-2-6
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the cover of the
manual.
Cat. No. V083-E1-26
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page
numbers refer to the previous version.
Revision code
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Date
April 2003
October 2003
Revised content
Original production
Added a new section on starting external applications.
Added information throughout the manual to include the NS5-V1.
July 2004
Changes and corrections for version upgrade.
February 2005
Changes and corrections related to the addition of the NS5-V2
Series.
October 2005
Changes and corrections related to the addition of the NS12-V2,
NS10-V2, and NS8-V2 Series.
July 2006
Changes related to release of the CX-Designer.
July 2007
Changes and corrections for version upgrade.
March 2008
Added new Application Precautions and changed their order.
Added Conformance to EC Directives information to sections 2
and 3.
Changed enclosure rating information in Appendix 1.
June 2008
Changes related to upgrade and addition of NS5-SQ1@-V2,
NS5-TQ1@-V2, and NS5-MQ1@-V2.
October 2008
Changes related to version upgrade.
November 2008 Changes and corrections
April 2009
Changes related to version upgrade.
August 2009
Changes and corrections
December 2009 Additions related to Windows 7.
February 2010
Revisions accompanying changes in display device
specifications.
March 2010
Added information on grounding.
October 2010
Changes related to version upgrade.
November 2010 Revisions accompanying changes to the backlight in the
NS5-SQ1/-TQ1.
July 2011
Changes for support for NJ-series Controllers.
October 2011
Revision accompanying changes to the backlight in the
NS8/NS10/NS12.
January 2012
Changes related to version upgrade.
April 2012
Changes related to version upgrade.
April 2012
Changes related to changes in lot numbers.
September 2013 Additions related to Windows 8.
December 2013 Revisions accompanying changes to the backlight in the NS15.
April 2015
Revision for support NX Series.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising